1998 Seadoo Shop Manual

www.SeaDooManuals.
net
Legal deposit:
National Library of Quebec
National Library of Canada
All rights reserved. No parts of this manual may be
reproduced in any form without the prior written
permission of Bombardier Inc.
Bombardier Inc. 1998

Printed in Canada
*Registered trademarks of Bombardier Inc.

Loctite
is a trademark of Loctite Corporation

Snap-on
is a trademark of Snap-on Tools Corporation

Gelcote
is a trademark of Gelcote International Limited

www.SeaDooManuals.net
I
SECTION SUBSECTION
PAGE
SAFETY NOTICE................................................................................................................................... III
WHATS NEW....................................................................................................................................... IV
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................... V
01 SERVICE TOOLS
AND PRODUCTS
01 - Mandatory service tools............................................................ 01-01-1
02 - Optional service tools................................................................ 01-02-1
03 - Service products ....................................................................... 01-03-1
02 MAINTENANCE 01 - Table of contents ...................................................................... 02-01-1
02 - Periodic inspection chart ........................................................... 02-02-1
03 - Flushing and lubrication............................................................. 02-03-1
04 - Water-flooded engine................................................................ 02-04-1
05 - Storage...................................................................................... 02-05-1
03 TROUBLESHOOTING 01 - Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 03-01-1
04 ENGINE 01 - Table of contents ...................................................................... 04-01-1
02 - Leak test ................................................................................... 04-02-1
03 - Removal and installation ........................................................... 04-03-1
04 - Magneto system....................................................................... 04-04-1
05 - Top end ..................................................................................... 04-05-1
06 - Bottom end ............................................................................... 04-06-1
07 - Rotary valve............................................................................... 04-07-1
08 - Exhaust system......................................................................... 04-08-1
05 COOLING SYSTEM 01 - Table of contents ...................................................................... 05-01-1
02 - Circuit, components and care ................................................... 05-02-1
06 FUEL SYSTEM 01 - Table of contents ...................................................................... 06-01-1
02 - Fuel circuit................................................................................. 06-02-1
03 - Air intake ................................................................................... 06-03-1
04 - Carburetor ................................................................................. 06-04-1
07 LUBRICATION
SYSTEM
01 - Table of contents ...................................................................... 07-01-1
02 - Oil injection system................................................................... 07-02-1
03 - Oil injection pump ..................................................................... 07-03-1
08 ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
02 - Ignition system.......................................................................... 08-02-1
03 - Charging system....................................................................... 08-03-1
04 - Starting system......................................................................... 08-04-1
05 - Instruments and accessories .................................................... 08-05-1
06 - Digitally encoded security system............................................ 08-06-1
09 PROPULSION
SYSTEM
02 - Jet pump................................................................................... 09-02-1
03 - Drive system............................................................................. 09-03-1
04 - Reverse system........................................................................ 09-04-1
05 - Variable trim system................................................................. 09-05-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GTX RFI
II
10 STEERING SYSTEM 01 - Table of contents...................................................................... 10-01-1
02 - SPX model ................................................................................ 10-02-1
03 - GTS model ................................................................................ 10-03-1
04 - GS, GSX Limited, GTI and GTX Limited.................................... 10-04-1
05 - XP Limited ................................................................................ 10-05-1
06 - Alignment ................................................................................. 10-06-1
11 SUSPENSION 01 - Table of contents...................................................................... 11-01-1
02 - Direct action suspension .......................................................... 11-02-1
12 HULL/BODY 01 - Table of contents...................................................................... 12-01-1
02 - Adjustment and repair .............................................................. 12-02-1
13 TECHNICAL DATA 01 - SPX model ................................................................................ 13-01-1
02 - GS and GSX Limited ................................................................. 13-02-1
03 - XP Limited ................................................................................ 13-03-1
04 - GTS model ................................................................................ 13-04-1
05 - GTI and GTX Limited................................................................. 13-05-1
14 WIRING DIAGRAMS 01 - Wiring diagrams........................................................................ 14-01-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GTX RFI
III
SAFETY NOTICE 0
This manual was primarily published to be used by watercraft technicians trained by the manufactur-
er who are already familiar with all service and maintenance procedures relating to Bombardier made
Sea-Doo watercraft.
Please note that the instructions will apply only if proper hand tools and special service tools are used.
It is understood that this manual may be translated into another language. In the event of any discrepan-
cy, the English version shall prevail.
The content depicts parts and/or procedures applicable to the particular product at its time of manufac-
ture. It does not include dealer modifications, whether authorized or not by Bombardier, after manufac-
turing the product.
The use of Bombardier parts is most strongly recommended when considering replacement of any com-
ponent. Dealer and/or distributor assistance should be sought in case of doubt.
Torque wrench tightening specifications must be strictly adhered to. Locking devices (ex.: locking disk,
lock nut) must be installed or replaced with new ones, where specified. If the efficiency of a locking
device is impaired, it must be renewed.
This manual emphasizes particular information denoted by the wording and symbols:
NOTE: Indicates supplementary information needed to fully complete an instruction.
Although the mere reading of such information does not eliminate the hazard, your understanding of the
information will promote its correct use. Always use common shop safety practice.
This information relates to the preparation and use of Bombardier watercraft and has been utilized safely
and effectively by Bombardier Inc. However, Bombardier Inc. disclaims liability for all damages and/or
injuries resulting from the improper use of the contents. We strongly recommend that any services be
carried out and/or verified by a highly skilled professional technician. It is understood that certain modifi-
cations may render use of the watercraft illegal under existing federal, provincial and state regulations.
N
WARNING
Identifies an instruction which, if not followed, could cause serious personal injury including
possibility of death.
-
CAUTION
Denotes an instruction which, if not followed, could severely damage watercraft components.
SAFETY NOTICE
IV
WHATS NEW 0
SERVICE TOOLS AND PRODUCTS 01
Complete new section.
MAGNETO SYSTEM 04-04
New procedure to lock crankshaft on the 947 engine.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 04-03
New service tool for engine alignment procedure.
TOP END 04-05
New service tool to extract the piston pin for all engines.
New piston/cylinder wall and ring end gap clearances.
New service tool to install dogleg circlip on the 947 engine.
New RAVE valve adjustment on the 787 engine.
BOTTOM END 04-06
New service tools for PTO flywheel removal and installation on the 947 engine.
CARBURETOR 06-04
Carburetors on the 947 engine are rotated 180. There is a new calibration and the diaphragms are
opened all the time to the atmosphere. There is no more need for a throttle position switch, amplifier
and solenoid.
Use of Loctite 242 (blue) to carburetor mounting screws is replaced by Loctite 577 on all models.
OIL INJECTION PUMP 07-03
New oil injection pump cable for the 947 engine.
IGNITION SYSTEM 08-03
New testing procedures using a multimeter.
CHARGING SYSTEM 08-04
New testing procedures using a multimeter.
WHATS NEW
V
INTRODUCTION 0
This Shop Manual covers BOMBARDIER made
SEA-DOO
watercraft models SPX 5838/5839,

GS 5626/5844, GSX Limited 5629/5845, XP Limit-
ed 5665/5667, GTS 5819, GTI 5836/5841and GTX
Limited 5837/5842.
HULL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(H.I.N.)
SPX and GTS Models
It is located at right hand rear side of hull.
1. Hull Identification Number (H.I.N.)
All Other Models
It is located on floorboard at the rear of the water-
craft.
1. Hull Identification Number (H.I.N.)
All Models
The Hull Identification Number is composed of 9
digits:
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (E.I.N.)
717 Engine
The Engine Identification Number is located on
the upper side of the magneto housing.
TYPICAL
1. Engine Identification Number (E.I.N.)
F01L8XA
1
F08L0QA 1
Z Z N 1 2 3 4 5 L 4 9 5
Model year
Serial
number*
*A letter may also be used as a digit.
F00A0CA
Month of production
Year of production
*A letter may also be used as a digit.
1
F01D01A
INTRODUCTION
VI
787 Engine
the upper crankcase on PTO side.
947 Engine
the upper crankcase on MAGNETO side.
ARRANGEMENT OF THIS
MANUAL
The manual is divided into 14 major sections:
01 SERVICE TOOLS AND PRODUCTS
02 MAINTENANCE
03 TROUBLESHOOTING
04 ENGINE
05 COOLING SYSTEM
06 FUEL SYSTEM
07 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
08 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
09 PROPULSION SYSTEM
10 STEERING SYSTEM
11 SUSPENSION
12 HULL/BODY
13 TECHNICAL DATA
14 WIRING DIAGRAMS
Several sections are divided in various subsec-
tions. There is a table of contents at the beginning
of many sections.
F01D87A
1
F06D15A
1
INTRODUCTION
VII
Section 03 ENGINE
Subsection 04 (MAGNETO SYSTEM)
MAGNETO SYSTEM
717 Engine
03-04-1
F01D4WS
12 11
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
13
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite
242
4
6 8
Loctite
242
7
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
Loctite
242
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
9
Loctite
242
5
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
3
14
Loctite
242
4
Loctite
648
10
15
145 Nm
(107 lbfft)
Anti-seize
lubricant
2
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
1
Page heading
indicates section
and subsection
detailed.
Tightening torque nearby fastener.
In this case, nut must be torqued to
145 Nm (107 lbfft).
Exploded view assits
you in identifying
parts and related
positions.
TYPICAL PAGE
F01A09S
Illustration number
for publishing
process.
Subsection title
indicates
beginning of the
subsection.
Dotted box
contains parts of
a particular
model or an
exploded view.
Page numbering system:
03: ENGINE section
04: MAGNETO SYSTEM subsection
1: First page of this subsection
Italic sub-title
above exploded
view indicate
pertaining models.
Drop represents
a liquid product
to be applied to a
surface. In this case
Loctite 242 to
screw threads.
Bold face number
indicates special
procedure
concerning this part.
Pay attention to torque specifi-
cations. Some of these are in
lbfin instead of lbfft. Use appro-
priate torque wrench.
CAUTION M
INTRODUCTION
VIII
1
2
Section 06 FUEL SYSTEM
Subsection 03 (CARBURETORS)
06-03-4
Step : Install pump gauge tester to pulse nipple
Step : Pump tester until it reaches the desired pressure
1. Fuel outlet nipple
2. Fuel inlet nipple
A. 28 kPa (4 PSI)
3, Diaphragm
XP Model Only
CARBURETOR REMOVAL
Inspect parts for corrosion dammage (shaft, butterfly,
spring screw, check valve housing, etc.).
PUMP DIAPHRAGM LEAK TEST
TYPICAL
To remove carburetors from engine, proceed as fol-
lows:
Remove air vent tube support.
Unlock retaining slides holding air intake silencer base.
Remove air intake silencer base from watercraft.
Remove screws holding flame arrester base support
to cylinder head cover.
Unscrew base retaining screws then remove base from
carburetors and move to front of watercraft.
Turn the valve to OFF position.
NOTE: For fuel line removal, use pliers (P/N 295
000 054).
Disconnect pulse line from fuel pump.
Disconnect fuel fuel supply line from fuel pump.
Disconnect fuel return line.
Disconnect oil injection pump cable, throttle cable and
choke cable.
Remove screws no. 6 and lock washers no. 7 retaining
carburetors.
All Others Models
Remove 4 bolts no. 8 and lock washers no. 12 from
rotary valve cover then move carburetors and rotary
valve cover on top of engine.
NOTE: When removing rotary valve cover , pay
attention that the rotary valve stay in place, other-wise
it must be timed.
Remove carburetors from intake manifold.
Disconnect fuel bypass line between carburetors (twin
carburetors).
Remove carburetor(s) from rotary valve cover.
DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION
Using a suitable pump gauge tester, perform the fol-
lowing test proceeding as follows:
- Install pump gauge tester (P/N 295 000 083) on pulse
nipple.
- Pump tester until it reaches 28 kPa (4 PSI).
Diaphragm must stand pressure for 10 seconds. If
pressure drops, replace diaphragm.
TYPICAL PAGE
Sub-title with part
number(s) from exploded
view followed by part
name(s).
"TYPICAL" mention
indicates a general
view which does not
represent full detail.
Sub-sub-title in this
case indicates that
particular procedure
for XP is finished, so
from this point, all
others models are
concerned.
Title in italic indicates a
particular procedure
concerning a model.
Service tool to be
used to perform a
certain procedure.
Title indicates main
procedure to be
carried-out.
F01A0AS
Sub-sub-title in
capital indicates a
particular testing,
adjustment or
repair procedure.
Illustration
always follows
text it is
pertained to.
Numbers in a frame
are used to give a
sequence to be
perfomed.
Numbers are used
for description of
components.
Letters are used for
any measures.
F01F0XB
A
2
1
1 2
Bold numbers in the
text refer to the parts
shown in the exploded
view at the beginning
of the subsection.
INTRODUTION
IX
GENERAL INFORMATION
The use of RIGHT and LEFT indications in the text,
always refers to driving position (when sitting on
watercraft).
1. Left (port)
2. Right (starboard)
The information and component/system descrip-
tions contained in this manual are correct at time
of publication. Bombardier Inc. however, main-
tains a policy of continuous improvement of its
products without imposing upon itself any obliga-
tion to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Bombardier Inc. reserves the right at any time to
discontinue or change specifications, designs,
features, models or equipment without incurring
obligation.
This Shop Manual uses technical terms which
may be different from the ones of the Parts Cata-
logs.
When ordering parts always refer to the specif-
ic model Parts Catalogs.
ILLUSTRATIONS AND
PROCEDURES
The illustrations show the typical construction of
the different assemblies and, in all cases, may not
reproduce the full detail or exact shape of the parts
shown, however, they represent parts which have
the same or a similar function.
As many of the procedures in this manual are in-
terrelated, we suggest, that before undertaking
any task, you read and thoroughly understand the
entire section or subsection in which the proce-
dure is contained.
A number of procedures throughout the book re-
quire the use of special tools. Before undertaking
any procedure, be sure that you have on hand all
the tools required, or approved equivalents.
Technical Publications
Bombardier Inc.
Valcourt (Quebec), Canada
F01L45B
1 2
-
CAUTION
These watercraft are designed with parts di-
mensioned in both the metric and the impe-
rial systems. When replacing fasteners, make
sure to use only those recommended by Bom-
bardier.
INTRODUCTION
Section 01 SERVICE TOOLS AND PRODUCTS
Subsection 01 (MANDATORY SERVICE TOOLS)
01-01-1
MANDATORY SERVICE TOOLS 0
NOTE: The numbers outlined in black (example: ) are reference numbers to tools from other divi-
sions (Ski-Doo Snowmobiles and/or Sea-Doo Jet Boats). Matching reference numbers indicate the same
tool is being used on both products, even if the part numbers are different.
ENGINE
1
Degree wheel
P/N 295 000 007
A00B334
APPLICATION
717 and 787 engines.
Rubber pad
P/N 295 000 101
F01B0J4
APPLICATION
Rubber pad
P/N 290 877 032
F06B064
APPLICATION
947 engine.
1
360 350
340
330
3
2
0
3
1
0
3
0
0
2
9
0
2
8
0
2
7
0
2
6
0
2
5
0
2
4
0
2
3
0
2
2 0
2 1 0
2 0 0 1 9 0 1 8 0
1 7 0
1 6 0
1
5
0
1
4
0
1
3
0
1
2
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
0
40
30
20
10
10
20
30
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
0
9
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
0
1
3
0
1
4
0
1
5
0
1 6 0
1 7 0 1 8 0 1 9 0
2 0 0
2 1 0
2
2
0
2
3
0
2
4
0
2
5
0
2
6
0
2
7
0
2
8
0
2
9
0
3
0
0
3
1
0
3
2
0
3
30
340
350 360
547
NEW
Bearing pusher
P/N 290 876 500
A00B2J4
APPLICATION
717 engine.
Piston circlip installer
A) P/N 290 877 016
B) P/N 290 877 517
F06B014
APPLICATION
A) 717 and 787 engines.
B) 947 engine.
PTO flywheel
remover/installer
P/N 295 000 001
F01J0T4
APPLICATION
717 engine.
NOTE: This tool is also used for the
impeller.
12
548
553
Bearing pusher
P/N 290 876 501
F00B074
APPLICATION
787 engine.
Starter drive bearing pusher
P/N 290 876 502
F06B054
APPLICATION
947 engine.
Piston ring compressor (2)
P/N 290 876 965
F01B1T4
APPLICATION
947 engine.
NEW
NEW
NEW
01-01-2
F01D884
1) Puller
P/N 290 876 298
2) Protective cap
(both ends)
P/N 290 876 557
3) Ring (both ends)
P/N 290 977 490
4) Ring halves (PTO)
P/N 290 977 475 (2)
5) Distance ring (MAG)
P/N 290 876 569
6) Ring halves (MAG)
P/N 290 276 025 (2)
7) Screw M8 x 40
P/N 290 840 681 (2)
8) Screw M8 x 70
P/N 290 841 201 (2)
APPLICATION
MAG side PTO side
8
1
5
2
3
4
4
6
8 7 7
200
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
Piston pin puller
P/N 529 035 503
F00B0T4
APPLICATION
All engines.
Sleeve set
A) P/N 529 035 542
(20 mm sleeve)
B) P/N 529 035 543
(21 mm sleeve)
F00B0U4
APPLICATION
A) 717 and 787 engines.
B) 947 engine.
Puller
P/N 290 876 488
F01B0I4
APPLICATION
Replacement parts:
1) P/N 290 240 860.
2) P/N 290 242 210.
NEW
NEW
562
2 1
Puller
P/N 295 000 106
A00C1A4
Puller plate
P/N 290 876 080
A00C1R4
Extension handle
P/N 295 000 125
F01D164
Screw M8 x 35 (3)
P/N 290 841 591
F00A094
Sleeve (3)
P/N 290 847 220
F00A0A4
APPLICATION
717 engine.
Pusher
P/N 290 876 605
A00C0Y4
APPLICATION
717 engine.
5
549
550
551
552
229
01-01-3
Alignment support plate kit
P/N 529 035 506
1) Alignment plates
A) P/N 529 035 507
B) P/N 529 035 508
2) Support
P/N 529 035 511
3) Screw (2)
P/N 222 082 565
Lock washer (2)
P/N 213 000 001
Flat washer (2)
P/N 217 081 410
F00B0F4
APPLICATION
All models.
A) 139.5 mm jet pump.
B) 155.6 mm jet pump.
Alignment shaft
P/N 295 000 141
F00B0G4
APPLICATION
All models.
Adapter
P/N 295 000 157
F00B054
APPLICATION
XP Limited.
NEW
MPEM programmer
P/N 529 035 502
A01B5B4
APPLICATION
All models.
Digital multimeter
P/N 529 022 000
F01B1O4
APPLICATION
All models.
Flywheel extractor
P/N 295 000 156
F00B044
APPLICATION
SPX and XP Limited.
567
242
777
Engine leak tester kit
P/N 295 500 352
F01B2Q5
APPLICATION
Ring gear puller tool
P/N 420 976 235
F01B294
APPLICATION
787 engine.
Ring gear blocking tool
P/N 295 000 155
F01B264
APPLICATION
787 engine.
778
569
568
01-01-4
Puller plate
P/N 529 035 533
F00B0S4
APPLICATION
947 engine.
Polygonal key
P/N 529 035 505
F00B0Y4
APPLICATION
Exhaust system of the 947 engine.
NEW
NEW
01-01-5
COOLING/FUEL/OIL SYSTEMS
Hose pincher
P/N 295 000 076
A01B2I4
APPLICATION
All models.
Gear holder
P/N 290 277 905
A00C164
APPLICATION
717 engine.
Pliers
P/N 295 000 070
Oetiker 1099
F01D174
APPLICATION
All models.
2
235
601
Pliers
P/N 295 000 054
Caillau
F01B1T4
APPLICATION
All models.
NOTE: This tool is also used for
the propulsion system.
Coupler hose
P/N 295 500 258
41 cm (16 in)
F01E0Z4
APPLICATION
SPX and GTS models.
606
752
01-01-6
PROPULSION SYSTEM
Impeller remover/installer
P/N 295 000 001
F01J0T4
APPLICATION
All models.
the PTO flywheel (on some mod-
els).
Pliers
P/N 295 000 069
Oetiker 1090
F01D184
APPLICATION
All models.
Impeller shaft holder
P/N 295 000 082
F01B0W4
APPLICATION
All models.
553
602
603
Bearing/seal installer
P/N 295 000 107
F01J4K4
APPLICATION
All models.
Impeller shaft guide
P/N 295 000 002
F01J1O4
APPLICATION
All models.
Pliers
P/N 295 000 054
Caillau
F01B1T4
APPLICATION
All models.
the fuel system.
604
605
606
VTS tool
P/N 295 000 133
F01B2P4
APPLICATION
SPX, GSX Limited and XP Limited.
607
Subsection 02 (OPTIONAL SERVICE TOOLS)
01-02-1
OPTIONAL SERVICE TOOLS 0
NOTE: The numbers outlined in black (example: ) are reference numbers to tools from other divi-
tool is being used on both products, even if the part numbers are different.
ENGINE
1
Ring compressor
P/N 290 876 979
A01B1T4
APPLICATION
717 and 787 engines (82 mm).
Coil centering tool
P/N 290 876 922
A01B1V4
APPLICATION
717 engine.
Cylinder aligning tool
P/N 290 876 904
A00B084
APPLICATION
717 engine.
Handle
P/N 290 877 650
A00C3V4
APPLICATION
Use with pushers (P/N 290 876 609
and 290 877 740).
751
209
220
758
Rotary valve shaft pusher
P/N 290 876 609
F01B2B4
APPLICATION
787 engine.
Oil seal pusher
P/N 290 877 740
F01B2C4
APPLICATION
787 engine.
Ring halves (2)
P/N 290 876 330
Ring
P/N 290 977 480
F01B2D4
APPLICATION
757
759
761
762
Distance gauge
A) P/N 529 034 800
B) P/N 529 034 900
C) P/N 290 876 627
D) P/N 290 876 622
F01B0H4
APPLICATION
A) 717 engine.
B) 787 engine.
C) 947 engine.
D) 947 engine.
Puller and bolt
P/N 529 035 548 (puller)
P/N 529 035 549 (bolt)
F01B294
APPLICATION
947 engine.
NOTE: Bolt can be used with man-
datory puller (P/N 420 976 235).
760
561
NEW
01-02-2
Stroboscopic timing light
P/N 529 031 900
A00B4F4
APPLICATION
All models.
A) Four-pin magneto harness
P/N 295 000 131
B) Six-pin magneto harness
P/N 295 000 136
F01B284
APPLICATION
A) 717 engine.
B) 787 and 947 engines.
Dial indicator (TDC gauge)
P/N 295 000 143
A00B4E4
APPLICATION
All models.
225
763
755
230
Digital/induction type
tachometer
P/N 295 000 100
F01B1G4
APPLICATION
All models.
Timing mark pointer
P/N 295 000 130
F01B2O4
APPLICATION
717 engine.
Timing mark pointer
P/N 295 000 135
F01H544
APPLICATION
237
774
754
Crimping tool
P/N 295 100 164
F00B0E4
APPLICATION
Contacts of AMP plug connectors.
All models except SPX and GTS.
Terminal remover
Not sold by Bombardier
Snap-on
TT 600-4
F01B1J4
APPLICATION
All models.
Safety lanyard switch tool
P/N 295 000 121
F01B244
APPLICATION
All models.
NEW
775
01-02-3
Slide hammer puller
Snap-on:Handle CJ93-1
Hammer CJ125-6
Claws CJ93-4
F01J0Z4
APPLICATION
NOTE: This tool is also used to
pull out impeller shaft seal.
Protective mat
P/N 295 000 128
F02B0A4
APPLICATION
All models.
F06B075
1) Puller
P/N 420 877 635
2) Protective cap
P/N 290 877 414
3) Screw
P/N 290 940 755
APPLICATION
947 engine.
889
3
2
1
Crankshaft protector
P/N 420 876 552
F00B034
APPLICATION
For use with pullers.
Gear/bearing puller
P/N 290 877 665
F04B034
APPLICATION
787 engine.
Exhaust outlet tool
P/N 295 000 132
F01B2A4
APPLICATION
All models.
764
765
831
Engine lifting device
Do it yourself
Refer to 04-03 then look for
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
F01D0A4
APPLICATION
717 engine.
Feeler gauge 45
F01B1K4
APPLICATION
Steering cable tool
P/N 295 000 145
F01B2P4
APPLICATION
All models except the SPX and
GTS.
Snap-on
FB 300 A
780
01-02-4
COOLING/FUEL/OIL SYSTEMS
Pump gauge tester
P/N 295 000 114
F01B0X4
APPLICATION
All models.
Lighted adjustable mirror
Snap-on
50101
F01B1I4
APPLICATION
All models.
Hose pincher
P/N 529 032 500
F01B234
APPLICATION
All models.
826
35
4
3
25 2
15
1
5
60
5 0
40
30
20
1 0
773
Spring compressor
P/N 529 027 100
A01B4O4
APPLICATION
XP Limited.
Suspension adjustment
wrench
P/N 529 012 200
A25A014
APPLICATION
XP Limited.
Flexible spout (oil)
P/N 414 837 300
F04B044
APPLICATION
All models.
833
834
Flushing adapter
P/N 295 500 473
F00B104
APPLICATION
All models except the SPX and
GTS.
Use with coupler hose (P/N 295
500 258).
01-02-5
PROPULSION SYSTEM
Fitting
P/N 295 000 086
F01B0Z4
APPLICATION
All models.
Slide hammer puller
Snap-on:Handle CJ93-1
Hammer CJ125-6
Claws CJ93-4
F01J0Z4
APPLICATION
All models.
NOTE: This tool is also used to re-
move rotary valve shaft bearing.
Hacksaw
Snap-on
HS3
F01B1M4
APPLICATION
All models.
828 Machinists square
Snap-on
PMF 122
F02B064
APPLICATION
GTS model.
Fitting remover
Do it yourself
Refer to JET PUMP 09-02
F01J2R4
APPLICATION
SPX and GTS models.
Jet pump bearing remover
P/N 295 000 144
F01J114
APPLICATION
All models.
Deep socket
14 mm
(9/16 in)
781
Impeller housing
remover
P/N 295 000 113
F01L2O4
APPLICATION
SPX and GTS models.
829
01-02-6
WATERCRAFT HANDLING
Dolly (with wheels)
P/N 295 000 126
F01B014
Beach wheels
(set of 2 wheels)
P/N 295 000 005
F01B074
APPLICATION
Dolly.
Tie-down with ratchet
3.60 m (12 ft) long
P/N 295 100 011
APPLICATION
All models.
876
877
885
Lift kit
P/N 295 100 044
F00B0Z4
APPLICATION
All models.
Tie-down
1.50 m (5 ft) long
P/N 295 100 010
F00B014
APPLICATION
All models.
884
Subsection 03 (SERVICE PRODUCTS)
01-03-1
SERVICE PRODUCTS 0
NOTE: The numbers outlined in black (example: ) are reference to product numbers from other divi-
product is being used, even if the part numbers are different.
Loctite
is a trademark of Loctite Corporation.

Permatex
is a trademark of Loctite Corporation.

Dow Corning
is a trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

1
Medium strength
threadlocker
P/N 293 800 015
Loctite 242 (blue)
(10 mL)
A00B324
High strength
threadlocker
P/N 293 800 005
Loctite 271 (red)
(10 mL)
A00B2U4
154
LOCTITE
REMOVABLE
THREADLOCKER 242
155
LOCTITE
271
Adhesive Sealant
High temperature
threadlocker
P/N 290 899 788
Loctite 648 (green)
(5 g)
A00B3D4
High temperature retaining
compound
P/N 293 800 039
Loctite 642
(50 mL)
F00B024
359
959
RETAINING COMPOUND
642
NET 1.69 FL .OZ. (50 ml)
LOCTITE
A
S
S
U
R
E
Retaining compound
P/N 413 703 100
Loctite

RC/609 (green)
(10 mL)
A00B2S4
General purpose instant
adhesive
P/N 293 800 021
Loctite 495
A00B2V4
Gasket eliminator
P/N 293 800 038
Loctite 518
(50 mL)
F01B124
151
LOCTITE
RC/609
373
376
518
01-03-2
Gasket stripper
P/N 295 000 110
(500 mL)
F01B1W4
Thread sealant
P/N 293 800 050
Loctite 577
(250 mL)
F00B0W4
Solvent
P/N 293 800 019
Loctite Safety
Solvent 755
340 g (12 oz)
A00B3M4
935
WARNING
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE
VAPOR HARMFUL
POISON
GASKET STRIPPER
295 000 110
500 ml
157
Primer for gasket eliminator
P/N 293 800 041
Loctite
764
A00B3N4
Pipe sealant
A) P/N 293 800 018
B) P/N 293 800 013
A) Loctite 592 B) Loctite 567
) (50 mL) (250 mL)
A00B2W4
Hylomar sealant
P/N 293 800 001
PL-32
(100 g)
A00B3F4
Sealant
P/N 293 530 011
Sikaflex 221
(350 mL)
F01B1D4
158
358
960
369
919
Sikaflex primer 449
P/N 293 530 012
(475 mL)
F01B1E4
Heat resistant sealant
P/N 413 709 200
Dow Corning 736
(90 mL)
A00B3U4
High temp RTV silicone
gasket maker
P/N 413 710 300
(85 g)
A02B044
918
374
DOW CORNING
RTV Sealant
7
3
6
Heat Resistant Sealant
961
01-03-3
Dielectric grease
P/N 293 550 004
Dow Corning
(150 g)
F01B164
Deoxit contact lubricant
P/N 293 550 015
(200 mL)
F00B0X4
Grease
P/N 293 550 005
(400 g)
A00B2L4
Synthetic grease
P/N 293 550 010
(400 g)
F01B154
350
NEW
924
912
SYNTHETIC GREASE
Super Lube grease
P/N 293 550 014
A00B474
Anti-seize lubricant
P/N 293 800 023
Loctite anti-seize lubricant
454 g (16 oz)
F01B174
BOMBARDIER LUBE
P/N 293 600 016
(12 x 14 oz)
F01B0S4
932
S
uper
Lube
PERMATEX
INDUSTRIAL
R
R
Synthetic Lubricant
Multi-Purpose
With Teflon
N
et Wt. 14.5 Oz. (411g)
R
362
913
B
OMBARDIER
L
UBE
340 g
DANGER
BOMBARDIER INC.
Sea-Doo / Ski-Doo Division
Valcourt, Qubec, Canada J0E 2LO
NEW!
upside down! Sprays
REPLACES SEA-DOO LUBE
ANTICORROSIVE LUBRICANT
Excellent for salt water and
high humidity environments
FLAMMABLE CONTAINER MAY EXPLODE IF HEATED.
DIRECT INHALATION OF SPRAY
MAY BE HARMFUL.
Bombardier storage oil
P/N 413 711 600
(12 x 350 g)
A02B054
Sea-Doo fuel stabilizer
P/N 413 408 600
236 mL (8 oz)
A00B3V4
732 Multi-purpose sealant
P/N 293 800 006
Dow Corning (90 mL)
(clear)
F01B1C4
375
FUEL
STABILIZER
NEW
917
01-03-4
BOMBARDIER-ROTAX
injection oil
P/N 413 802 900
(12 x 1 L)
F01B184
BOMBARDIER-ROTAX
injection oil
P/N 413 803 000 (3 x 4 L)
P/N 413 803 200 (205 L)
F01B2H4
BOMBARDIER-ROTAX
Formula XP-S synthetic
injection oil
P/N 413 710 500 (12 x 1 L)
F01B2G4
915
Two-stroke
Injection Oil
BOMBARDIER
1 U.S. quart
916
962
937
Two-Stroke Oil
1 liter (1.05 U.S. qt)
Synthetic
BOMBARDIER
FORMULA XP-S
BOMBARDIER-ROTAX Formula
XP-S
synthetic injection oil
P/N 413 711 000 (3 x 4 L)
P/N 413 710 700 (205 L)
F01B354
Sealant adhesive
P/N 293 800 033
Adchem 4511
(clear)
F01B1S4
The Righ Stuff
P/N 293 800 053
Permatex
(198 g)
F00B0V4
969
970
Injection Oil
4 U.S. quart
BOMBARDIER
Two-stroke
Two-Stroke Oil
SYNTHETIQUE
FORMULA XP-S
934
L A E S D A
A
D
C
H
E
M
SCELLANT ADHSIF PREMIRE QUALIT PREMIUMSEALANT ADHESIVE
Adhesive activator
P/N 293 530 036
(250 mL)
F01B1Z4
Jet pump oil
P/N 293 600 011
(12 x 6 oz)
Sea-Doo
synthetic jet pump oil
F01B0P4
Sea-Doo Cleaner
P/N 293 110 001 (400 g)
P/N 293 110 002 (4 L)
F01B2J4
931
ACTIVEUR D'ADHSIF
250 mL
POUR L'APPLICATION DE MOULURE
ET VINYLES SENSIBLES LA PRESSION
LORSQU'UNE MEILLEURE
ADHRENCE EST NCESSAIRE.
DANGER
-VITER TOUT CONTACT PROLONG AVEC LA PEAU
LAVER L'EAU FROIDE EN CAS DE CONTACT.
-UTILISER DANS UN ENDROIT BIEN AR.
-TENIR LE CONTENANT BIEN FERM.
-GARDEZ HORS DE LA PORTE DES ENFANTS.
-CONTIENT DU TRICHLORETYLNE.
-AVERTISSEMENT ! L'INHALATION DE CE PRODUIT
EST NOCIF.
N/P 293 530 036 FABRIQU AU
914
JET PUMP SYNTHETIC OIL

946
947
BOMBARDIER
CLEANER
DANGER
400 g
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE.
HARMFUL OR FATAL IF SWALLOWED.
VAPOUR HARMFUL. 293 110 002
DANGER
4 L
BOMBARDIER BOMBARDIER
01-03-5
SMC spray paint
A) Purple night metallic
P/N 293 500 120
B) Norwegian sea metallic
P/N 293 500 121
C) Titanium pearl
P/N 293 500 123
D) Colorado pearl
P/N 293 500 124
Sea-Doo paint for SMC
F01B0Q4
APPLICATION
Storage cover.
A) GTS model.
B) GTI model.
C) XP limited.
D) GTX limited.
Sea-Doo spray paint for gelcoat
A) Super white (140 g)
P/N 293 500 082
B) Viper red (140 g)
P/N 293 500 114
C) Marine green (140 g)
P/N 293 500 115
D) Amethyst (140 g)
P/N 293 500 122
E) Ice white (140 g)
P/N 293 500 125
F) Aztec red (140 g)
P/N 293 500 126
F01B1Q4
APPLICATION
A) SPX (body).
GTS (body/hull).
GTI (body).
B) GSX Limited (body/hull).
C) GTI (hull).
D) GSI (hull).
E) GTX Limited (body).
F) GTX Limited (hull).
956
VERTICAL
FANSPRAY
PATTERN
HORIZONTAL
FANSPRAY
PATTERN
ROTATE
VALVE
NOZZLE 1/4
TURN TO
CHANGE
SPRAY
PATTERN
Danvern Fanspray- A Sprayon Exclusive Feature
DANGER
D
ANGER
GELCOAT
PAINT
POUR
PEINTURE
Gelcoat (liquid)
A) Super white (1 L)
P/N 293 500 075
B) Marine green (1L)
P/N 293 500 097
APPLICATION
A) SPX (body).
GTS (body/hull).
GTI (body).
B) GTI (hull).
Gelcoat repair kit
P/N 295 500 590
F01B0R4
APPLICATION
All 1998 models.
943
02-01-1
Section 02 MAINTENANCE
Subsection 01 (TABLE OF CONTENTS)
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
PERIODIC INSPECTION CHART............................................................................................ 02-02-1
FLUSHING AND LUBRICATION............................................................................................ 02-03-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 02-03-1
PROCEDURE...................................................................................................................... 02-03-1
WATER-FLOODED ENGINE................................................................................................... 02-04-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 02-04-1
PROCEDURE...................................................................................................................... 02-04-1
STORAGE............................................................................................................................... 02-05-1
GTX RFI
Subsection 02 (PERIODIC INSPECTION CHART)
02-02-1
PERIODIC INSPECTION CHART 0
NOTE: Servicing period is given in hours. Shaded area shows the maintenance frequency.
Every 10 hours in salt water use.
These items have to be initially checked after 25 hours. Thereafter, servicing to be made as specified
in this chart.
Daily flushing in salt water or foul water use.
DESCRIPTION
FREQUENCY
Every
10 hours
Every
25 hours
Every
50 hours
Every
100 hours or
seasonally
Lubrication/corrosion protection of metallic components
Engine ignition timing
Spark plug replacement
Throttle/choke cables, inspection/lubrication
Flame arrester inspection (717 and 787 engines)
Carburetor adjustment including choke/throttle cable adjustments and linkage
RAVE valve cleaning (787 and 947 engines)
Engine counterbalance shaft oil level (787 and 947 engines)
Water flow regulator valve inspection (787 and 947 engines)
Oil injection pump adjustment
Fuel filter and oil filter inspection
Fuel filter and oil filter replacement
Engine head bolts or nuts, retorque
Steering system inspection
Reverse system/reverse cable adjustment (if applicable)
Variable trim system (if applicable)
Fastener tightening (flame arrester support, carburetor(s), engine mount, exhaust
system, etc.)
Muffler, battery and reservoir fastening devices
Fuel/oil lines, check valve and hose inspection, fuel system pressurization
Fuel/vent line pressure relief valve inspection
Inspect/clean engine drain hose
Water tank trap drain inspection (GTS)
Bailer pick up inspection
Battery condition
Electrical connections (starter, battery, etc.)
Monitoring beeper
Jet pump reservoir oil level/oil condition
Jet pump oil replacement
Jet pump cover pusher inspection
Impeller condition and impeller/wear ring clearance
Drive shaft boot/spline condition (both ends)
PTO flywheel and seal carrier lubrication (if applicable)
Water intake grate condition
Hull condition
Cooling system flushing
Subsection 03 (FLUSHING AND LUBRICATION)
02-03-1
FLUSHING AND LUBRICATION 0
GENERAL
Flushing the cooling system with fresh water is
essential to neutralize corroding effects of salt or
other chemical products present in water. It will
help to clean up sand, salt, shells or other particles
in water jackets (engine, exhaust manifold, tuned
pipe) and/or hoses.
Flushing and engine lubrication should be per-
formed when the watercraft is not expected to be
used further the same day or when the watercraft
is stored for any extended time.
PROCEDURE
Clean jet pump by spraying water in its inlet and
outlet and then spray BOMBARDIER LUBE lubri-
cant.
SPX and GTS Models
Remove seat to allow access to cooling system.
Remove dust cap from fitting spigot and attach
coupler hose (P/N 295 500 258). Make sure cou-
pler hose is properly locked to fitting spigot.
Install a hose pincher on water outlet hose.
SPX MODEL
1. Fitting spigot
2. Coupler hose
3. Hose pincher
GTS MODEL
1. Fitting spigot
2. Coupler hose
3. Hose pincher
-
CAUTION
Failure to flush cooling system, when neces-
sary, will severely damage engine and/or ex-
haust system. Never flush a hot engine. Make
sure engine operates during entire procedure.
N
WARNING
Perform this operation in a well ventilated
area. Do not touch any electrical parts or jet
pump area when engine is running.
N
WARNING
Always remove safety lanyard cap from
switch to prevent accidental engine starting
before cleaning the jet pump area. Engine
must not be running for this operation.
-
CAUTION
This prevents water from exiting through out-
let socket. Remove hose pincher after flush-
ing operation.
F01E28A 3 1 2
F02E03A 1 2 3
02-03-2
Attach other end of coupler hose to a garden hose.
All Models Except SPX and GTS
Connect a garden hose to the water outlet located
at the rear of the watercraft.
1. Water outlet
NOTE: A quick connect adapter can be used to
ease garden hose installation.
1. Quick connect adapter
1. Garden hose installed
All Models
Start the engine then immediately open the water
tap.
Run the engine about 3 minutes at a fast idle
around 3500 RPM.
Spray BOMBARDIER LUBE lubricant through air
intake silencer keeping engine at fast idle.
-
CAUTION
Do not open water tap yet.
F06E01A
1
F00E01A
1
;
WARNING
Do not touch any electrical parts or jet pump
area when engine is running.
-
CAUTION
Never flush a hot engine. Always start the
engine before opening the water tap. Open
water tap immediately after engine is start-
ed to prevent overheating.
F07E01A 1
02-03-3
SPX, GS, GTS AND GTI MODELS
1. Air intake silencer
2. Pull plug
3. Spray BOMBARDIER LUBE here
GSX LIMITED, XP LIMITED AND GTX LIMITED
NOTE: Lubrication of engine should be done at
least for 1 minute.
After approximately half a minute, close fuel valve
to run engine out of fuel while lubricating.
Close the water tap then stop the engine.
Disconnect the garden hose.
SPX and GTS Models
Unlock and remove coupler hose. Reinstall dust
cap over fitting spigot.
Remove hose pincher from water outlet hose.
All Models Except SPX and GTS Models
All Models
Wipe up any residual water from the engine.
Remove spark plug cables and connect them on
the grounding device.
-
CAUTION
When engine begins to run irregularly be-
cause of fuel starvation, immediately close
the water tap to stop water flow before en-
gine dies.
F01F25A
1
2
3
F06F0CA
1
2
-
CAUTION
Always close the water tap before stopping
the engine.
-
CAUTION
Serious engine damage can occur if hose
pincher is not removed.
-
CAUTION
Remove quick connect adapter after flush-
ing operation (if used).
;
WARNING
Always use spark plug cable grounding de-
vice when removing spark plugs.
02-03-4
GTS MODEL
1. Spark plug cables on grounding device
SPX, GS AND GTI MODELS
XP LIMITED
1. Grounding device
GSX LIMITED
F01H64A
1
F00H0DA
1
F00H0AA
1
F06H1WA 1
02-03-5
GTX LIMITED
1. Grounding device
Remove both spark plugs and spray BOMBAR-
DIER LUBE lubricant into each cylinder.
Crank the engine a few turns to distribute the oil
onto cylinder wall.
Apply anti-seize lubricant on spark plug threads
then reinstall them.
Reinstall plug on air intake silencer cover (SPX,
GS, GTS and GTI models).
NOTE: Engine fogging should be done with
BOMBARDIER LUBE lubricant whenever the wa-
tercraft is to be stored for a few days or a long
period.
-
CAUTION
Never leave rags or tools in the engine com-
partment or in the bilge.
F07H07A
1
Subsection 04 (WATER-FLOODED ENGINE)
02-04-1
WATER-FLOODED ENGINE 0
GENERAL
If engine is water-flooded, it must be serviced
within a few hours after the event. Otherwise en-
gine will have to be overhauled.
PROCEDURE
Check fuel and oil reservoirs for water contamina-
tion. If necessary, siphon and refill with fresh flu-
ids.
Turn fuel valve to OFF position then drain fuel filter
bowl. Refer to FUEL CIRCUIT 06-02.
Drain bilge if water is present.
Remove spark plug cables and connect them on
the grounding device.
GTS MODEL
SPX, GS AND GTI MODELS
XP LIMITED
1. Grounding device
-
CAUTION
A water-flooded engine must be properly lu-
bricated, operated then lubricated again,
otherwise parts will be seriously damaged.
N
WARNING
Never crank engine with spark plugs re-
moved unless spark plug cables are con-
nected to the grounding device.
F01H64A
1
F00H0DA
1
F00H0AA
1
02-04-2
GSX LIMITED
GTX LIMITED
1. Grounding device
Remove spark plugs and dry them with a clean
cloth. A contact cleaner spray can be used. It may
be preferable to replace spark plugs. Do NOT in-
stall spark plugs on engine.
Crank engine to drain crankcase.
Spray BOMBARDIER LUBE lubricant (P/N 293
600 016) into spark plug holes.
Crank engine again.
Reinstall spark plugs and spark plug cables.
787 and 947 Engines
Remove the filler plug of the counterbalance shaft
on the engine crankcase.
787 ENGINE
1. Remove filler plug
947 ENGINE
1. Remove filler plug
Insert a wire through oil level hole to check oil
condition. A whitish oil indicates water contami-
nation and must be replaced.
787 Engine
In order to replace the oil, remove the drain plug
of the counterbalance shaft located on the PTO
side of the lower crankcase.
-
CAUTION
Be careful when cranking engine, water will
spray out from spark plug holes.
F06H1WA 1
F07H07A
1
F07D06A
1
F06D2CA 1
02-04-3
1. Drain plug
Drain completely the crankcase oil of the counter-
balance shaft. Reinstall drain plug with Loctite
515.
Add 30 mL (1 oz) of SAE 30 motor oil.
Reinstall filler plug.
947 Engine
Siphon the oil and add 40 mL (1.35 oz) of SAE 30
motor oil.
Reinstall filler plug.
All Models
Turn fuel valve to ON position.
Start engine; It may be necessary to use the
choke. If engine does not start, repeat previous
steps as necessary.
NOTE: If engine does not start after several at-
tempts, check ignition system for spark occur-
rence. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM 08-02.
Check crankshaft if needed, it may be misaligned
or deflected. Refer to BOTTOM END 04-06.
After engine has started, spray BOMBARDIER
LUBE lubricant through air intake silencer while
engine is running.
717 AND 787 ENGINES
2. Pull plug
947 ENGINE
Run engine until it reaches its normal operating
temperature.
-
CAUTION
To avoid starting motor overheating, the
cranking period should not exceed 5-10 sec-
onds and a rest period of 30 seconds should
be observed between cranking cycles.
F07D07A 1
-
CAUTION
Engine must be cooled using the flush kit.
F01F25A
1
2
3
F06F0CA
1
2
Subsection 05 (STORAGE)
02-05-1
STORAGE 0
Engine Draining
Check engine drain hose (lowest hose of engine).
Make sure there is no sand or other particles in it
and that it is not obstructed so that water can
leave the engine. Clean hose and fitting as neces-
sary.
TYPICAL
1. Engine drain hose
Fuel System
Sea-Doo Fuel Stabilizer (P/N 413 408 600) should
be added in fuel tank to prevent fuel deterioration
and carburetor gumming. Follow manufacturers
instructions for proper use.
NOTE: Fuel stabilizer should be added prior en-
gine lubrication to ensure carburetor protection
against varnish deposit.
Always turn the fuel valve to OFF position when
storing the watercraft.
Cooling System Flushing and Engine
Internal Lubrication
Cooling system has to be flushed with fresh wa-
ter to prevent salt, sand or dirt accumulation
which will clog water passages.
Engine must be lubricated to prevent corrosion on
internal parts.
For proper procedure, refer to FLUSHING AND
LUBRICATION 02-03.
Propulsion System
JET PUMP
Lubricant in impeller shaft reservoir should be
drained. Reservoir should be cleaned and refilled
with SEA-DOO synthetic 75W90 GL5 polyolester
oil. Refer to JET PUMP 09-02 for proper proce-
dure.
PTO FLYWHEEL
All Models Except XP Limited
Lubricate PTO flywheel at grease fitting with syn-
thetic grease (P/N 293 550 010).
1. Grease PTO flywheel
-
CAUTION
Water in engine drain hose must be free to
flow out, otherwise water could be trapped
in engine. Should water freeze in engine, se-
vere damage will occur. Check engine drain
hose for obstructions.
N
WARNING
Fuel is flammable and explosive under cer-
tain conditions. Always work in a well venti-
lated area.
F02E05A 1
-
CAUTION
Do not lubricate excessively. Immediately
stop when a slight movement is noticed on
rubber boot.
F01I0BA
1
02-05-2
SEAL CARRIER
GSX Limited, XP Limited and GTX Limited
Lubricate seal carrier of thru hull fitting with syn-
thetic grease (P/N 293 550 010). Stop lubricating
when grease is just coming out of seal.
1. Grease seal carrier
XP Limited
Lubricate seal carrier of drive shaft support with
synthetic grease. Stop lubricating when grease is
just coming out of seal.
Battery
For battery removal, cleaning and storage, refer to
CHARGING SYSTEM 08-03.
Watercraft Cleaning
Clean the bilge with hot water and mild detergent
or with bilge cleaner. Rinse thoroughly. Lift front
end of watercraft to completely drain bilge. If any
repairs are needed to body or to the hull, touch up
paint and Gelcote
repair kit are available. Replace

damaged labels/decals.
Wash the body with soap and water solution (only
use mild detergent). Rinse thoroughly with fresh
water. Remove marine organisms from the hull.
Apply a nonabrasive wax.
If the watercraft is to be stored outside, cover it
with an opaque tarpaulin to prevent sun rays and
grime from affecting the plastic components, wa-
tercraft finish as well as preventing dust accumu-
lation.
Anticorrosion Treatment
Wipe off any residual water in the engine com-
partment.
Spray BOMBARDIER LUBE lubricant over all me-
tallic components in engine compartment.
Lubricate the throttle cable with BOMBARDIER
LUBE lubricant.
The seat should be partially left opened during
storage (the engine cover for the XP model). This
will avoid engine compartment condensation and
possible corrosion.
-
CAUTION
Never leave any clothing, tool or other ob-
jects near PTO flywheel and drive shaft.
F06I03A 1
F08I01A 1
-
CAUTION
Never clean fiberglass and plastic parts with
strong detergent, degreasing agent, paint
thinner, acetone, etc.
-
CAUTION
The watercraft must never be Ieft in water for
storage. Never leave the watercraft stored in
direct sunlight.
02-05-3
Additional Recommended Protection
In cool regions (where freezing point may be en-
countered), cooling system should be filled with
water and antifreeze solution.
SPX and GTS Models
Install a hose pincher to engine drain hose near
the PTO flywheel guard.
TYPICAL
1. Hose pincher installed on engine drain hose
Install coupler hose to fitting spigot.
Install a hose pincher to engine water return hose
(beside fitting spigot).
1. Coupler hose
2. Fitting Spigot
3. Hose pincher
Pour the antifreeze slowly mixed with water in
coupler hose until the colored solution appears in
the engine drain hose.
Remove hose pincher(s).
Install a hose pincher to engine drain hose.
TYPICAL
1. Hose pincher installed on engine drain hose
-
CAUTION
Always use ethylene-glycol antifreeze con-
taining corrosion inhibitors specifically rec-
ommended for aluminum engines.
F02E06A 1
F01E1EA
1
2
3
F06E0DA 1
02-05-4
Disconnect engine water return hose.
717 AND 787 ENGINES
1. Disconnect engine water return hose
947 ENGINE
1. Disconnect engine water return hose
Install a hose pincher to engine water supply hose
(except the 947 engine).
717 AND 787 ENGINES
1. Hose pincher installed on the engine water supply hose
Temporarily install a short piece of hose to engine
water outlet at cylinder head.
Insert a funnel into hose and pour antifreeze mixed
with water in engine until the colored solution ap-
pears in the engine drain hose.
Remove temporary hose and reconnect engine
water return hose.
Remove hose pinchers.
All Models
Most of the antifreeze will drain out when remov-
ing hose pincher(s). Use a container to recover it.
Dispose of antifreeze as per your local laws and
regulations.
NOTE: Although antifreeze will mainly drain out,
the antifreeze has mixed with the water that was
possibly trapped in the cylinder water jackets and
thus preventing freezing problems.
At pre-season preparation, drain the remaining an-
tifreeze from cooling system prior using the wa-
tercraft.
F06E0EA 1
F06E05A
1
F06E0FA 1
Section 03 TROUBLESHOOTING
Subsection 01 (TROUBLESHOOTING CHART)
03-01-1
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 0
The following is provided to help in diagnosing the probable source of troubles. It is a guideline and should
not be assumed to have all causes for all problems.
ENGINE WILL NOT START
OTHER OBSERVATION POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
Engine does not turn over DESS operation non functional If 2 short beeps are not heard when
installing safety lanyard, refer to DIGITALLY
ENCODED SECURITY SYSTEM 08-06
Safety lanyard switch or harness
damaged
Replace
Burnt 5 A fuse Check wiring then replace fuse
5 A fuse keeps on burning Check wiring, solenoid and MPEM
Discharged battery Check/recharge
Battery connections Check/clean/tighten
Water/fuel hydrolock Check, refer to subsection 02-04
Starter Check, refer to subsection 08-04
Seized engine Check/repair as needed
Seized jet pump Check, refer to subsection 09-02
Engine turns slowly Discharged/weak battery Check/charge/replace
Restriction in jet pump Check/clean pump
Seizure in jet pump Inspect, refer to subsection 09-02
Partial engine hydrolock Check, refer to subsection 02-04
Partial engine seizure Check compression, refer to subsection
04-05
Worn starter Check, refer to subsection 08-04
Engine turns over Fuel water-contaminated Check/siphon and refill
Dirty fuel filter Clean/replace
Fouled spark plugs Replace
Water in engine Check, refer to subsection 02-04
Carburetion Check, refer to subsection 06-04
Ignition Check, refer to subsection 08-02
Flooded engine Check, refer to subsection 06-04
Carburetor needle valve stuck open
Excessive rotary valve clearance
(if applicable)
Check, refer to subsection 04-07
Internal engine damage Check, refer to subsections 04-05 and
04-06
Sheared flywheel key Check timing mark, refer to subsection
08-02
Incorrect rotary valve timing (if applicable) Check, refer to subsection 04-07
No spark at spark plugs Faulty rev limiter Replace MPEM
Faulty ignition module Replace MPEM or ignition module
depending upon the model
03-01-2
ENGINE MISFIRES, RUNS IRREGULARLY
ENGINE OVERHEATS
Weak spark Fouled, defective, worn spark plugs Check/verify heat range/gap/replace
Faulty rev limiter or ignition module Check, refer to subsection 08-02
Sheared flywheel key Check timing mark, refer to subsection
08-02
Lean fuel mixture
Dry spark plug (except when
water fouled)
Low fuel level Check/refill
Stale or water fouled fuel Check/siphon and refill
Fuel filter dirty or restricted Check/clean/replace
Carburetion dirty or out of adjustment Check/clean/adjust, refer to subsection
06-04
Leaking crankshaft seal(s), intake or rotary
valve cover O-ring
Pressure check engine, refer to subsection
04-02
Restricted fuel valve Check/replace
Loose carburetor Tighten carburetor(s)
Rich fuel mixture
Fouled spark plug
Partially closed choke Check/adjust choke cable
Flame arrester dirty or restricted Check/replace
Carburetor adjustment Check/adjust, refer to subsection 06-04
Loose main jet Check, refer to subsection 06-04
Rotary valve shaft seal leaking
(if applicable)
Check/replace, refer to subsection 04-07
Oil pump adjustment Check/adjust, refer to subsection07-03
Worn needle(s) and seal(s) Check, refer to subsection 06-04
(if applicable)
Check, refer to subsection04-07
Difficult to start Incorrect rotary valve timing (if applicable) Check/adjust, refer to subsection 04-07
(if applicable)
Check, refer to subsection 04-07
Monitoring beeper sounds
continuously
Restricted jet pump water intake Check/clean
Cooling system restriction Check/flush, refer to subsection 02-03
Grounded temperature sensor or sensor
wire
Check/repair/replace
03-01-3
ENGINE CONTINUALLY BACKFIRES
ENGINE DETONATION OR PINGING
ENGINE LACKS ACCELERATION OR POWER
Weak spark Fouled, defective spark plugs Clean/replace
Malfunction of rev limiter Clean/replace, refer to subsection 08-02
Ignition timing Incorrect setting Check/reset, refer to subsection 08-02
Sheared flywheel key Check/replace, refer to subsections 08-02
and 04-04
Rotary valve (if applicable) Incorrect timing Check/reset, refer to subsection 04-07
Carburetor Carburetion to lean Check/adjust, refer to subsection 06-04
Engine Intake leak/crankshaft seal failure Pressure check engine, refer to subsection
04-02
Ignition Timing too far advanced Check/reset
Spark plug heat range too high Check/change to correct range
Defective ignition module or MPEM Check/replace, refer to subsection 08-02
Engine temperature Engine overheats Check, see engine overheats
Fuel of poor quality Use good quality fuel
Weak spark Check/replace, refer to subsection 08-02
Carburetion, jetting too rich/lean Check/adjust, refer to subsection 06-04
Throttle does not open fully Check/readjust, refer to subsection 06-04
Low compression Check/repair, refer to subsection 04-05
Exhaust system restriction Check/clean
Water in fuel or oil Check/siphon/replace
Debris in carburetor needle valve Check/clean, refer to subsection 06-04
Impeller leading edge damaged Check/replace, refer to subsection 09-02
Twisted crankshaft Check, refer to subsection 04-06
Engine revs lower than its
maximum operational RPM
(787 and 947 engines)
RAVE valve does not open Check, refer to subsection 04-05
Peak performance is delayed
until higher RPM range is
reached (787 and 947
engines)
RAVE valve is stuck opened Check, refer to subsection 04-05
03-01-4
ENGINE RUNS TOO FAST
ABNORMAL NOISE FROM PROPULSION SYSTEM
Engine RPM too high Faulty rev limiter Check, refer to subsection 08-02
Improper impeller pitch (too low) Check/replace, refer to subsection 09-02
Jet pump cavitation Damaged leading or trailing edge of
impeller
Check/replace
NOTE: Leading edge damage contributes to
poor performance from start. Trailing edge
damage contributes to poor top performance
and stator vanes erosion.
Sealing of ride plate, jet pump support or
jet pump
Check/reseal, refer to subsection 09-02 or
12-02
Weeds/debris caught in intake grate or
impeller
Check/clean
Low oil level in jet pump Check/troubleshoot source of leak/refill
supply, refer to subsection 09-02
Worn anti-knock system Check/replace pusher in cover, refer to
subsection 09-02
Damaged or bent drive shaft Check/replace, refer to subsection 09-03
Broken motor mounts Check/replace, refer to subsection 04-03
04-01-1
Section 04 ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
LEAK TEST............................................................................................................................. 04-02-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 04-02-1
PREPARATION................................................................................................................... 04-02-1
TESTING PROCEDURE ..................................................................................................... 04-02-1
ENGINE LEAKAGE DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART ............................................................ 04-02-6
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION.......................................................................................... 04-03-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 04-03-1
ENGINE REMOVAL............................................................................................................ 04-03-1
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 04-03-4
INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................. 04-03-4
MAGNETO SYSTEM............................................................................................................. 04-04-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 04-04-4
DISASSEMBLY .................................................................................................................. 04-04-4
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 04-04-10
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 04-04-10
TOP END................................................................................................................................ 04-05-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 04-05-4
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 04-05-8
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 04-05-16
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 04-05-16
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 04-05-20
ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................................... 04-05-28
BOTTOM END........................................................................................................................ 04-06-1
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 04-06-4
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 04-06-11
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 04-06-11
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 04-06-15
ROTARY VALVE ..................................................................................................................... 04-07-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 04-07-2
INSPECTION ON WATERCRAFT....................................................................................... 04-07-2
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 04-07-4
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 04-07-5
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 04-07-6
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 04-07-6
ROTARY VALVE TIMING.................................................................................................... 04-07-9
GTX RFI
Section 04 ENGINE
04-01-2
EXHAUST SYSTEM............................................................................................................... 04-08-1
REMOVAL ........................................................................................................................... 04-08-4
TUNED PIPE REPAIR.......................................................................................................... 04-08-8
INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 04-08-8
GTX RFI
Section 04 ENGINE
Subsection 02 (LEAK TEST)
04-02-1
LEAK TEST 0
GENERAL
NOTE: The leak test kit was not upgraded for the
947 engine at time of printing. A Service Bulletin
will be issued.
A Sea-Doo Engine Leak Test Kit (P/N 295 500 352)
is available to help diagnose engine problems
such as engine seizure, poor performance, oil leak-
age, etc.
Before disassembling any components of the en-
gine, it is important to perform a leakage test to
determine which part is defective.
It is also very important after servicing the engine,
even for a complete engine rebuilt, to perform an-
other leakage test; at this stage, it may avoid fur-
ther engine problems and minimizing the risk of
having to remove and reinstall the engine again.
Static bench testing is the most effective way to
conduct a leakage test. Inboard testing does not
allow complete access to, and observation of all
engine surfaces and should be avoided whenever
possible.
On the 717 engine, cylinders can not be verified
individually due to leakage from one cylinder to
another through a common intake manifold.
When installing hoses of the Engine Leak Test Kit,
use the collars provided in the kit to ensure a prop-
er sealing.
When pressurizing the engine, first confirm that
the components of the Engine Leak Test Kit are
not leaking by spraying a solution of soapy water
on all hoses, connections, fittings, plates, etc. If
there is a leak, bubbles will indicate leak location.
Three areas of the engine will be tested in se-
quence as per the diagnostic flow chart (see the
end of this sub-section).
1. Engine Cooling System
2. Bottom End and Top End
3. Rotary Valve Shaft
NOTE: If a leak is found, it is important to contin-
ue testing as there is the possibility of having
more than one leak. Continue pumping to com-
pensate for the air lost to find another leak.
PREPARATION
Verify fuel system for leaks.
Disconnect battery BLACK negative cable.
Disconnect battery RED positive cable.
TESTING PROCEDURE
Engine Cooling System
Remove the tuned pipe.
Remove the exhaust manifold gasket and ensure
the surface is cleaned.
Disconnect engine cooling hoses.
Install the appropriate exhaust manifold plate
(no. 1 for the 787 engine and no. 2 for 717 en-
gine) from the Engine Leak Test Kit. Tighten plate
using fasteners provided in the kit.
Use hoses provided in the kit and install them on
the engine.
Install pump using reducer and appropriate tube(s)
as necessary.
;
WARNING
If any fuel leak is found, do not start the en-
gine. Correct the leak and wipe off any fuel
spillage. Do not use electric powered tools
unless fuel system has passed pressure test.
;
WARNING
Always disconnect battery cables in the speci-
fied order, BLACK negative cable first.
Section 04 ENGINE
04-02-2
717 ENGINE REAR VIEW
1. Engine drain hose blocked with a hose pincher
717 ENGINE FRONT VIEW
1. Loop hose and use clamps
2. Use 2 washers with exhaust manifold stud
3. Hose with adapter and nipple
787 ENGINE
1. Loop hose and use clamps
2. Hose with clamps. Plug end with a screw
3. Block engine drain hose with a hose pincher
4. Use 2 washers with exhaust manifold stud
NOTE: Water is not required for testing.
Activate pump and pressurize engine cooling sys-
tem to 34 kPa (5 PSI).
Wait 3 minutes and check if pressure drops; if so,
verify all testing components.
If kit components are not leaking and pressure
drops, verify all external jointed surfaces, tem-
perature sensor and the O-ring between the
spark plug area and the engine cylinder head
cover. If none of these components are leaking,
there is an internal leak and it can be detected
with Bottom End and Top End testing.
F01B2UB 1
F01B2VA
2
3
1
F01B2WA
1
3
2
4
Section 04 ENGINE
04-02-3
Bottom End and Top End
Remove the carburetor(s) and gasket(s). Make
sure the surface of the intake manifold (717 en-
gine) or rotary valve cover (787 engine) are clean.
Install the intake plate(s) no. 3 with fasteners
from the kit and tighten adequately.
On engines with the RAVE system, remove the
RAVE valves and gaskets.
Install plates no. 4 with fasteners from the kit and
tighten adequately.
NOTE: On engines with the RAVE system, the
boot and O-ring can be checked for leakage with
the valve in place. Simply remove the cover to ex-
pose the boot.
Make sure the spark plugs are installed and tight-
en.
Block pulse hose using a hose pincher.
NOTE: Do not block the rotary valve shaft hoses.
Install pump to the exhaust plate fitting.
717 ENGINE
1. Intake plates
2. Pulse hose blocked with a hose pincher
3. Exhaust plate
787 ENGINE
1. Intake plates
2. RAVE valve plates
3. Pulse hose blocked with a hose pincher
4. Exhaust plate
Activate pump and pressurize engine to 34 kPa (5 PSI).
Wait 3 minutes and check if pressure drops; if so,
verify all testing components.
If kit components are not leaking, verify engine
jointed surfaces as per following areas:
spark plugs
cylinder head gasket
cylinder base gasket
crankcase halves
rotary valve cover
engine plugs
exhaust manifold
intake manifold (717 engine)
oil injection pump (717 engine)
F01B2ZA
2
3
1
-
CAUTION
Do not exceed this pressure.
F01B30A
2
4
1
3
Section 04 ENGINE
04-02-4
Check also small oil injection pump lines and fit-
tings; check for air bubbles or oil column going to-
ward pump, which indicate a defective check
valve.
If the above mentioned components are not leak-
ing, block both oil hoses of the rotary valve shaft
using hose pinchers.
NOTE: If leakage stops at this point, proceed with
Rotary Valve Shaft testing.
If there is still some leakage, remove the PTO fly-
wheel to verify outer seal.
If no leak is found on the PTO side outer seal, re-
move magneto flywheel and verify crankshaft
outer seals.
Proceed with the Rotary Valve Shaft testing if
the crankshaft outer seals are not leaking.
Rotary Valve Shaft
NOTE: It is preferable to drain the injection oil
from the rotary valve shaft, but it is not mandato-
ry.
Block oil return hose of the rotary valve shaft with
a hose pincher.
717 ENGINE
1. Oil return hose blocked with hose pincher
787 ENGINE
1. Oil return hose blocked with hose pincher
Install pump with reducer and nipple to the oil
supply hose of the rotary valve shaft.
717 ENGINE
1. Pump with reducer and nipple
F01B31A
1
F01B33A 1
F01B32A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-02-5
787 ENGINE
1. Pump with reducer and nipple
Activate pump and pressurize to 5 PSI (34 kPa).
Check plug of the rotary valve shaft in crankcase.
Remove PTO side spark plug. If pressure drops, it
indicates a defective PTO side crankshaft inner
seal.
Remove MAG side spark plug. If pressure drops,
it indicates a defective MAG side crankshaft inner
seal.
If the above mentioned components are not leak-
ing and there is a pressure drops, remove the ro-
tary valve cover. Check the seal of the rotary valve
shaft.
If the rotary valve shaft is not leaking, it could indi-
cates a defective engine casting. Disassemble en-
gine and carefully check for defects in castings.
Pay attention to tapped holes which may go
through sealed areas of engine and thus lead to
leakage.
F01B34A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-02-6
ENGINE LEAKAGE DIAGNOSTIC FLOW CHART
F00D07S
PRESSURIZE ENGINE
IS ENGINE LEAKING?
CHECK ALL JOINTED SURFACES,
SCREW/STUD THREADS. MOUNTING
FLANGES ETC.
ANY LEAK FOUND?
CHECK SMALL OIL LINES OF
INJECTION PUMP
AIR BUBBLES FOUND
OR OIL MOVING
TOWARD PUMP?
BLOCK LARGE HOSES OF
ROTARY VALVE GEAR
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
IS ENGINE STILL LEAKING?
ARE SEALS LEAKING?
CHECK CRANKSHAFT OUTER
SEAL OF PTO AND
MAG SIDES
UNSEAL PTO CYLINDER AND MAG CYLINDER
SEPARATELY BY REMOVING THE
APPROPRIATE SPARK PLUG
IS RESERVOIR LEAKING?
CHECK FOR LEAKAGE AT ROTARY
VALVE SHAFT CRANKCASE PLUG
ANY LEAK FOUND?
REMOVE ROTARY VALVE COVER, CHECK
SEAL OF ROTARY VALVE SHAFT
IS SEAL LEAKING?
CAREFULLY INSPECT ENGINE CASTINGS,
PARTICULARLY THE THREADED HOLE AREAS
YES
YES
NO
PRESSURIZE ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM
IS SYSTEMLEAKING?
CHECK TESTING KIT
REPLACE O-RING OF CYLINDER HEAD
AND/OR CYLINDER BASE GASKET
YES
YES
NO
CHECK TESTING KIT
PRESSURIZE ROTARY VALVE GEAR
RESERVOIR IN CRANKCASE
REPLACE GASKET OR O-RING,
RE-SEAL LEAKING AREA
REPLACE CHECK VALVE(S) / LINE(S)
PRESSURIZE ROTARY VALVE GEAR
RESERVOIR IN CRANKCASE
REPLACE DEFECTIVE SEAL(S)
REPLACE DEFECTIVE SEAL(S)
REPLACE OIL SEAL OF ROTARY
VALVE SHAFT END, OR
REPLACE CAP
REPLACE DEFECTIVE SEAL
REPLACE DEFECTIVE PARTS
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
ANY LEAK FOUND?
ENGINE IS PERFECTLY SEALED
INTERNALLY
RECHECK ENGINE SEALING
CHECK TESTING KIT
RECHECK ENGINE SEALING
CHECK TESTING KIT
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
Section 04 ENGINE
Subsection 03 (REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION)
04-03-1
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 0
GENERAL
It is not necessary to remove engine from water-
craft to service TOP END, PTO FLYWHEEL or
MAGNETO. However, engine removal is neces-
sary to repair BOTTOM END.
ENGINE REMOVAL
In order to remove engine from watercraft pro-
ceed as follows.
Jet Pump Removal
To withdraw jet pump, refer to JET PUMP 09-02.
Drive System
To withdraw driveshaft(s), refer to DRIVE SYS-
TEM 09-03.
All Models
Electrical Connections
First, remove BLACK negative cable from battery,
then RED positive cable.
GTS Model
Remove battery holding straps and disconnect
vent tube from battery.
Remove battery.
All Models
Disconnect temperature switch wire and spark
plug cables.
Disconnect magneto wiring harness.
717 ENGINE
1. Unplug connector
787 ENGINE
1. Unplug connector
-
CAUTION
Whenever removing engine from water-
craft, engine/jet pump alignment must be
performed at reinstallation.
N
WARNING
Always disconnect starter or battery cables
exactly in the specified order, BLACK nega-
tive cable first. It is recommended to discon-
nect electrical connections prior to discon-
necting fuel lines.
F01D8RA
1
F06D0FA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-03-2
947 ENGINE
1. Unplug connector
Cooling System
Disconnect the engine water supply hose.
Disconnect the engine water return hose.
Tuned Pipe
To remove tuned pipe, refer to EXHAUST SYS-
TEM 04-08.
Air Intake Silencer
To remove air intake silencer, refer to AIR INTAKE
06-03.
Carburetor
All Models Except the XP Limited
To remove carburetor(s), refer to CARBURETOR
06-04.
XP Limited
Disconnect choke and throttle cables from carbu-
retor linkage.
Disconnect fuel supply and fuel return hoses.
Engine Support
NOTE: Be careful when removing engine sup-
port(s) or rubber mount adapters, shims could
have been installed underneath. Shims control en-
gine/jet pump alignment. Always note position of
shims for reinstallation, to avoid altering engine
alignment.
Remove engine support mount screws.
717 ENGINE
1. Remove screw of each engine support
787 AND 947 ENGINES FRONT SUPPORT
1. Remove screw
787 AND 947 ENGINES REAR SUPPORT
1. Remove screws
F07D08A
1 F02D08A
1
F06D35A
1
F06D36A 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-03-3
Lifting Engine
717 Engine
Engine can be easily lifted using the following
suggested tools:
Cut porcelain from 2 old spark plugs.
Weld a lock washer approximately 20 mm di-
ameter on each spark plug as shown.
1. Weld a lock washer
2. Old spark plug
Remove spark plugs and replace by special tools.
Hook a sling into holes of special tools.
Using a chain block, a hoist or other suitable
equipment, slightly lift engine to ease the remain-
ing component removal.
787 and 947 Engines
Engine can be easily lifted by inserting a hook into
exhaust manifold eyelet.
TYPICAL
Using a chain block, a hoist or other suitable equip-
ment, slightly lift engine to ease the remaining com-
ponent removal.
Remove rear engine support.
1. Rear support
-
CAUTION
Take care not to damage cable or oil injec-
tion hoses.
F01D0AA
1
2
-
CAUTION
Take care not to damage cable or oil injec-
tion hoses.
F01D7OA
F06D36B
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-03-4
All Engines
Install a hose pincher to oil supply hoses of oil in-
jection pump and rotary valve shaft (except the
947 engine); then, disconnect hoses.
TYPICAL
1. Hose pincher (P/N 295 000 076)
Install a hose pincher to oil return hose of rotary
valve shaft (except the 947 engine); then, discon-
nect hose.
Disconnect RED positive cable from starter post.
TYPICAL
1. Disconnect RED positive cable
Carry on engine lifting then tilt engine so that it
can be removed from the body opening.
TYPICAL
CLEANING
Wipe off any spillage in bilge. Clean with a bilge
cleaner.
Clean external parts of engine.
INSTALLATION
Installation of engine in watercraft is essentially
the reverse of removal procedures. However pay
particular attention to the following.
Rubber Mount, Shim and Screw
Check tightness and condition of rubber mounts.
If they have been removed, apply Loctite 242
(blue) on screw threads. Torque screws to
25 Nm (18 lbfft).
-
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch body or to hit any
component.
A01B2JB
1
F01H1JB
1
-
CAUTION
Strict adherence to this torque is important
to avoid damaging threads of aluminum in-
sert in bilge.
F01D7RA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-03-5
Engine Support
717 Engine
Torque front and rear engine supports as shown in
the following illustration.
1. Torque screws to 22 Nm (16 lbfft)
2. Torque nuts to 39 Nm (29 lbfft)
787 and 947 Engines
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) to rear engine support
screws and torque to 24 Nm (17 lbfft).
1. Torque engine support screws to 24 Nm (17 lbfft)
Oil Injection Hoses
717 and 787 Engines
Make sure to reinstall hoses before completely
lowering engine in bilge.
Positive Starter Cable
Torque nut of positive starter cable to 6 Nm
(53 lbfin). Apply dielectric grease on nut.
Engine/Jet Pump Alignment
Alignment is necessary to eliminate possible vi-
bration and/or damage to components. Check
alignment of engine using the following alignment
tools.
Support plate kit (P/N 529 035 506).
NOTE: Use plate (P/N 529 035 508) for the 139.5 mm
(5-1/2 in) jet pump and plate (P/N 529 035 507) for
the 155.6 mm (6-1/8 in) jet pump.
1. Plate (P/N 529 035 507 or 529 035 508)
2. Support (P/N 529 035 511)
Alignment shaft (P/N 295 000 141).
1. Alignment shaft
F02D09A
1
2
1 Loctite
242
Loctite
242
Loctite
242
F06D36C
1
F00B0FA
1 2
F00B0GA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-03-6
XP Limited
On this model, the PTO flywheel adapter (P/N 295
000 157) must be used in conjunction with the
alignment shaft.
1. Adapter (P/N 295 000 157)
NOTE: Ensure the mid bearing is removed to
check engine alignment.
All Models
To verify alignment proceed as follows:
Install the appropriate plate with the support to
hull with 4 nuts.
Carefully slide shaft through support.
Insert shaft end into PTO flywheel.
NOTE: Ensure the protective hose and carbon
ring (or seal carrier) is removed to check engine
alignment. If the alignment is correct, the shaft
will slide easily without any deflection in PTO fly-
wheel.
TYPICAL
1. Alignment shaft
2. PTO flywheel
If the alignment is incorrect loosen engine sup-
port screws to enable to align PTO flywheel with
shaft end.
NOTE: Use shim(s) (P/N 270 000 024) or (P/N 270
000 025) as necessary between engine supports
and rubber mounts to correct alignment.
TYPICAL
1. Shim
F00B05A
1
F00B0HA
-
CAUTION
Whenever shims are used to correct align-
ment, never install more than 1.3 mm (0.051 in)
shim thickness.
F07D05A 2 1
F00D0CA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-03-7
Engine Support Screws
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on screw threads.
Torque engine support screws to 25 Nm (18 lbfft)
when procedure is completed.
717 ENGINE
1. Torque to 25 Nm (18 lbfft)
FRONT ENGINE SUPPORT 787 AND 947 ENGINES
REAR ENGINE SUPPORT 787 AND 947 ENGINES
Final Inspection
Check throttle cable condition and lubricate cable
with BOMBARDIER LUBE lubricant.
After its installation, properly adjust and bleed oil
injection pump as specified in OIL INJECTION
PUMP 07-03.
Check hose condition and pressure test fuel sys-
tem, refer to FUEL CIRCUIT 06-02.
Verify all electrical connections.
Run engine and ensure there is no leakage.
F02D0KA
1
Loctite
242
1
Loctite
242
Loctite
242
1
F06D35A
1
;
WARNING
Whenever doing any type of repair on water-
craft or if any components of the fuel system
are disconnected, a pressure test must be
done before starting engine.
-
CAUTION
If watercraft is out of water, engine must be
cooled using the flush kit.
F06D36A 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-1
MAGNETO SYSTEM 0
717 Engine
F02D0JS
8
7
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
9
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite
242
10
11 12
Loctite
242
13
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
Loctite
242
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
14
Loctite 242
15
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
4
16
Loctite
242
Loctite
648
5
6
145 Nm
(107 lbfft)
Anti-seize
lubricant 2
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
1
3
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
17
GTS model
only
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-2
787 Engine
F01D7TS
Loctite 242
Loctite 242
Loctite 648
Loctite 648
10
7
9
6
5
8
1
2
4
11
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
Synthetic
grease
Lithium
grease
105 Nm
(77 lbfft)
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Anti-seize
lubricant
13
15
14
12
3
16
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-3
947 Engine
F06D0IS
Loctite 242
Loctite 242
Loctite 242
Loctite 648
Loctite
648
Anti-seize
lubricant
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
13 Nm
(115 lbfin)
115 Nm
(85 lbfft)
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
6
4
5
1
7
12
13
11
8
10
3
2
9
13 Nm
(115 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-4
GENERAL
The following procedures can be performed with-
out removing engine from watercraft.
DISASSEMBLY
717 Engine
1, Magneto Housing Cover
Remove screws no. 2 and wire support no. 17,
then withdraw cover.
4,5, Magneto Flywheel and Ring Gear
Magneto flywheel is locked with puller plate (P/N
290 876 080), sleeves (P/N 290 847 220) and ex-
tension handle (P/N 295 000 111).
1. Screw
2. Extension handle
3. Puller plate
4. Sleeve
Using 3 M8 x 35 screws (P/N 290 841 591), install
screws through puller plate and slide sleeves on
screws then secure puller plate on magneto fly-
wheel so that sleeves are against flywheel.
Install extension handle on end of puller plate.
TYPICAL
1. Sleeves on opposite side
Using a suitable socket, unscrew retaining nut
no. 6 COUNTERCLOCKWISE when facing it.
NOTE: If socket is found too large to be inserted
in puller plate, machine or grind its outside diame-
ter as necessary.
TYPICAL
1. Extension handle locking crankshaft
Remove nut and lock washer from magneto fly-
wheel.
F01D47A
1
2
3
4
F01D48A
1
F01D4BA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-5
Magneto flywheel is easily freed from crankshaft
with puller (P/N 295 000 106).
Fully thread on puller in puller plate.
Tighten puller bolt and at the same time, tap on
bolt head using a hammer to release magneto fly-
wheel from its taper.
1. Puller plate
2. Puller
3. Extension handle
10, Armature Plate
Remove 3 retaining screws no. 15 and withdraw
armature plate.
7, Magneto Housing
To remove magneto housing, starter has to be re-
moved. Refer to STARTING SYSTEM 08-04.
Unscrew retaining screws no. 9, then withdraw
housing.
Lay magneto flywheel on a steel plate. Tap lightly
on ring gear using a hammer to release it from
magneto flywheel.
1. Magneto flywheel
11, Generating Coil
To replace generating coil:
Heat the armature plate to 93C (200F) around
the screw holes to break the threadlocker
bond.
1. Heat the armature plate
Remove screws.
Uncrimp and unsolder BLACK/RED wire from
coil.
A00C1AA
1
2
3
F01D4CA
-
CAUTION
Protect harness from flame.
1
F01D3AA
F00D08A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-6
1. Uncrimp and unsolder wire here
13, Battery Charging Coil
To replace battery charging coil:
Heat the armature plate to 93C (200F) around
the screw holes to break the threadlocker
bond.
1. Heat the armature plate
Remove screws.
Uncrimp and unsolder YELLOW and YELLOW/
BLACK wires from coil.
Uncrimp and unsolder ground wire (BLACK)
from coil core.
1. Uncrimp and unsolder ground wire (BLACK)
2. Uncrimp and unsolder YELLOW and YELLOW/BLACK wires
Engine Crankcase Replacement
717 Engine Only
Since replacement crankcases do not have timing
mark for armature plate location, indexing marks
should be made on armature plate and crankcase
to ease reassembly and further ignition timing.
The following procedure is to find a common ref-
erence point on both crankcases (old and new) to
position armature plate.
Proceed as follows:
Find a crankcase locating lug (the top one in this
example).
Place a cold chisel at the end of chosen lug,
then punch a mark on armature plate at this
point.
-
CAUTION
Protect harness from flame.
A25E0QA
1
F00D09A
1
A25E0SA
1
2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-7
1. Crankcase locating lug
2. Mark armature plate at the end of lug
At assembly, align armature plate mark (previ-
ously punched) with the end of the same locat-
ing lug on the new crankcase.
TYPICAL
1. Lug end of crankcase
2. Align mark and lug end here
Find manufacturers mark on armature plate. In
line with this mark, punch another mark on ad-
jacent crankcase lug.
TYPICAL
1. Manufacturers mark on armature plate
2. Punch a mark on crankcase lug aligned with plate mark
The new mark on crankcase will be used for fur-
ther assembly positioning as a pre-timing posi-
tion.
TYPICAL
1. For further assembly, use these marks
2
1
F01D4DA
1
F01D4EA
2
F01D4FA
2
1
F01D4GA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-8
787 Engine
Loosen screws no. 2. Remove engine magneto
cover.
Remove oil pump shaft from flywheel nut.
4,5, Rotor and Flywheel
Remove starter. Refer to STARTING SYSTEM 08-04.
NOTE: Crankshaft can also be locked by using the
PTO flywheel. For procedure, refer to BOTTOM
END 04-06.
Lock ring gear using special tool.
1. Ring gear blocking tool (P/N 295 000 134)
2. Retaining plate (P/N 295 000 154)
1. Ring gear blocking tool with retaining plate
If desired, magneto rotor can be removed without
the engine flywheel. Remove the 6 screws
no. 11.
1. Screw
Using a suitable socket, unscrew retaining nut of
engine flywheel COUNTERCLOCKWISE when
facing it.
Remove special tool locking ring gear.
Engine flywheel is easily freed from crankshaft
with puller (P/N 420 976 235) and crankshaft pro-
tective cap (P/N 290 876 557).
Insert crankshaft protector to outer end of crank-
shaft and fully thread puller in engine flywheel.
1. Puller
Tighten puller screw and at the same time, tap on
screw head using a hammer to release engine fly-
F01B26A
1 2
F01D85A
1
F01D7XA 1
F01D7YA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-9
947 Engine
1, Cover
Loosen screws no. 2. Remove engine magneto
cover.
1. Cover
2. Screw
Remove oil pump shaft from flywheel nut.
1. Remove oil pump shaft
To remove the rotor or the flywheel, the crank-
shaft must be locked. For procedure, refer to
BOTTOM END 04-06.
If necessary, the magneto rotor can be removed
without the engine flywheel. Remove the 6 screws
no. 7.
1. Screw
To remove the flywheel/rotor assembly, unscrew
nut no. 6 counterclockwise when facing it.
1. Nut
The flywheel is easily freed from crankshaft with
puller (P/N 420 976 235).
Install protective cap (P/N 290 877 414) to crank-
shaft.
Fully thread puller in engine flywheel.
F06D1RA 1 2
F06D23A 1
F06D0LA 1
F06D0MA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-10
1. Puller
Tighten puller screw and at the same time, tap on
screw head using a hammer to release engine fly-
8,9, Stator and Trigger Coil
Loosen screws no. 10 and no. 11 to remove the
stator and trigger coil from the engine magneto
cover.
1. Screws
CLEANING
Clean all metal components in a solvent.
Clean crankshaft taper and threads.
ASSEMBLY
717 Engine
11, Generating Coil
Strip end of old wire then crimp and solder on
new coil.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) to screws no. 12 and in-
stall the new coil on armature plate.
Use magneto coil centering tool (P/N 290 876
922) and install so that it fits around armature
plate before tightening screws.
1. Magneto coil centering tool (P/N 290 876 922)
F06D0PA 1
F06D0NA 1
-
CAUTION
Clean coils and magnets using only a clean
cloth.
-
CAUTION
Before reinstalling the magneto, remove the
loose epoxy from harness.
F00D0AA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-11
13, Battery Charging Coil
Position new coil, crimp and solder all wires.
Prior to assembly, apply Loctite 242 (blue).
Use magneto coil centering tool (P/N 290 876
922) and install it so that it fits around armature
plate before tightening screws no. 14.
1. Magneto coil centering tool (P/N 290 876 922)
Apply Loctite 648 (green) to magneto flywheel
mating surface. Lay ring gear on a steel plate,
then heat with a propane torch in order to install it
on magneto flywheel.
Pay particular attention to position ring gear teeth
chamfer side as per following illustration.
1. Teeth chamfer
NOTE: Ensure that ring gear contacts magneto
flywheel flange.
Whenever replacing either ring gear or magneto
flywheel, Gun Kote must be applied to prevent
possible corrosion.
To apply Gun Kote proceed as follows:
1. Clean thoroughly and degrease replacement
part using a non oil base solvent.
2. Apply coating in light thin coats using a spray
gun.
NOTE: Do not spray Gun Kote into magneto fly-
wheel threaded holes.
3. Bake parts in oven at 175 (350F) for 1 hour to
cure Gun Kote.
7, Magneto Housing
Install gasket no. 8 between magneto housing
and engine crankcase.
Install magneto housing and torque screws no. 9
to 9 Nm (80 lbfin).
10, Armature Plate
Position the armature plate on the crankcase,
aligning the marks on both parts.
Apply a drop of Loctite 242 (blue) on threads of
screws no. 15 and torque to 6 Nm (53 lbfin).
4, Magneto Flywheel
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on crankshaft taper.
Position Woodruff key no. 16 and magneto fly-
wheel. Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on nut no. 6. In-
stall nut with lock washer and torque to 145 Nm
(107 lbfft).
F00D0AA
1
F01D3BA 1
-
CAUTION
Always assemble magneto flywheel and
ring gear prior to apply Gun Kote. If not done
correctly, ring gear wont contact magneto
flywheel flange.
-
CAUTION
Do not eliminate Gun Kote heat curing time
because it will lose all its resistance and it
will not give any protection.
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-12
Ignition Timing
For ignition timing procedures of the 717 engine,
refer to IGNITION SYSTEM 08-02.
Properly install O-ring no. 3 in magneto housing.
Apply Loctite 767 anti-seize on screws no. 2, install
cover and wire support no. 17. Torque screws no. 2
in a criss-cross sequence to 9 Nm (80 lbfin).
787 Engine
12, Stator
Install the stator in magneto housing cover no. 1
and torque screws no. 13 to 10 Nm (88 lbfin).
Replace wiring harness bracket no. 16 of stator
and torque screws to 4.5 Nm (40 lbfin).
1. Stator screws
2. Bracket
14, Trigger Coil
Install the trigger coil in magneto housing cover
no. 1 and torque screws no. 15 to 10 Nm (88 lbfin).
NOTE: The trigger coil is not adjustable.
1. Trigger coil
7, Magneto Housing
To install oil seal no. 10 of magneto housing, use
pusher (P/N 290 877 740) and handle (P/N 290
877 650).
1. Pusher
2. Handle
-
CAUTION
Never use any type of impact wrench at mag-
neto installation.
F06D0CA
2 1
F06D0DA
1
F01B2NA
1
2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-13
Install gasket no. 8 between magneto housing
and engine crankcase.
Install magneto housing and torque screws no. 9
to 9 Nm (80 lbfin).
When reinstalling magneto rotor to engine fly-
wheel, apply Loctite 648 to mating surfaces.
One of the protusion end of magneto rotor must
align with hole of engine flywheel.
1. Protusion
2. Hole
Apply Loctite 648 (green) on screws no. 11 and
torque to 10 Nm (88 lbfin).
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on nut no. 6. Install nut
with lock washer and torque to 105 Nm (77 lbfft).
1, Cover
Before installation, properly install O-ring no. 3 in
engine magneto cover.
Apply Loctite 767 anti-seize compound on screws
no. 2. Torque screws in a criss-cross sequence to
9 Nm (80 lbfin).
947 Engine
8,9, Stator and Trigger Coil
Install the stator and trigger coil in engine magne-
to cover. Torque screws to 9 Nm (80 lbfin).
Reinstall wiring harness bracket no. 12 using tap-
tite screws no. 13.
Torque trigger coil screws no. 11 to 9 Nm (80 lbfin).
Torque stator screws no. 10 to 13 Nm (115 lbfin).
NOTE: The trigger coil is not adjustable.
1. Torque to 9 Nm (80 lbfin)
2. Taptite screws
F04D0CA
F01D83A
11 2
-
CAUTION
Never use any type of impact wrench at mag-
neto installation.
F06D0NB 1 2 3
Section 04 ENGINE
04-04-14
Apply Loctite 648 (green) on mating surface of the
rotor no. 4.
When reinstalling rotor to flywheel, one of the
protrusion end of rotor must be aligned with hole
in flywheel.
1. Protrusion
2. Hole
Apply Loctite 648 (green) on screws no. 7 retain-
ing rotor to flywheel and torque screws in a criss-
cross sequence to 13 Nm (115 lbfin).
1. Loctite 242 (blue) on crankshaft taper
Install flywheel and make sure to align keyway
with the crankshaft Woodruff key.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on nut no. 6. Install nut
with lock washer and torque to 115 Nm (85 lbfft).
Unlock crankshaft. Reinstall pulse fitting with
washer and torque to 19 Nm (14 lbfft).
1, Cover
Before installation, properly install O-ring no. 3 in
engine magneto cover.
Apply Loctite 767 anti-seize compound on screws
no. 2. Torque screws in a criss-cross sequence to
9 Nm (80 lbfin).
F06D0OA
1 2
F06D24A 1
-
CAUTION
Never use any type of impact wrench.
Section 04 ENGINE
Subsection 05 (TOP END)
04-05-1
TOP END 0
717 Engine
F00D0DT
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
14
Loctite 242
Synthetic grease
11
1
12
2
13
Loctite
242
Synthetic
grease
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
Loctite
518
9
10
Synthetic
grease
6
5
34
rollers
4
3
8
7
7
8
3
4
5
6
34
rollers
Synthetic
grease
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-2
787 Engine
F01D7DU
14
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
Loctite 242
Synthetic grease
1
12
2
Synthetic
grease
21
19
20
18
17
16
26 25 24 23 22
6 34 rollers
5
4
Synthetic
grease
3
4
5
Synthetic
grease
6 34 rollers
10
Loctite
518
Loctite
518
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
13
Synthetic
grease
9
15
11
7
7
8
8
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-3
947 Engine
F06D17T
Loctite
242
Loctite
242
Synthetic
grease
2
9
6
36
rollers
5
4
3
5
Synthetic
grease
14
34
10
34 Nm
(25 lbfft)
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
34 Nm
(25 lbfft)
31
33
22 23 25
Loctite
242
26
16
18 20
30
Synthetic
grease
15
19 21
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
29 28 27
17
7
8
Loctite
242
32
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-4
GENERAL
The 2-stroke ROTAX engine rotates counterclock-
wise seen from the rear (PTO flywheel).
The 717 and 787 engines have a rotary valve to
control opening and closing of the intake. The 947
engine uses reed valves in the crankcase.
The 787 and 947 engines are also equipped with
the RAVE system (Rotax Adjustable Variable Ex-
haust).
787 and 947 Engines
These engines are canted at a 30 degree angle
(they are not canted on the same side), lowering
the center of gravity of the watercraft. Cylinder
exhaust ports are located on the same side of the
intake, allowing a high volume tuned pipe design.
RAVE System
THEORY
For a 2-stroke-cycle engine to have high power ca-
pacity at high crankshaft speeds, a high volumet-
ric or breathing efficiency is required and the fresh
charge losses must be minimized. The result is
achieved by opening the exhaust port early and
utilizing the resonant effects of the tuned exhaust
system to control fresh charge losses.
When an engine of this design is run at a medium
speed, efficiency falls off quickly. The relatively
high exhaust port effectively shortens the useful
power stroke and because the exhaust system is
tuned for maximum power, there is a large in-
crease of fresh charge losses. As a result, the
torque decreases along with a dramatic increase
of the specific fuel consumption. Higher torque
along with lower fuel consumption can be ob-
tained at lower engine speeds if the time the ex-
haust port is open is shortened.
BOMBARDIER-ROTAX has patented a remark-
ably simple system to automatically change the
exhaust port height based on pressure in the ex-
haust system (and RPM for the 947 engine).
Located above the exhaust port is a guillotine-
type slide valve. This rectangular valve is connect-
ed by a shaft to a diaphragm which is working
against the return spring.
To the outside of the return spring is a red plastic
adjustment knob. Turning the adjustment in or out
changes the preload on the return spring which, in
turn, will change the RPM at which the RAVE
valve opens and closes.
787 Engine
One small passage in the cylinder just outside the
exhaust port allows exhaust gas pressure to
reach the diaphragm.
TYPICAL
1. Sliding valve
2. Diaphragm
3. Spring
4. Exhaust port
5. Adjustment knob
As the throttle is opened and the engine begins
producing more power, the pressure against the
diaphragm will overcome the pressure of the re-
turn spring and the RAVE valve will open.
VALVE FULLY OPENED
-
CAUTION
No engine components can be interchanged
between engines.
A18C01A
1 5
3
2
4
F01D7GA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-5
VALVE FULLY CLOSED
947 Engine
On this engine, the RAVE valves are controlled by
the Multi-Purpose Electronic Module (MPEM).
The MPEM measures 2 factors to control the
RAVE valves: engine speed (RPM) and its rate of
acceleration.
To open the RAVE valves, the MPEM activates a
solenoid which directs the positive pressure from
engine crankcase to the valves.
NOTE: A check valve on the pressure line elimi-
nates the negative pressure from the crankcase.
To close the RAVE valves, the MPEM deactivates
the solenoid which blocks the crankcase positive
pressure. The RAVE valves are opened to the at-
mosphere.
F01D7HA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-6
RAVE VALVE OPENED
1. Pulse from crankcase
2. Check valve
3. Positive pressure to solenoid
4. Solenoid activated
5. Positive crankcase pressure to RAVE valves
F06D16S
4
3
5
2
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-7
RAVE VALVE CLOSED
1. Pulse from crankcase
2. Check valve
3. Positive pressure blocked by the solenoid
4. Solenoid deactivated
5. RAVE valves are opened to atmosphere
F06D16T
4
3
5
2
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-8
787 and 947 Engines
The RAVE valve does not allow an engine to make
higher peak horsepower than an engine not so
equipped, it can make moving the peak horse-
power higher practical because of its effect on the
rest of the power curve. Item 2 in the following
figure is the power curve of an engine with the
RAVE valve held fully open through its entire RPM
range. Item 6 notes the peak power produced.
That peak will not change if the exhaust port time
of a similar engine without a RAVE valve was the
same (with all other features equal).
Item 1 is the power curve of the engine with the
RAVE valve closed through its entire RPM range.
The shaded area (item 3) is the improvement in
power at lower engine speeds that is gained be-
cause of the lower exhaust port. If the port re-
mains at this height, however, the power would
peak as noted in item 5. Raising the exhaust port
at the proper RPM (item 7) will allow the engine
peak power to continue to rise (item 6).
Item P1 in figure is the force of the return spring
against the diaphragm. The exhaust pressure
must be high enough to overcome this force be-
fore the valve begins opening. Item P2 is the pres-
sure required to completely open the RAVE valve.
Between P1 and P2, the usable power curve of
the engine is moving from power curve 1 to pow-
er curve 2. This transition takes place very rapidly
at full throttle and from a practical standpoint can
be considered to be instantaneous at item 7.
Gradual application of the throttle, however, will
result in the RAVE valve opening much later.
MAINTENANCE
There are no wear parts anywhere in the system
and there are no adjustments to be periodically
checked. The only possible maintenance required
would be cleaning of carbon deposits from the
guillotine slide. Cleaning intervals would depend
upon the users riding style and the quality of the
oil used. Using FORMULA XP-S synthetic injec-
tion oil, we would suggest annual cleaning of the
valve. If a customer uses a lower quality oil, more
frequent cleaning may be required.
No special solvents or cleaners are required when
cleaning the valve.
BORING PRECAUTION
In its stock configuration the RAVE valve guillotine
has a minimum of 0.5 mm (.020 in) clearance to
the cylinder bore measured at the center line of
the cylinder. This is the minimum production
clearance.
There is only a first oversize piston available for
the 787 and 947 engines. That piston is 0.25 mm
(.010 in) larger in diameter than the stock piston.
When the oversize is installed, the guillotine will
have a minimum clearance of 0.375 mm (.015 in)
with the cylinder bore. This is the minimum oper-
ating clearance the guillotine should be used with.
Clearance less than 0.375 mm (.015 in) will re-
quire reworking of the guillotine to achieve the
proper clearance and radius.
DISASSEMBLY
15, RAVE Valve
787 Engine
Remove the cover no. 18 of the valve by releasing
the spring no. 16.
P1
P2
7
6
4
5
3
1
1
2
P
O
W
E
R
RPM
A18C02A
N
WARNING
Firmly hold cover to valve base. The spring in-
side the valve is applying a pressure against
the cover.
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-9
1. Spring
Loosen Allen screws no. 26 and remove RAVE
valve.
1. Allen screws
Remove bellow no. 21 from valve piston no. 20.
Unscrew valve piston no. 20 from sliding valve
no. 22.
NOTE: Hold the sliding valve to prevent it from
turning.
1. Unscrew piston
2. Hold sliding valve
947 Engine
Loosen Allen screws no. 26 each side of RAVE
valve.
1. Remove screws
F01D8HA
1
F01D8IA
1 1
F01D8MA
1
2
F06D0QA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-10
Remove RAVE valve no. 15.
the spring no. 16.
1. Spring
Remove the compression spring no. 19.
1. Remove spring
Remove spring no. 30 retaining bellows no. 21 to
valve piston no. 20.
1. Spring
Free bellows no. 21 from valve piston no. 20.
1. Bellows removed from piston
;
WARNING
Firmly hold cover to valve base. The com-
pression spring inside the valve is applying
pressure against the cover.
F06D0RA 1
F06D25A 1
F06D0SA 1
F06D0TA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-11
Unscrew valve piston no. 20 from sliding valve
no. 22.
NOTE: Hold the sliding valve to prevent it from
turning.
1. Unscrew piston
2. Hold sliding valve
Remove compression spring no. 29.
1. Remove spring
Remove supporting ring no. 28.
1. Remove supporting ring
Remove O-ring no. 23.
1. Remove O-ring
F06D0TB 2 1
A06D26A 1
F06D27A
1
F06D28A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-12
Remove sliding valve no. 22.
1. Remove sliding valve
Remove bellows no. 21.
1. Remove bellows
1,2, Cylinder Head Cover and Cylinder
Head
Disconnect temperature sensor wire and spark
plug cables.
Connect spark plug cables on grounding device.
717 Engine
Remove air intake silencer and support, refer to
AIR INTAKE 06-03.
717 and 787 Engines
Remove screws no. 14.
Remove cylinder head cover no. 1.
If shells, sand, salt or any other particles are present
in cylinder head, clean with a vacuum cleaner.
Remove cylinder head no. 2.
If shells, sand, salt water or any other particles are
present in cylinder cooling jacket, clean with a
vacuum cleaner.
947 Engine
Disconnect hose of RAVE valves.
Loosen cylinder head bolts no. 14 following the
sequence shown in the next photo.
UNTORQUING SEQUENCE FOR THE CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS
Loosen nuts no. 33 following the sequence shown
in the next photo.
UNTORQUING SEQUENCE FOR THE NUTS
F06D0UA 1
F06D0VA
1
F06D0WA
2 4 6
5 1 3 7
F06D29A
5 2 4 7
8 1 3 6
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-13
Remove cylinder head no. 2.
Remove cylinder head gasket no. 34.
1. Remove gasket
9, Cylinder
787 Engine
Remove air intake silencer and support, refer to
AIR INTAKE 06-03.
717 and 787 Engines
Remove tuned pipe and exhaust manifold, refer
to EXHAUST SYSTEM 04-08.
Remove screws no. 13.
Remove cylinders, being careful that connecting
rods do not hit crankcase edge.
NOTE: Even if only 1 cylinder needs repair, both
cylinders should be lifted to allow 1-piece cylinder
base gasket replacement.
947 Engine
Remove studs no. 32.
NOTE: Studs must be removed prior cylinder
block.
1. Remove studs
Remove cylinder block no. 9.
1. Remove cylinder block
NOTE: To ease removal, a plastic tip hammer can
be used.
Remove cylinder base gasket no. 10.
3, Piston
NOTE: All engines feature cageless piston pin
bearings.
717 and 787 Engines
Bring piston to Top Dead Center and install rubber
pad (P/N 295 000 101) over crankcase opening.
Secure with screws. Lower piston until it sits on
pad.
N
WARNING
If screws need to be heated for removal when
engine is in watercraft, fuel system pressuriza-
tion must be done first. Do not use open flame;
use a heat gun.
F06D0YA 1
F06D2BA 1
1 F06D0ZA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-14
1. Rubber pad (P/N 295 000 101)
If the other cylinder has been removed, complete-
ly cover its opening with a clean rag.
1. Openings covered with rag and rubber pad
947 Engine
Install rubber pad (P/N 290 877 032) to crankcase.
Secure with screws. Lower piston to be removed
until it sits on pad.
1. Rubber pad (P/N 290 877 032)
All Engines
To remove circlip no. 5, insert a pointed tool in pis-
ton notch then pry it out and discard.
TYPICAL
1. Piston notch
To extract piston pin no. 4, use piston pin puller
(P/N 529 035 503) with the appropriate set of
sleeves.
1. Puller
2. Shoulder sleeve
3. Sleeve
F01B0JA
1
F01D43A
1
F06B06B 1
N
WARNING
Always wear safety glasses when removing
piston circlips.
ENGINE SLEEVE SET
717/787 P/N 529 035 542
947 P/N 529 035 543
F01D0PA
1
F00B0IA
2 3
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-15
Fully thread on puller handle.
Insert extractor spindle into the piston pin.
Slide the sleeve and shoulder sleeve onto the
spindle.
Screw in extracting nut with the movable ex-
tracting ring towards spindle.
1. Puller
2. Sleeve
3. Shoulder sleeve
4. Extracting nut
NOTE: The tool cutout must be positioned to-
ward the bottom of the piston.
1. Tool cutout toward bottom of piston
Firmly hold puller and rotate handle to pull pis-
ton pin no. 4.
Rotate spindle until the shoulder sleeve is
flushed with the piston recess.
1. Shoulder sleeve flush with piston recess
Loosen the extracting nut and remove puller.
Remove the shoulder sleeve from piston.
1. Remove shoulder sleeve
Carefully remove the piston no. 3.
The needles, thrust washers and the sleeve re-
main in the connecting rod bore and may be
used again.
F00B0JA
1 2 3 4
F00B0KA
1
F00B0LA
1
F00B0MA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-16
1. Needles and thrust washer
2. Sleeve
CLEANING
Discard all gaskets and O-rings.
Clean water passages and make sure they are not
clogged.
Remove carbon deposits from cylinder exhaust
port, RAVE valve (787 and 947 engines), cylinder
head and piston dome.
Clean piston ring grooves with a groove cleaner
tool, or a piece of broken ring.
INSPECTION
Visually inspect all parts for corrosion damage.
Inspect piston for damage. Light scratches can be
sanded with a fine sand paper.
NOTE: When repairing a seized engine, connect-
ing rods should be checked for straightness and
crankshaft for deflection/misalignment. Refer to
BOTTOM END 04-06 for procedures.
Inspect plane surfaces for warpage. Small defor-
mation can be corrected by grinding surface with
a fine sand paper. Install sand paper on a surface
plate and rub part against oiled sand paper.
The inspection of engine top end should include
the following measurements.
N.A.: Not Applicable
NOTE: Replacement cylinder sleeves are avail-
able if necessary. Also, oversize pistons of 0.25
mm (.010 in) are available for all engines and over-
size pistons of 0.5 mm (.020 in) are available for
the 717 engine.
Cylinder Taper
Using a cylinder bore gauge, measure cylinder diam-
eter at 16 mm (5/8 in) from top of cylinder just below
auxiliary transfer port, facing exhaust port. If the dif-
ference between readings exceed specification, cyl-
inder should be rebored and honed or replaced.
F00B0NA
1
2
ENGINE
MEASUREMENT
TOLERANCES
NEW PARTS
(min.) (max.)
WEAR
LIMIT
Cylinder Taper N.A.
0.05 mm
(.002 in)
0.1 mm
(.004 in)
Cylinder Out
of Round
N.A.
0.008 mm
(.0003 in)
0.08 mm
(.003 in)
Piston/Cylinder Wall
Clearance for the
717 Engine
0.10 mm
(.0039 in)
N.A.
0.20 mm
(.008 in)
Clearance for the
787 Engine
0.11 mm
(.0043 in)
N.A.
0.20 mm
(.008 in)
Clearance for the
947 Engine
0.09 mm
(.0035 in)
N.A.
0.20 mm
(.008 in)
Ring/Piston Groove
Clearance
0.03 mm
(.001 in)
0.07 mm
(.003 in)
0.20 mm
(.008 in)
Ring End Gap
0.40 mm
(.016 in)
0.55 mm
(.022 in)
1.0 mm
(.039 in)
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-17
1. Measuring perpendicularly (90 ) to piston pin axis
2. Auxiliary transfer port
A. 16 mm (5/8 in)
Cylinder Out of Round
Using a cylinder bore gauge, measure cylinder di-
ameter at 16 mm (5/8 in) from top of cylinder.
Measure diameter in piston pin axis direction then
perpendicularly (90) to it. If the difference be-
tween readings exceed specification, cylinder
should be rebored and honed or replaced.
1. Measuring in piston pin axis
2. Measuring perpendicularly (90 ) to piston pin axis
A. 16 mm (5/8 in)
Piston/Cylinder Wall Clearance
To determine the piston dimension, take the mea-
surement on the piston dome.
1. Piston dome
2. Piston measurement
Adjust and lock a micrometer to the specified val-
ue on the piston dome.
1. Micrometer set to the piston dimension
With the micrometer set to the piston dimension,
adjust a cylinder bore gauge to the micrometer di-
mension and set the indicator to zero.
A
F01D8AA
1
2
A
F01D8BA
A
1
2
F00D0EA 2 1
F00B08A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-18
1. Use the micrometer to set the cylinder bore gauge
2. Dial bore gauge
1. Indicator set to zero
Position the dial bore gauge at 16 mm (5/8 in) be-
low cylinder top edge.
1. Measuring perpendicularly (90) to piston pin axis
A. 16 mm (5/8 in)
Read the measurement on the cylinder bore
gauge. The result is the exact piston/cylinder wall
clearance.
NOTE: Make sure the cylinder bore gauge indica-
tor is set exactly at the same position as with the
micrometer, otherwise the reading will be false.
Ring/Piston Groove Clearance
717 and 787 Engines
Using a feeler gauge, check clearance between
rectangular ring and groove. If clearance exceeds
specified tolerance, replace piston.
NOTE: Ring/piston groove clearance can be cor-
rectly measured only on rectangular ring which is
bottom ring.
1. Feeler gauge
2. Rectangular ring (bottom)
947 Engine
Due to the semi-trapez rings, it is not possible to
accurately measure ring/piston groove clearance.
Ring End Gap
Position ring halfway between exhaust port and
top of cylinder.
NOTE: In order to correctly position ring in cylin-
der, use piston as a pusher.
Using a feeler gauge, check ring end gap. If gap
exceeds specified tolerance, rings should be re-
placed.
F00B09A
1
2
F00B0AA
1
F01D0KA
1
A
F01D0XA
1
2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-19
1. Top of cylinder
2. Ring end gap
10, Cylinder Base Gasket
Different thicknesses of cylinder base gaskets are
available for a precise adjustment of the combus-
tion chamber volume.
To determine gasket thickness, refer to the identi-
fication holes on the gasket.
TYPICAL
1. Identification holes
717 Engine
787 Engine
947 Engine
F01D0OA 1
2
F01D67A
1
GASKET
THICKNESS
IDENTIFICATION
HOLES
0.3 mm
(.012 in)
3
0.5 mm
(.020 in)
5
0.6 mm
(.024 in)
6
GASKET
THICKNESS
IDENTIFICATION
HOLES
0.3 mm
(.012 in)
3
0.4 mm
(.016 in)
4
0.6 mm
(.024 in)
6
GASKET
THICKNESS
IDENTIFICATION
HOLES
0.5 mm
(.020 in)
5
0.6 mm
(.024 in)
6
0.8 mm
(.031 in)
8
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-20
15, RAVE Valve
787 and 947 Engines
Check RAVE valve bellow no. 21 for cracks.
787 Engine Only
Check if passages of valve housing no. 25 and cyl-
inder no. 10 are not obstructed.
1. Passage of valve housing
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is essentially the reverse of disassem-
bly procedures. However pay particular attention
to the following.
15, RAVE Valve
787 Engine
Make sure to insert O-ring no. 23 onto rod of slid-
ing valve no. 22.
The TOP position of the sliding valve no. 22 is in-
dicated on one side.
1. Sliding valve
2. O-ring
3. TOP
Install a new gasket no. 24. It must be installed at
the same time as the sliding valve no. 22.
Position the valve housing no. 25 onto the cylin-
der so that its opening is toward the bottom.
1. Bottom of valve housing
When the valve is mounted onto the cylinder,
move the valve piston no. 20 to ensure the sliding
valve no. 22 moves easily and doesnt stick.
947 Engine
Install the supporting ring no. 28 with the bevel
side facing the O-ring no. 27.
F01D8JA 1
F01D8KA
1
3 2
F01D8JB 1
F01D8LA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-21
1. Bevel facing the O-ring
There is only one way to insert the sliding valve
no. 22 in valve housing no. 25.
1. Sliding valve ridge toward housing groove
3, Piston
At assembly, place the pistons with the letters
AUS (over an arrow on the piston dome) facing
in direction of the exhaust port.
1. Exhaust side
NOTE: On the 787 and 947 engines, the exhaust
ports are located on the same side as the intake.
Carefully cover crankcase opening as for disas-
sembly.
4,6, Piston Pin and Roller Bearing
To install roller bearing and piston pin use, piston
pin puller (P/N 529 035 503) with the appropriate
set of sleeves as for disassembly.
Replacement bearings are held in place by a lo-
cating sleeve outside and 2 plastic cage halves
inside.
Push needle bearing together with inner halves
out of the locating sleeve into the connecting
rod bore.
Replace the inner halves by the appropriate
sleeve tool in the connecting rod bore.
Insert piston pin into piston until it comes flush
with inward edge of piston hub.
Warm piston to approximately 50-60C (122-
140F) and install it over connecting rod.
NOTE: Make sure thrust washers are present each
side of needles.
Install the shoulder sleeve tool on the opposite
side of the piston pin.
1. Piston pin
2. Shoulder sleeve
F06D11A
1
F06D12A
1
A01C01A
AUS
1
F00B0OA
2 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-22
Insert extractor spindle into the piston pin,
screw on extracting nut.
1. Puller installed on the opposite side of the piston pin
2. Tighten extracting nut
Rotate handle to pull piston pin carefully into
the piston.
Plastic Mounting Device Method
This is an alternate method when no service tool
is available.
Replacement roller bearings are delivered in a
convenient plastic mounting device. For installa-
tion, proceed as follows:
Align replacement roller bearing with connect-
ing rod bore.
Carefully push inner plastic sleeve into con-
necting rod bore; outer plastic ring will release
rollers.
1. Outer ring removal after inner sleeve insertion into bore
Make sure thrust washers are present each
side of rollers.
1. Thrust washer each side
Insert piston pin into piston until it comes flush
with inward edge of piston hub.
1. Piston pin flush here
2. Thrust washers
Place piston over connecting rod and align
bores, then gently tap piston pin with a fiber
hammer to push out inner plastic ring on oppo-
site side. Support piston from opposite side.
F00B0PA
1 2
F01D0QA
1
F01D0VA
1
F01D0RA
1
2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-23
As necessary, pull halves of inner sleeve with
long nose pliers.
1. Pulling inner sleeve half
5, Circlip
Always use new circlips.
717 and 787 Engines
Secure circlip with its opening located at the bot-
tom of the piston.
1. Circlip opening at 6 oclock (at bottom)
947 Engine
Secure circlip in piston groove with its bent end in
piston notch as shown.
1. Circlip end in piston notch
-
CAUTION
Always use new circlips. At installation, take
care not to deform them. Circlips must not
move freely after installation.
N
WARNING
Always wear safety glasses when installing
piston circlips.
F01D0SA
F01D0TA
1
-
CAUTION
To minimize the stress on the circlips, it is
important to install them as described.
F06D18A 1
1
F07D0AB
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-24
All Engines
To easily insert circlip into piston, use circlip in-
staller.
1. Circlip installer
Remove sleeve from pusher then insert circlip
into its bore.
Reinstall sleeve onto pusher and push until cir-
clip comes in end of tool.
TYPICAL
1. Circlip near end of tool
Position end of tool against piston pin opening.
Firmly hold piston against tool and tap tool with
a plastic tip hammer to insert circlip into its
groove.
9, Cylinder
717 and 787 Engines
To easily slide cylinder over piston, install on pis-
ton ring compressor (P/N 290 876 979).
1. Slide this edge
NOTE: Ring compressor will not fit on oversize
parts.
Make sure to align ring end gap with piston locat-
ing pin. Slide tool over rings.
ENGINE TOOL P/N
717 and 787 290 877 016
947 290 877 518
F06B01A
1
F00B0QA
1
-
CAUTION
The hand retaining the piston should absorb
the energy to protect the connecting rod.
F00B0RA
A01B1TA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-25
1. Ring end gap aligned with piston locating pin
Slide cylinder over piston.
When reassembling cylinders to crankcase, it is
important to have them properly aligned so that
exhaust flanges properly match up with exhaust
manifold.
717 Engine
The aligning tool (P/N 290 876 902) or the exhaust
manifold can be used to align cylinders.
717 ENGINE
1. Exhaust flange aligning tool
717 ENGINE
1. Aligning cylinders using exhaust manifold
F01D0ZA
1
F01D10A
F01D44A
1
F01D45A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-26
787 Engine
The exhaust manifold is used to align cylinders.
787 ENGINE
1. Aligning cylinders using exhaust manifold
9, Cylinder Block
947 Engine
Install studs no. 32. Apply Loctite 242 to threads
and torque studs to 5 Nm (44 lbfin).
Install cylinder base gasket no. 10. There is only
one way to install gasket.
The cylinder block is positioned with locating dow-
els.
1. Dowel
To easily slide cylinder block over pistons, use ring
compressor (P/N 290 876 965).
1. Slide this edge
NOTE: For each ring, make sure to align ring end
gap with piston locating pin.
Install cylinder block.
Install O-rings no. 31.
13, Cylinder Screw
717 Engine
Apply synthetic grease below the screw head.
Apply also Loctite 242 (blue) on screw threads.
Install and torque screws in a criss-cross sequence
for each cylinder to 24 Nm (17 lbfft). Refer to the
following illustration.
F00D0FA 1
F06D1PA 1
-
CAUTION
The O-rings must be installed and properly po-
sitioned in the cylinder block. The O-rings are
meant to dampen stud vibration.
A01B1TA
1
F01D35A
1 4 1 4
3 2 3 2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-27
787 Engine
Prior installation, apply synthetic grease below
screw head and Loctite 518 on screw threads.
Install M10 x 105 screws on exhaust side and the
M10 x 73.5 on opposite side.
Torque screws in a criss-cross sequence for each
cylinder to 20 Nm (15 lbfft). Repeat the proce-
dure, retightening all cylinder screws to 40 Nm
(30 lbfft).
2, Cylinder Head
717 and 787 Engines
Make sure to install O-rings no. 12 around spark
plug holes and O-ring no. 11 of cylinder head as
shown in the following illustration.
1. O-rings
Apply Loctite 518 in O-ring groove of cylinder
sleeves.
Install cylinder head.
947 Engine
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on the threads of the cyl-
inder block studs no. 32.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) below head of cylinder
head bolts no. 14.
Apply synthetic grease on threads of cylinder
head bolts no. 14.
Torque bolts and nuts to 15 Nm (11 lbfft) as per
following sequence in the next picture. Repeat
the torquing sequence by retightening to 34 Nm
(25 lbfft).
TORQUING SEQUENCE
1, Cylinder Head Cover
717 and 787 Engines
Install cylinder head cover.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) below head of screws
no. 14.
Apply also synthetic grease on threads of screws
no. 14.
Torque cylinder head screws no. 14 to 12 Nm
(9 lbfft) as per following illustrated sequence.
Repeat the procedure, retightening all screws to
24 Nm (17 lbfft).
F01D7FA
2 3 3 2
4 1 1 4
F01D5AA 1
1
F06D0WB
3 1 12
4 5 15
7 10 8 14 6
11 9 13 2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-28
TORQUING SEQUENCE
ADJUSTMENT
RAVE Valve
787 Engine
Turn the red plastic knob no. 17 until it is flush to
the valve cover.
1. Knob flush with the cover
947 Engine
Turn the red plastic knob no. 17 until it is fully
tightened.
1. Knob fully tightened
This will ensure the correct preload on the return
spring no. 19 in order to open and close the RAVE
valve at the proper RPM.
Combustion Chamber Volume
Measurement
The combustion chamber volume is the region in
the cylinder head above the piston at Top Dead
Center. It is measured with the cylinder head in-
stalled on the engine.
1. Combustion chamber
F01D46A
10 8 2 4 6 12
11 3 1 5 9 7
F00D0GA
1
F00D0WA
1
F01D5VA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-05-29
NOTE: When checking the combustion chamber
volume, engine must be cold, piston must be free
of carbon deposit and cylinder head must be lev-
eled.
1. Remove both spark plugs and bring one piston
to Top Dead Center a using a TDC gauge.
1. Bring piston to TDC
2. Obtain a graduated burette (capacity 0-50 cc)
and fill with an equal part (50/50) of gasoline
and injection oil.
1. Graduated burette (0-50 cc)
3. Open burette valve to fill its tip. Add liquid in
burette until level reaches 0 cc.
4. Inject the burette content through the spark
plug hole until liquid touches the top spark plug
hole.
1. Top of spark plug hole
NOTE: The liquid level in cylinder must not drop
for a few seconds after filling. If so, there is a leak
between piston and cylinder. The recorded vol-
ume would be false.
5. Let burette stand upward for about 10 minutes,
until liquid level is stabilized.
6. Read the burette scale to obtain the quantity of
liquid injected in the combustion chamber.
Compare the obtained value with the table be-
low. The volume should be in the allowable
range.
NOTE: When the combustion chamber is filled to
top of spark plug hole, it includes an amount of
2.39 cc corresponding to the spark plug tip. The
following table of combustion chamber volume in-
cludes this value.
7. Repeat the procedure for the other cylinder.
1
F01D2IA
F00B0BA
1
ENGINE
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
VOLUME
717 31.2 - 34.0 cc
787 34.7 - 37.9 cc
947 43.3 - 47.3 cc
F00D0HA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
Subsection 06 (BOTTOM END)
04-06-1
BOTTOM END 0
717 Engine
F00D0YS
2
Loctite
518
11
Lithium
grease
4
Anti-seize
lubricant
12
3
1
6
5
6
Anti-seize
lubricant
Loctite
642
12
4
Anti-seize
lubricant
Loctite
242
6
6
4
5
Lithium
grease
Loctite
518
2
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
9
11
Synthetic
grease
7
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
10
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
Loctite
518
Loctite
518
Synthetic
grease
8
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
4
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-2
787 Engine
Loctite
518
Anti-seize
lubricant
13
Lithium
grease
Anti-seize
lubricant
1
Lithium
grease
F01D8YS
2
Anti-seize
lubricant
Anti-seize
lubricant
4
Loctite
242
Loctite
642
Anti-seize
lubricant
Lithium
grease
Loctite
518
Loctite
518
Synthetic
grease
8
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
Loctite
518
Synthetic
grease
7
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
Loctite
518
Synthetic grease
8 40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
Synthetic
grease
30 mL (1 oz)
SAE 30
motor oil
5
6
12
6
15
16
6
4
6
2
7
11
12
18
11
4
3
4
19
15
14
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-3
947 Engine
F06D19T
2
Loctite 242
28
29
30
Loctite
242
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
15
13
16
17
14
31
32
15
16
17
Synthetic
grease
4
5
Synthetic
grease
Loctite
242
3
Loctite
242
4
5
Synthetic
grease
1
22
115 Nm
(85 lbfft)
20
Loctite
648
Loctite
242
Synthetic
grease
23 Nm
(17 lbfft)
Loctite
242
21
4
2
Loctite
518
24
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
Loctite
242
25
26
27
23
Synthetic
grease
Loctite 518
Synthetic grease
Loctite
518 7
Synthetic
grease
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
7
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
Loctite
518
8
Synthetic grease
8
Loctite 518
Synthetic grease
7
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
Anti-seize
lubricant
Anti-seize
lubricant
26
40 mL
(1.35 oz)
SAE 30
motor oil
6
6
27 Nm (20 lbfft)
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-4
DISASSEMBLY
Engine has to be removed from watercraft to open
bottom end. Refer to REMOVAL AND INSTALLA-
TION 04-03.
NOTE: Before proceeding with the disassembly
of the engine, it is possible to make a few verifica-
tions. See INSPECTION in this subsection.
1, PTO Flywheel
717 and 787 Engines
To remove PTO flywheel, the crankshaft must be
locked. Refer to MAGNETO SYSTEM 04-04 and
follow the procedure to lock the magneto fly-
wheel.
GS, GTS and GTI Models
PTO flywheel is loosen using PTO flywheel re-
mover (P/N 295 000 001).
Insert special tool in PTO flywheel splines.
TYPICAL
1. PTO flywheel remover (P/N 295 000 001)
Using a suitable wrench or socket with a breaker
bar, unscrew PTO flywheel COUNTERCLOCK-
WISE when facing it and hold extension handle
locking the magneto flywheel.
TYPICAL
NOTE: When splines of PTO flywheel are worn
out and special tool cannot be used, proceed with
the following alternate method.
Use a pipe wrench and install it on PTO flywheel
as illustrated.
TYPICAL
SPX Model
PTO flywheel is loosened using PTO flywheel re-
mover (P/N 295 000 156).
F01J0TA
F01D1AA
1
F00D0ZA
1
F00D10A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-5
Install special tool.
SPX MODEL
1. PTO flywheel remover
Install the extension handle (P/N 295 000 125) on
the PTO flywheel remover. Loosen PTO flywheel
COUNTERCLOCKWISE when facing it.
GSX Limited and GTX Limited
Insert PTO flywheel remover (P/N 295 000 001) in
coupler splines.
PTO FLYWHEEL REMOVER TOOL
Using a suitable socket with a breaker bar, lock
crankshaft.
Loosen Allen screws no. 21 of coupler no. 20.
1. Loosen Allen screws
2. Breaker bar locking crankshaft
Remove the coupler no. 20.
XP Limited
Lock crankshaft using the PTO flywheel remover
(P/N 295 000 156) and extension handle (P/N 295
000 125).
Loosen Allen screw no. 21.
1. PTO flywheel remover tool
2. Extension handle
3. Loosen Allen screw
Rotate tool to remove the other 3 Allen screws
no. 21.
Remove coupler no. 20.
F00B04A
F06I02A
1
F01J0TA
F06D37A
1
2
F08D01A 1 2 3
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-6
Install puller plate (P/N 529 035 533) and exten-
sion handle (P/N 295 000 125) to PTO flywheel.
NOTE: Puller plate can be used without the ex-
tension handle.
Loosen bolt no. 22 retaining the PTO flywheel to
the crankshaft using a suitable socket and breaker
bar.
1. Puller plate
2. Extension handle
3. Loosen bolt with socket and breaker bar
Remove the PTO flywheel using puller plate (P/N
529 035 533), puller (P/N 529 035 548) and bolt
(P/N 529 035 549).
1. Puller plate
2. Puller
3. Bolt
4. Extension handle
NOTE: Puller plate can be used without the ex-
tension handle.
27, Starter Drive Assembly
947 Engine Only
Loosen 2 Allen screws no. 24 retaining starter
drive cover no. 25.
1. Cover
2. Allen screw
Remove starter drive cover no. 25 and spring no. 9.
Remove starter drive assembly no. 27.
1. Starter drive assembly
F06D38A
3
1 2
F06D39A
1
2 4 3
F06D1CA 1 2
F06D1DA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-7
28, Reed Valve
947 Engine Only
Remove both carburetor flanges.
1. Carburetor flange
Remove reed valves from crankcase.
5, Seal
If a crankshaft end seal has to be replaced, bot-
tom end must be opened (except for the MAG
side seal on the 787 engine, which is mounted on
the magneto housing).
2, Crankcase
Remove the following parts:
engine supports (717 engine)
magneto flywheel, refer to MAGNETO SYS-
TEM 04-04
magneto housing (except 947 engine)
starter
rotary valve cover and valve (except 947 en-
gine)
Starter drive assembly (947 engine)
Reed valves (947 engine)
717 and 787 Engines
Put engine on a trestle. Loosen crankcase screws.
947 Engine
Place engine upright on crankcase magneto side.
Loosen crankcase screws.
All Engines
Put engine back on a support. Insert a pry bar be-
tween crankcase lugs to separate halves.
TYPICAL
1. Separate halves by prying at provided lugs
F06D0JA
1
-
CAUTION
Be careful to precision machined surfaces.
F07D09A
F01D1KA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-8
TYPICAL
1. Separate halves by prying at provided lugs
Remove crankshaft and counterbalance shaft (787
and 947 engines).
4,5, Bearing and Seal
NOTE: Do not needlessly remove crankshaft bear-
ings.
Remove end seal(s).
TYPICAL
1. End seal
717 Engine
To remove end bearings from crankshaft, use the
following tools.
717 ENGINE
1. Puller (P/N 290 876 298)
2. Protective cap (P/N 290 876 557)
3. Distance ring, MAG side only (P/N 290 876 569)
4. Ring (both side) (P/N 290 977 490)
5. MAG side ring halves (P/N 290 276 025)
6. PTO side ring halves (P/N 290 977 475)
7. Screw M8 x 40 (P/N 290 840 681)
8. Screw M8 x 70 (P/N 290 841 201)
NOTE: To facilitate ring or distance ring installa-
tion, lubricate their inside diameters.
787 Engine
following tools.
NOTE: The outer PTO bearing and crankshaft
gear can be removed in one step using another
puller. See Crankshaft Gear no. 18.
787 ENGINE
1. Puller (P/N 290 876 298)
3. Distance ring (P/N 290 876 569)
4. Ring (P/N 290 977 490)
5. Ring halves (P/N 290 977 475)
6. Screw M8 x 40 (P/N 290 840 681)
7. Screw M8 x 70 (P/N 290 841 201)
F01D1LA
1
F06D1GA 1
1 5 3 2
7
8
F01B09A
4 6
F01B2MA
1 2 3 5
7
6
4
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-9
947 Engine
following tools.
947 ENGINE
1. Puller (P/N 420 877 635)
3. Distance ring (P/N 290 876 569)
4. Ring (P/N 290 977 480)
5. Ring halves (P/N 290 876 330)
6. Screw (P/N 290 940 755)
All Engines
TYPICAL
1. Removing crankshaft bearing
Or, use a bearing extractor such as Proto no. 4332
and a press to remove two bearings at a time (ex-
cept on PTO side for the 787 engine).
1. Press bearings out
2. Bearing extractor
18, Crankshaft Gear
787 Engine
The crankshaft gear and bearing no. 5 can be re-
moved in one step using the following puller.
1. Puller (P/N 290 877 665)
Install the puller as per following illustration.
F06B03A
5 4 3
2
1 6
6
F01D1OA
1
F01D1PA
1
2
F04B03A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-10
1. Puller
2. Protective cap
Secure puller in a vise and remove gear and bear-
ing.
NOTE: If the inner PTO bearing needs to be re-
placed, remove the Woodruff key on the crank-
shaft.
13, Counterbalance Shaft
787 Engine
Bearings no. 15 can be removed by using the fol-
lowing tools:
1. Puller (P/N 290 876 298)
3. Ring (P/N 290 977 480)
4. Ring halves (P/N 290 876 330)
5. Screw M8 x 40 (P/N 290 840 681)
1. Tool installed
To remove gear no. 14, first trace an index mark
on the gear and counterbalance shaft.
NOTE: There is no Woodruff key to position the
gear on the counterbalance shaft. An index mark
must be traced to ease assembly procedure.
1. Index mark
F00D0IA
1
2
F00D0JA
F00B0CA
1 2 3 4
5
F00D0KA 1
F00D0SA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-11
Use a press to remove the gear no. 14 from the
counterbalance shaft.
947 Engine
Use a press to remove counterweights no. 16
and bearings no. 15.
1. Trace an index mark
Remove seals no. 17.
Remove bearing no. 31 and washer no. 32.
Use a press to remove gear no. 14.
CLEANING
Discard all oil seals, gaskets, O-rings and sealing
rings.
Clean oil passages and make sure they are not
clogged.
Remove old Loctite from crankcase mating sur-
faces with gasket remover (P/N 295 000 110).
INSPECTION
Assembled Engine
The following checks can be performed with en-
gine in watercraft without overhauling engine.
Crankshaft Alignment at Center Main
Journal
Since it is an assembled crankshaft it can become
misaligned or deflected. Crankshaft can be twist-
ed on center main journal, changing timing of one
cylinder in relation with the other.
1. Main journal alignment here
-
CAUTION
There is no woodruff key to position the coun-
terweights. An index mark must be traced to
retain the proper position of the counter-
weight.
F00D0TA
F06D1HA 1
-
CAUTION
Be careful not to spray cleaner on the paint-
ed surface of the engine. Never use a sharp
object to scrape away old sealant as score
marks incurred are detrimental to crankcase
sealing.
F01D1NA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-12
To accurately check if crankshaft is twisted on
center main journal, proceed as follows:
Remove magneto housing cover.
Remove flywheel nut (and magneto rotor for
the 787 and 947 engines). Refer to MAGNETO
SYSTEM 04-04 for procedures.
Install Bombardier degree wheel (P/N 295 000
007) on crankshaft end. Hand-tighten nut only.
Remove both spark plugs.
Install a TDC gauge in spark plug hole on MAG
side.
Bring MAG piston at Top Dead Center.
As a needle pointer, secure a wire with a cover
screw and a washer.
Rotate degree wheel (NOT crankshaft) so that
needle pointer reads 360.
TYPICAL
1. TDC gauge
2. Degree wheel
3. Hand tighten nut
4. Needle pointer
Remove TDC gauge and install on PTO side.
Bring PTO piston at Top Dead Center.
Interval between cylinders must be exactly 180
therefore, needle pointer must indicate 180 on
degree wheel (360 - 180 = 180).
Any other reading indicates a misaligned crank-
shaft.
Crankshaft Alignment at Connecting
Rod Journal
Counterweights can also be twisted on connect-
ing rod journal on any or both cylinder(s).
1. Connecting rod journal alignment here
Such misalignment may cause a crankshaft hard
to be manually turned. Verification can be done by
measuring deflection each end of crankshaft.
If deflection is found greater than specified toler-
ance, this indicates worn bearing(s), bent and/or
disaligned crankshaft. Proceed with the disas-
sembly of the engine.
Disassembled Engine
The following verifications can be performed with
the engine disassembled.
2, Crankcase
Inspect plane surfaces for warpage. Small defor-
mation can be corrected by grinding surface with
a fine sandpaper. Install sandpaper on a surface
plate and rub part against oiled sand paper.
4, Bearing
Inspect crankshaft bearings. Check for corrosion,
scoring, pitting, chipping or other evidence of
wear. Make sure plastic cage is not melted. Ro-
tate and make sure they turn smoothly.
3, Crankshaft
NOTE: If crankshaft and/or components are found
defective, it must be repaired by a specialized
shop or replaced.
1
F01D4IA
3
2
4
F01D1NB
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-13
Connecting Rod Straightness
Align a steel ruler on edge of small end connect-
ing rod bore. Check if ruler is perfectly aligned
with edge of big end.
1. Ruler must be aligned with edge of connecting rod here
2. Align ruler here
Crankshaft Deflection
Crankshaft deflection is measured each end with
a dial indicator.
First, check deflection with crankshaft in crank-
case. If deflection exceeds the specified toler-
ance, it can be either ball bearings wear, bent or
twisted crankshaft at connecting rod journal.
1. Measuring PTO side deflection in crankcase
1. Measuring MAG side deflection in crankcase
Remove crankshaft bearings and check deflection
again on V-shaped blocks as illustrated.
1. Measuring MAG side deflection on V-shaped blocks
1. Measuring PTO side deflection on V-shaped blocks
NOTE: Crankshaft deflection cannot be correctly
measured between centers of a lathe.
MEASUREMENT MAG SIDE PTO SIDE
Crankshaft
deflection (max.)
0.050 mm
(.002 in)
0.030 mm
(.001 in)
F01D1QA
1
2
F01D1SA
1
F01D1TA
1
F01D1UA
1
F01D1VA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-14
Connecting Rod Big End Axial Play
Using a feeler gauge, measure distance between
thrust washer and crankshaft counterweight.
1. Measuring big end axial play
2. Feeler gauge
23, Bearing
947 Engine
Check bearing no. 23 of starter drive assembly
no. 27 in crankcase.
1. Bearing of starter drive assembly
28, Reed Valve
947 Engine
Check reed valve petals no. 29 for cracks or other
defects. The reed petals must lie completely flat
against the reed valve body no. 30. To check, hold
against light.
1. No play
In case of a play, turn reed petals upside down
and recheck. If there is still a play, replace petals.
Check perfect condition of rubber coating on reed
valve body.
Check stopper distance from center of reed valve
block.
A. 13 0.25 mm (.512 .010 in)
MEASUREMENT
NEW PARTS
WEAR
LIMIT
(min.) (max.)
Connecting rod
big end axial play
0.390 mm
(.015 in)
0.737 mm
(.029 in)
1.2 mm
(.047 in)
F01D1WA
1
2
F06D1IA 1
F06D1JA 1
F06D1EA
A
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-15
NOTE: Distance should be the same on both
sides.
Bent stopper as required to obtain the proper dis-
tance.
ASSEMBLY
to the following.
3,4, Crankshaft and Bearing
Apply Loctite 767 anti-seize on part of crankshaft
where bearing fits.
Prior to installation, place bearings into a container
filled with oil, previously heated to 75C (167F).
This will expand bearing and ease installation.
To properly position the outer bearing(s), a dis-
tance gauge must be temporarily installed against
the inner bearing. Slide the outer bearing until
stopped by the distance gauge, then remove it.
1. Distance gauge
TYPICAL
1. Distance gauge
2. Outer bearing
12, Distance Ring
When installing the distance ring, make sure to
position it with its chamfer toward the counter-
weight of the crankshaft.
18, Crankshaft Gear
787 Engine
Position the long flange of the gear toward the
counterweight of the crankshaft. Also, make sure
to align the gear keyway with the Woodruff key
on the crankshaft.
1. Woodruff key on the crankshaft
ENGINE DISTANCE GAUGE
717 P/N 529 034 800 (PTO)
787 P/N 529 034 900 (MAG)
947
P/N 290 876 627 (MAG)
P/N 290 876 622 (PTO)
F01B0HA
1
F01D1YA
1
2
F00D0LA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-16
1. Keyway
2. Long flange toward the crankshaft counterweight
5, Seal
At seal assembly, apply a light coat of lithium grease
on seal lips.
787 Engine
Position PTO seal against the retaining shim; the
gap between the seal and bearing will ensure
proper lubrication of the bearing.
1. Seal against the retaining shim
947 Engine
Seals are positioned with the outer lip in the crank-
case recess.
1. Seal lip in crankcase recess
6, Drive Pin
Make sure drive pins of bearings are properly in-
stalled in crankcase recesses at assembly.
1. Drive pins
13, Counterbalance Shaft
787 Engine
Press gear no. 14 onto counterbalance shaft tak-
ing care to align both marks previously traced.
F00D0MA
1
2
F00D0NA 1
-
CAUTION
Counterbalance shaft must be properly as-
sembled, otherwise engine will vibrate and
premature wear will occur.
F06D1LA
1
F00D0OA
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-17
Proceed as follows to check if the gear no. 14 is
properly positioned on the counterbalance shaft:
Temporarily install the counterbalance shaft in
the crankcase.
Rotate the counterbalance shaft to align the
notch of the gear with the crankcase.
1. Gear notch aligned with the crankcase
The notch of the couterweight on the opposite
end of the counterbalance shaft must also be
aligned with the cranckcase.
1. Counterweight notch aligned with the crankcase
If notches are not aligned with the crankcase, re-
move the gear and repeat the procedure until the
notches are properly aligned.
947 Engine
Install bearing no. 31 and washer no. 32.
When installing seals no. 17, apply a light coat of
synthetic grease on seal lips.
Prior to installation, place bearings no. 15 into a
container filled with oil, previously heated to 75C
(167F). This will expand bearings and ease their
installation.
Reinstall counterweights no. 16 using a press and
take care to align index marks previously traced.
3,13, Crankshaft and Counterbalance
Shaft
787 and 947 Engines
Install crankshaft first in crankcase.
After crankshaft installation, install counterbal-
ance shaft. Make sure to properly index crank-
shaft and counterbalance shaft by aligning marks
of gears.
787 ENGINE
1. Marks must be aligned
F00D0UA
1
F00D0VA
1
-
CAUTION
Marks on the crankshaft and counterbalance
shaft must be aligned, otherwise engine will
vibrate and premature wear will occur.
F00D0PA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-18
947 ENGINE
1. Marks must be aligned
Turn by hand the crankshaft and counterbalance
shaft. Make sure they do not interfere with the
crankcase.
947 Engine
Properly position bearing no. 31 and washer
no. 32.
1. Bearing
2. Washer in crankcase groove
Place seals no. 17 in their respective positions.
1. Seal in place
2, Crankcase
All Engines
Crankcase halves are factory matched and there-
fore, are not interchangeable or available as single
halves.
Prior to joining crankcase halves, apply a light coat
of Loctite 518 on mating surfaces. Do not apply in
excess as it will spread out inside crankcase.
NOTE: On aluminum material it is recommended
to use Loctite Primer N to reduce curing time and
increase gap filling capability. Refer to manufac-
turers instructions.
717 and 787 Engines
Rotary valve shaft must be installed in crankcase
before closing halves.
717 Engine
Temporarily install armature plate to align crank-
case halves with each other.
F06D1MA 1
F06D1NA 1 2
-
CAUTION
Before joining crankcase halves, make sure
that crankshaft gear is well engaged with ro-
tary valve shaft gear.
F06D1OA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-19
947 Engine
Make sure all locating dowels are in place.
1. Dowel
19, Bearing Cover
787 Engine
Install the bearing cover with its hollow side to-
ward the bearing.
1. Hollow side facing bearing
7,8,9, Crankcase Screw
717 Engine
Apply Loctite 518 on screw threads and synthetic
grease below head screws.
Torque crankcase screws to 24 Nm (17 lbfft) as
per following illustrated sequence.
Torque 2 M10 crankcase screws to 40 Nm (30
lbfft).
787 Engine
Apply Loctite 518 on screw threads and synthetic
grease below head screws.
per following sequence. Repeat procedure, re-
tightening all screws to 24 Nm (17 lbfft).
F06D1PA 1
F00D0QA
1
F01D20A
12
7 1
11
3
9
5
13
14
6
10
2 4
8
F01D20B
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-20
As a final step, torque only M10 screws no. 8 of
crankcase to 40 Nm (30 lbfft) as per following
sequence.
947 Engine
Apply synthetic grease below head of screws and
Loctite 518 on threads.
per following sequence. Repeat procedure, re-
tightening all screws to 27 Nm (20 lbfft).
As a final step, torque only the M10 x 73.5 bolts
to 40 Nm (30 lbfft) as per following sequence.
F01D81A
11 7 21 1 22 3 5 9
10 6
14
2 4
13
8 12
19 17
15 16
18 20
F01D81B
11 7 1 3 5 9
10 6 2 4 8 12
F07D09B
7
3
1
16
5
19
21
11
10
8
23
20
15
4
13
2
18
6
22
12
14
9
19
17
F07D09C
9
7
3
1
5
11
10
8
4
2
6
12
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-21
11, Fitting
717 and 787 Engines
If inlet and outlet oil fittings of rotary valve shaft
have been removed from crankcase, reinstall
them with their ends pointing toward ignition
housing. Apply Loctite 518 on threads of fittings.
10, Stud
717 Engine
At assembly in crankcase, apply Loctite 518 on
stud threads. Torque to 10 Nm (88 lbfin).
23, Starter Drive Bearing
947 Engine
To install bearing no. 23 of starter drive assembly,
use pusher (P/N 290 876 502) and handle (P/N 290
877 650).
1. Handle
2. Pusher
1, PTO Flywheel
787 Engine
Install O-ring onto crankshaft.
1. O-ring
717 and 787 Engine
Apply Loctite anti-seize lubricant (P/N 293 800 023)
to crankshaft threads.
Using the same tools as for disassembly proce-
dure, torque PTO flywheel to 110 Nm (81 lbfft).
947 Engine
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on bolt no. 22.
Using the same tools as for disassembly proce-
dure, torque bolt no. 22 to 115 Nm (85 lbfft).
Apply Loctite 648 on mating surface of PTO fly-
wheel and coupler.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) to Allen screws no. 21 of
coupler and torque to 23 Nm (17 lbfft).
F06D32A
1
2
F01D84A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-06-22
Final Assembly
717 and 787 Engines
For rotary valve timing and assembly procedures,
refer to ROTARY VALVE 04-07.
787 Engine
When engine assembly is completed, add 30 mL
(1oz) of motor oil SAE 30 to the counterbalance
shaft gear through the crankcase filler plug.
1. Remove plug and add SAE 30 motor oil
947 Engine
When engine assembly is completed, add 40 mL
(1.35 oz) of motor oil SAE 30 to the counterbal-
ance shaft gear through the crankcase filler plug.
1. Remove plug and add SAE 30 motor oil
F07D06A
1
F06D2CA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
Subsection 07 (ROTARY VALVE)
04-07-1
ROTARY VALVE 0
717 and 787 Engines
F01D7SS
8
2
20 Nm
(15 lbfft)
Lithium
grease
1
7
10
6
9
5
11
3
4
13
12
14
15
1
787 Engine
717 Engine
2
13
12
1
20 Nm
(15 lbfft)
12
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-2
GENERAL
The following verification procedures such as clear-
ance of rotary valve cover or rotary valve shaft
gear backlash can be performed without remov-
ing engine from watercraft.
However engine must be removed from water-
craft to work on rotary valve shaft/components.
Refer to REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 04-03
for engine removal procedure.
Bottom end must be opened to remove rotary
valve shaft. Refer to BOTTOM END 04-06.
INSPECTION ON WATERCRAFT
Remove carburetor(s). Refer to CARBURETOR
06-04.
1, Rotary Valve Cover
Unscrew 4 screws no. 2 and withdraw rotary
valve cover and valve no. 13.
Rotary Valve/Cover Clearance
The clearance between the rotary valve and the
cover must be 0.30 0.05 mm (.012 .002 in).
NOTE: If the clearance is below 0.25 mm (.010 in)
this could create an overheating situation and if
the clearance is over 0.35 mm (.014 in) this could
create a hard starting situation.
There is 2 methods to verify rotary valve/cover
clearance. One with a 45 feeler gauge, the other
one with a solder.
45 FEELER GAUGE METHOD
Remove O-ring from rotary valve cover.
Remove intake manifold from rotary valve cover
(except 787 engine).
Reinstall cover in place WITHOUT its O-ring and
torque screws to 20 Nm (15 lbfft).
Feeler gauge blade from 0.25 mm (.010 in) to
0.35 mm (.014 in) thickness should fit between
rotary valve and cover.
Insert feeler gauge blade through cover inlet ports
to verify clearance. At least verify clearance at two
different places in each port.
1. 45 feeler gauge
If rotary valve cover clearance is out of specifica-
tion, machine rotary valve cover seating surface
or replace the cover.
SOLDER METHOD
Remove O-ring from rotary valve cover.
Use the following type of solder:
rosin core
diameter: 0.8 mm (.032 in)
electronic application (available at electronic
stores)
Install 2 solder pieces of 13 mm (1/2 in) long di-
rectly on rotary valve, one above and one below
rotary valve gear. Apply grease to hold solder in
position.
Reinstall cover in place WITHOUT its O-ring and
torque screws to 20 Nm (15 lbfft).
Remove cover then clean and measure com-
pressed solder thickness, it must be within the spec-
ified tolerance 0.30 0.05 mm (.012 .002 in).
F01D53A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-3
TYPICAL
1. Solder
If rotary valve cover clearance is out of specifica-
tion, machine rotary valve cover seating surface
or replace the cover.
MACHINING INFORMATION
The amount of material over tolerance must be
removed from the rotary valve cover seating sur-
face.
Also cut the O-ring groove the same amount to
keep the 1.0 0.03 mm (.039 .001 in) depth be-
tween the bottom of the groove and the seating
surface.
Remove burrs on the edges of the seating surface
and O-ring groove.
SAME AMOUNT REMOVED FROM COVER SEATING SURFACE
AND O-RING GROOVE BASE
1. Cover seating surface
2. O-ring groove depth must be 1.0 0.03 mm (.039 .001 in)
Reverify the clearance.
At assembly the rotary valve timing must remain
as per original setting.
NOTE: If rotary valve crankcase surface is worn,
it is possible to have it reworked at the factory.
Contact your dealer or distributor.
Rotary Valve Shaft Gear Backlash
Remove PTO flywheel guard.
Remove spark plugs, rotary valve cover and valve.
Manually feel backlash at one position, then turn
crankshaft about 1/8 turn and recheck. Continue
this way to complete one revolution.
Backlash must be even at all positions. Otherwise
overhaul engine to find which part is faulty (gear,
rotary valve shaft or crankshaft with excessive de-
flection).
F01D3PA
1
1
2
F01D3OA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-4
DISASSEMBLY
3, Rotary Valve Shaft
To remove the rotary valve shaft assembly, first
remove snap ring no. 4 from crankcase.
1. Removing snap ring
To remove rotary valve shaft, use the appropriate
puller (P/N 290 876 488).
Place puller over rotary valve shaft end and screw
on puller bolt into shaft. While retaining bolt with
a wrench, turn puller nut CLOCKWISE until shaft
comes out.
1. Hold bolt
5,6, Circlip and Spring Seat
If it is necessary to disassemble components of
rotary valve shaft assembly, use seat to compress
spring and remove circlips.
1. Compress seat
2. Remove circlips
-
CAUTION
Bottom end must be opened to remove rota-
ry valve shaft.
F01D22A
1
F01D23B
F01D61A 1
F01D27A
F01D25A
1
2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-5
8, Bearing
To remove bearing use a bearing extractor such as
Snap-on no CJ-950 as illustrated. Slide off dis-
tance sleeve, remove snap ring no. 7 and press
shaft out.
1. Bearing
2. Bearing extractor Snap-on CJ-950
9, Bearing
1. Do not remove this plug
End bearing can be easily removed using the fol-
lowing suggested tool.
Snap-on hammer puller including:
Handle CJ93-1
Hammer CJ125-6
Claws CJ93-4
Close puller claws so that they can be inserted in
end bearing. Holding claws, turn puller shaft clock-
wise so that claws open and become firmly tight
against bearing.
Slide puller sleeve outwards and tap puller end.
Retighten claws as necessary to always maintain
them tight against bearing. Continue this way un-
til bearing completely comes out.
1. End bearing
CLEANING
Discard all seals and O-rings.
Clean oil passages and make sure they are not
clogged.
Clean rotary valve shaft and inside of distance
sleeve no. 14.
-
CAUTION
Ensure that rotary valve shaft is perfectly
perpendicular with press tip.
-
CAUTION
Do not remove plug against bearing in up-
per crankcase half.
F01D4NA
1
2
F01D4OA
1
F01J0ZA
F01D28A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-6
INSPECTION
Inspect rotary valve cover for warpage. Small de-
formation can be corrected by surfacing with fine
sand paper on a surface plate. Surface part against
oiled sand paper.
8,9, Bearing
Inspect bearings. Check for scoring, pitting, chip-
ping or other evidence of wear. Make sure plastic
cage (on bigger bearing) is not melted. Rotate
them and make sure they turn smoothly.
10, Gear
Visually check gear wear pattern. It should be even
on tooth length all around. Otherwise it could indi-
cate a bent shaft, check deflection. Replace gear
if damaged.
Check for presence of brass filings in gear hous-
ing.
Rotary Valve Shaft Deflection
Deflection is measured with a dial gauge. Install
rotary valve shaft in crankcase half, without its
gear.
NOTE: End bearing must be in crankcase half.
Measure shaft deflection next to gear splines.
1. Rotary valve shaft
2. End bearing in place
Deflection must not exceed 0.08 mm (.003 in).
Replace shaft as necessary.
ASSEMBLY
to the following.
9, Bearing
To install end bearing in crankcase, use the appro-
priate pusher according to the engine.
1. Pusher (P/N 290 876 500)
1. Pusher (P/N 290 876 501)
Position ball bearing shielded side towards rotary
valve.
F01D2CA
2
1
ENGINE PUSHER
717 P/N 290 876 500
787 P/N 290 876 501
A00B2JA
1
F00B07A
1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-7
1. Shield side (toward gear)
Push bearing until it stops on its seat.
1. Bearing
2. Pusher
11, Seal
Apply lithium grease on seal lips. Position seal
with shielded portion against shaft splines.
8, Bearing
Install ball bearing as illustrated.
1. Seal
2. Ball bearing
3. Bearing extractor Snap-on CJ-950
Install shim no. 15, snap ring no. 7 and slide dis-
tance sleeve no. 14 on shaft.
1. Seal
2. Ball bearing
3. Snap ring
4. Distance sleeve
5. Shim 0.5 mm (.020 in)
3, Rotary Valve Shaft Assembly
F01D2DA
1
F01D33A
1
2
-
CAUTION
Crankcase halves must be separated and
crankshaft must not be present to install ro-
tary valve shaft assembly in crankcase.
2
1
3
A13C0FB
1 2
3
4
6
5
F01D2FA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-8
717 Engine
To install rotary valve shaft in crankcase, use a
pusher (P/N 290 876 605).
1. Pusher
Push shaft until its stops on bearing seat.
2. Push shaft until it stops
787 Engine
To install rotary valve shaft in crankcase, use a
pusher (P/N 290 876 609) and handle (P/N 290
877 650).
1. Pusher
2. Handle
Push shaft until it stops on bearing seat.
717 and 787 Engines
4, Snap Ring
Position snap ring so that its sharp edge faces out-
wards.
13, Rotary Valve
The rotary valve controls the opening and closing
of the inlet ports. Therefore its efficiency will de-
pend on the precision of its installation.
IDENTIFICATION OF THE ROTARY VALVE
There is no identification code on the valve. To
find out the duration, place an angle finder on the
valve and measure the valve cut-out angle or use
the following template.
A00C0YA
1
F01D34A
1
2
F01B2FA
2
1
ENGINE
ROTARY VALVE
P/N
VALVE
DURATION
717/787 290 924 502 159
F01D8OA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-9
1. 159
ROTARY VALVE TIMING
The following tools are required to measure rotary
valve opening and closing angles in relation with
MAG side piston.
F01D73V
1
-
CAUTION
Never use the ridge molded in crankcase as
a timing mark.
360 350 340
330
320
3
1
0
3
0
0
2
9
0
2
8
0
2
7
0
2
6
0
2
5
0
2
4
0
2 3 0
2 2 0
2 1 0
2 0 0 1 9 0 1 8 0 1 7 0
1 6 0
1 5 0
1
4
0
1
3
0
1
2
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
50
40
30
20 10
10
20
30
40
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
0
9
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
0
1
3
0
1
4 0
1 5 0
1 6 0
1 7 0 1 8 0 1 9 0 2 0 0
2 1 0
2 2 0
2
3
0
2
4
0
2
5
0
2
6
0
2
7
0
2
8
0
2
9
0
3
0
0
3
1
0
320
330
340
350 360
F00B0DA
295 000 007
295 000 143
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-10
Rotary valve must be set so that timing occurs as
follows:
For the following instructions, lets use these
specifications as example:
OPENING: 147 BTDC
CLOSING: 65 ATDC
Proceed as follows:
Turning crankshaft, bring MAG side piston to
Top Dead Center using a TDC gauge.
1. Bring piston to TDC
For opening mark, first align 360 line of de-
gree wheel with BOTTOM of MAG side inlet
port. Then, find 147 line on degree wheel and
mark crankcase at this point.
OPENING MARK
Step : Bottom of MAG inlet port.
Align 360 line of degree wheel
Step : Find 147 on degree wheel and mark here
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft.
For closing mark, first align 360 line of degree
wheel with TOP of MAG side inlet port. Then,
find 65 line on degree wheel and mark crank-
case at this point.
CLOSING MARK
Step : Top of MAG inlet port.
Align 360 line of degree wheel
Step : Find 65 on degree wheel and mark here
ENGINE
TIMING
OPENING
BTDC
CLOSING
ATDC
717 147 5 65.5 5
787 147 5 63.5 5
1
F01D2IA
F01D3DC
147
2
1
1
2
F01D3EB
65
1
2
1
2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-07-11
Remove degree wheel.
Position rotary valve on shaft splines to have
edges as close as possible to these marks with
the MAG piston at TDC.
NOTE: Rotary valve is asymmetrical. Therefore,
try flipping it over then reinstall on splines to ob-
tain best installation position.
Apply BOMBARDIER-ROTAX injection oil on rota-
ry valve before reassembling rotary valve cover.
Remove TDC gauge.
Install O-ring no. 12 and cover then torque screws
no. 2 to 20 Nm (15 lbfft) in a criss-cross se-
quence.
Section 04 ENGINE
Subsection 08 (EXHAUST SYSTEM)
04-08-1
EXHAUST SYSTEM 0
SPX Model
F01D8XS
19
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
Loctite
242
19
20
6 25 Nm (18 lbfft)
Loctite
242
19
19
5
15
4
736
sealant
10 Nm
(88 lbfin) 10
9
Loctite 242
8
40 Nm
(30 lbfft) 7
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
9
Loctite
242
Loctite
648
17
13
14
Loctite
518
12
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
12
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
13 Synthetic
grease
16
2
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
732 sealant
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
18
18
3
1
11
Loctite 518
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-2
F00D0XS
17
Synthetic
grease
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
16
14
12
13
19
18
Loctite 242
Loctite 242
9
7
10
5
4
15
19
6
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
1
3
2
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
11
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
732
sealant
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
GS/GTS
GTI 4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
11
732
sealant
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
Loctite
242
8
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-3
F06D33S
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
2
23 Nm
(17 lbfft)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
1
3
5
15
4
736
sealant
14 Nm
(10 lbfft)
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
Loctite
242
Loctite
242
10
9
7
8
9
16
14
12-13
Loctite 271
19
18
19
20
Loctite 242
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
Loctite
242
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
19
18
19
6
11
732
sealant
Loctite
242
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
Loctite 242
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
FLAT RATE PARTS
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-4
REMOVAL
Tuned Pipe
SPX, GS and GSX Limited
Remove seat.
Remove air vent tube support from body opening.
XP Limited
Open engine cover.
Remove storage basket.
GTS, GTI and GTX Limited
Remove seat(s).
Remove seat support (GTI and GTX Limited).
Disconnect water supply hose and water injection
hose.
Disconnect tuned pipe bleed hose.
TYPICAL
1. Bleed hose removed
2. Injection hose removed
3. Supply hose removed
Loosen exhaust hose collar no. 1 at tuned pipe
outlet.
Disconnect strap no. 2 retaining muffler no. 11.
Remove exhaust hose no. 3 from tuned pipe by
pulling muffler.
Remove clamp no. 4 from tuned pipe.
Remove tuned pipe cone no. 5.
Remove tuned pipe retaining screw no. 6 from
exhaust manifold side.
Remove screws no. 7, nut no. 8 and flat washers
no. 9 from tuned pipe flange.
NOTE: Slightly lift tuned pipe to release nut as
necessary. Take care not drop nut and flat washer.
Withdraw tuned pipe head no. 10 in a forward and
rotating movement.
SPX Model
Remove electrical box from watercraft.
Disconnect water supply hose and water injection
hose at tuned pipe head.
1. Water supply hose
2. Water injection hose
Loosen exhaust hose collar no. 1 at tuned pipe
cone outlet.
Remove clamp no. 4 securing tuned pipe cone to
tuned pipe head.
Remove screws no. 7 and nut no. 8 with flat
washers no. 9 at tuned pipe head flange. F01D8NA
1
2
3
F01D3YA 2 1
F01D7IA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-5
Remove retaining screw no. 20 of tuned pipe
head.
1. Screw
Remove tuned pipe head no. 10.
Remove both screws no. 6 retaining tuned pipe
cone to engine.
Remove exhaust hose no. 3 from tuned pipe
cone no. 5.
Move tuned pipe cone no. 5 in front of bilge be-
tween body and fuel tank.
Open storage cover and remove basket. Then,
pull out tuned pipe cone no. 5 through storage
compartment opening.
Disconnect water supply hose at tuned pipe head
no. 10.
F01D76A 1
F01D7KA
F01D7LA
F01D7JA
1
F06E08A
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-6
Disconnect at the tuned pipe head no. 10 the wa-
ter supply hose of the water flow regulator valve.
1. Water supply hose for the regulator valve
Disconnect the water injection hose at tuned pipe
head no. 10.
1. Water injection hose
Disconnect the water bleed hose.
1. Water bleed hose
Loosen clamp no. 1 retaining exhaust hose no. 3
to tuned pipe cone no. 5.
1. Loosen clamp
1
F06E09A
1 F06E0AA
1 F06E0BA
1
F06D14A
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-7
Loosen and remove clamp no. 4 retaining tuned
pipe head no. 10 to tuned pipe cone no. 5.
1. Loosen and remove clamp
Loosen Allen screw of carburetor bracket.
1. Loosen Allen screw
Loosen Allen screws no. 7 and nut no. 8 at tuned
pipe flange.
NOTE: To loosen nut, use polygonal key (P/N 529
035 505).
1. Tuned pipe flange
Loosen bolt no. 20 of tuned pipe head above the
engine magneto.
1. Remove bolt
Remove tuned pipe head no. 10.
1
F06D1SA
F06D2DA 1
1
F06D1TA
F06D1UA 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-8
Loosen bolt no. 6 of tuned pipe cone beside the
engine water return hose.
1. Loosen bolt
Remove tuned pipe cone no. 5.
Exhaust Manifold
SPX Model
Remove air intake silencer and carburetors. Refer
to AIR INTAKE 06-03 and CARBURETOR 06-04
for proper procedures.
All Models
Remove 8 Allen screws no. 12 and lock washers
no. 13 then withdraw exhaust manifold.
Muffler
Disconnect hoses from muffler no. 11.
Disconnect hoses of the water flow regulator
valve (except 717 engine).
Disconnect retaining strap no. 2 of muffler.
Pull muffler no. 11 out of bilge.
NOTE: On the GSX Limited and the XP Limited,
remove the VTS motor. Refer to VARIABLE TRIM
SYSTEM 09-05.
TUNED PIPE REPAIR
This procedure is given to repair tuned pipe cracks
using T.I.G. welding process.
Procedure
Sand the cracked area to obtain bare metal.
Perform a 1.50 mm (1/16 in) depth chamfer
over crack.
Use pure argon gas with 5.55 mm (3/32 in)
tungsten electrode (puretung green, zirtung
brown) and AC current.
Use a 5.55 mm (3/32 in) aluminum welding rod
(no. 4043), to fill crack.
Sand welding slightly to remove material sur-
plus.
Test
Use compressed air at 124 kPa (18 PSI) to pres-
surize tuned pipe.
NOTE: Prior to verify leaks, plug all holes and
pressurize tuned pipe while immerging it in water.
INSTALLATION
Installation is essentially the reverse of removal
procedures. However, pay particular attention to
the following.
Exhaust Manifold
Make sure gasket(s) no. 17 are properly posi-
tioned prior to finalizing manifold installation.
1
F06D1VA
-
CAUTION
Always ensure water passages are not blocked
partially or completely while welding tuned
pipe.
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-9
717 Engine
Apply synthetic grease on threads of screws
no. 12.
Install exhaust manifold no. 14 and torque screws
no. 12 to 24 Nm (17 lbfft) as per following illus-
trated sequence.
787 Engine
Apply Loctite 518 on 2 screws no. 12. On the oth-
er screws no. 12, apply synthetic grease on
threads. Install screws. Refer to the following il-
lustration for proper position of screws.
1. Screw with Loctite 518
2. Screw with synthetic grease
Torque exhaust manifold screws to 24 Nm
(17 lbfft) as per following illustrated sequence.
Repeat the procedure, retightening screws to 40
Nm (30 lbfft).
947 Engine
Apply synthetic grease on threads of Allen screws
no. 12.
Install and hand tighten Allen screws no. 12 as
per following picture.
1. M10 x 60 Allen screws
2. M10 x 110 Allen screws
F01D59A
1 3
5
8
2
4
7
6
F01D82B
2
2 2
1 2 1
F01D82A
3
1
7 6
4
8
2
5
F06D1YA 1 2 1
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-10
Torque Allen screws to 24 Nm (17 lbfft) as per fol-
lowing illustrated sequence. Repeat the procedure,
retightening Allen screws to 40 Nm (30 lbfft).
Tuned Pipe
787 and 947 Engines
Make sure to install the sealing ring no. 15 on
tuned pipe cone if it was removed.
TYPICAL
1. Sealing ring
Apply a thin layer of heat resistant 736 sealant
(P/N 413 709 200) all around sealing ring no. 15.
All Models
Ensure rubber bushings no. 19 and sleeve no. 18
are not damaged and are properly installed into
tune pipe support(s).
Make sure that gasket no. 16 is properly located
on exhaust manifold prior to finalizing pipe instal-
lation.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on nut no. 8 and screws
no. 6 and no. 7.
Hand tighten all fasteners before torquing any of
them.
For torquing specifications, see the main illustra-
tions at the beginning of this subsection.
717 Engine
Install tuned pipe cone no. 5 with collar no. 15
and clamp no. 4.
Position clamp no. 4 as illustrated. Do not tighten
clamp yet.
1. Clamp
2. Exhaust collar
With hose removed, align cone outlet with muf-
fler inlet.
NOTE: Due to exhaust cone angle, it may have to
be rotated to obtain alignment.
F06D1YB
8 2 3 6
7 4 1 5
F01D69A
1
-
CAUTION
Damage to bushings and/or sleeve will even-
tually cause stress to tune pipe and may
cause cracking.
F01D41A
1
2
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-11
Push cone no. 5 until it touches tuned pipe, then
tighten exhaust clamp no. 4 and torque to 10 Nm
(88 lbfin).
NOTE: Exhaust clamp nuts should be tightened
alternately to assure no leakage and to obtain
specified torque.
947 Engine
Torquing Sequence
Torque Allen screws no. 7 at tuned pipe head
flange to 25 Nm (18 lbfft).
NOTE: Torque nut no. 8 only to 18 Nm (13 lbfft)
using the polygonal key (P/N 529 035 505).
1. Torque Allen screws and nut to 25 Nm (18 lbfft)
Torque bolt of tuned pipe head above the engine
magneto to 25 Nm (18 lbfft).
1. Torque bolt to 25 Nm (18 lbfft)
Torque bolt of tuned pipe cone beside the engine
water return hose to 25 Nm (18 lbfft).
1. Torque bolt to 25 Nm (18 lbfft)
-
CAUTION
There must be no gap between tuned pipe
cone and tuned pipe head.
1
F06D1TA
F06D1UA 1
1
F06D1VA
Section 04 ENGINE
04-08-12
Torque clamp of tuned pipe head to 14 Nm
(10 lbfft).
1. Torque clamp to 14 Nm (10 lbfft)
As a final step, torque Allen screws at tuned pipe
head flange to 40 Nm (30 lbfft).
NOTE: Torque nut only to 28 Nm (21 lbfft) using
the polygonal key (P/N 529 035 505). The nut will
be at the same torque as the screws.
1. Torque Allen screws and nut to 40 Nm (30 lbfft)
Torque exhaust hose clamp no. 1 of tuned pipe
cone to 4 Nm (35 lbfin).
1. Torque clamp to 4 Nm (35 lbfin)
1
F06D1SA
1
F06D1TA
1
F06D14A
05-01-1
Section 05 COOLING SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
CIRCUIT, COMPONENTS AND CARE................................................................................... 05-02-1
CIRCUIT.............................................................................................................................. 05-02-5
COMPONENTS.................................................................................................................. 05-02-9
CARE .................................................................................................................................. 05-02-13
GTX RFI
Subsection 02 (CIRCUIT, COMPONENTS AND CARE)
05-02-1
CIRCUIT, COMPONENTS AND CARE 0
SPX Model
0.6 Nm
(5 lbfin)
Engine water
supply hose
F01E2AS
Loctite 592
Bleed hose
Cooling System
Indicator (CSI)
2
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
Engine
water return
hose
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1
Loctite 592
Regulator
valve water
supply hose
Loctite 592
Water
injection
hose
Engine
drain hose
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Loctite 592
3
Tuned pipe
water inlet
hose
0.11 Nm
(1 lbfin)
5
6
9
10
8
7
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite 592
Loctite 592
1
Loctite 592
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
To exhaust
outlet
FLAT RATE PARTS
05-02-2
GS and GTI Models
F06E0GS
Loctite 592
3
Loctite
592
Bleed
hose
Loctite
592
Water
injection
hose
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Tuned pipe water
inlet hose
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Engine
water outlet
hose
Loctite
592
Engine
drain
hose
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Cooling System
Indicator (CSI)
Loctite 592
To exhaust
outlet
Engine water
supply hose
FLAT RATE PARTS
05-02-3
GTS Model
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
F02E07S
Loctite
592
3
Loctite
592
Loctite
592
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Loctite
592
Loctite
592
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
2
1
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
Bleed
hose
Water
injection
hose
Tuned pipe
water inlet
hose
Engine water
supply hose
Engine
drain hose
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Cooling System
Indicator (CSI)
Engine water
return hose
To exhaust
outlet
1
FLAT RATE PARTS
05-02-4
F06E0HS
Loctite
592
3
Loctite
592
Loctite
592
Bleed hose
Cooling System Indicator
(CSI)
Loctite
592
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Engine
drain
hose
Engine
water return
hose
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Loctite 592
1
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Loctite
592
Engine water
supply hose
Regulator valve water
supply hose
1
Loctite 592
Water
injection
hose
0.11 Nm
(1 lbfin)
0.6 Nm
(5 lbfin)
8
5
6
9
10
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
7
Loctite
592
FLAT RATE PARTS
05-02-5
CIRCUIT
717 and 787 Engines
A Serial Cooling System is utilized on the 717 and
787 engines, which offers an efficient cooling of
the combustion chamber to prevent the possibili-
ties of detonation.
The water supply is taken from a pressurized area
in the jet pump between the impeller and venturi.
Water enters the cylinder head, cooling the com-
bustion chamber to prevent detonations. Then,
water exits cylinder head toward tuned pipe.
1. Cylinder head cover
2. Fresh water from jet pump
3. Water exiting head assembly to tuned pipe, exhaust manifold and
cylinders
4. Water from cylinder water jackets exiting engine
The tuned pipe and exhaust manifold are de-
signed with a double wall to allow water circula-
tion.
Water is pre-heated by the exhaust system before
entering the cylinder cooling jackets.
Water enters cylinder cooling jacket through pas-
sages located below exhaust ports from tuned
pipe.
1. Water passages
No water enters crankcase.
When engine is running, water must flow from
bleed outlet indicating that water circulates.
For a minimum back pressure in the exhaust, en-
gine water outlet hose is not connected to the ex-
haust. It has its own outlet at the rear of the hull.
TYPICAL
1. Engine water outlet hose
-
CAUTION
All hoses and fittings of the cooling system
have calibrated inside diameters to assure
proper cooling of the engine. Always replace
using appropriate Bombardier part number.
F01E1LA
2 3
1 4
-
CAUTION
When investigating for no water flow in the
cooling system, check all elbows and straight
fittings as well as all hoses for blockage.
F01D7HB
1
F01E1GA 1
05-02-6
Draining of the cooling system is accomplished by
a drain hose located at the lowest point of the cir-
cuit.
717 ENGINE
1. Drain hose
787 ENGINE
1. Drain hose
947 Engine
The 947 engine has a conventional cooling sys-
tem. The water is pre-heated in the tuned pipe wa-
ter jacket before entering the engine or cylinder
head.
As with other models, the water supply is provid-
ed by a pressurized area in the jet pump between
the impeller and venturi.
Water is directed to the water jacket of the tuned
pipe head.
Water circulates in the jackets of the tuned pipe
head and the exhaust manifold. It is consequently
pre-heated by the exhaust system.
Then, water enters the cylinder-block water jack-
ets through passages located above and below
exhaust ports.
1. Water passages
F01E0FB 1
F01E1MA
1
1
F06E08A
F06D20A
1
05-02-7
After water has circulated in the cylinder-block
water jackets, it is directed in the 1 piece cylinder
head which features improved combustion cham-
ber and spark plug cooling.
Water exits cylinder head water jackets through
an outlet fitting.
1. Engine water outlet
Water circulates in the water outlet hose and is
expelled out of the cooling system through a fit-
ting located in the jet pump support on the tran-
som of the watercraft.
Draining of the cooling system is accomplished by
the drain hose connected to a fitting at the bottom
of the cylinder-block, on tuned pipe side.
1. Drain hose
Bleeding of the cooling system is accomplished
by the bleed hose located at the uppermost point
of the circuit at the tuned pipe. The bleed hose
also serves as the Cooling System Indicator (CSI).
1. Bleed hose
The water supply of the water flow regulator is
provided by the water jacket of the tuned pipe
head.
F06D21A
F06E05A
1
F06E0IA 1
1 F06E0BA
05-02-8
1. Water supply of the water flow regulator valve
The lower hose of the valve is the water supply
and the upper hose is the regulated injection wa-
ter for the tuned pipe.
1. Water supply from tuned pipe water jacket
2. Regulated injection water to the tuned pipe
3. Muffler
Regulated water is injected in the tuned pipe by a
calibrated fitting.
1. Injection fitting
All Models
1
F06E09A
F06E0CA
2
1
3
-
CAUTION
Never modify cooling system arrangement,
otherwise serious engine damage could occur.
TECHNICAL DATA
TYPE:
TLCS (Total Loss Cooling System).
COOLANT FLOW:
Pressure build-up at impeller housing
(no water pump).
TEMPERATURE CONTROL:
Calibrated outlet fittings (no thermostat).
SYSTEM BLEEDING:
Self-bleed type (hose at uppermost point of circuit).
SYSTEM DRAINING:
Self-drain type (hose at lowest point of circuit).
SYSTEM FLUSHING:
Fitting spigot or hose adapter.
MONITORING BEEPER:
Turns on at 86-94C (187-201F).
1 F06E0AA
05-02-9
COMPONENTS
1, Clamp
To cut or secure non-reusable Oetiker clamps of
cooling system hoses, use pliers (P/N 295 000
070).
1. Cutting clamp
2. Securing clamp
2, Fitting Spigot
The fitting spigot is used on some models to flush
cooling system. Refer to FLUSHING AND LUBRI-
CATION 02-03.
3, Elbow Fitting
Water injection used on exhaust system cools the
exhaust gases to obtain maximum performance
from the tuned pipe. The elbow fitting has a cali-
brated inside diameter to optimize water flow in
tuned pipe.
The water injection also helps in reducing noise
level and cools components of the exhaust sys-
tem.
The elbow fitting can be identified by using the
number stamped onto the fitting or by measuring
its inside diameter. Refer to the following illustra-
tion and chart.
1. Outlet diameter = 4.6 mm (.181 in)
2. Stamped number
3. Inlet diameter = 5.5 mm (.219 in)
4, Water Flow Regulator Valve
A water flow regulator valve is mounted on mod-
els with the 787 and 947 engines so that they can
produce the maximum horsepower output and
yet maintain the necessary diameter of the injec-
tion fitting at the tuned pipe head for unobstruct-
ed water flow.
1
F01B2KA
2
-
CAUTION
The elbow fittings are calibrated and can not
be interchanged with one of a different size
as severe engine damage could result.
Stamped
Number
on Fitting
Fitting
P/N
Inlet
Diameter
Outlet
Diameter
16 293 700 016
5.5 mm
(.219 in)
4.6 mm
(.181 in)
48 293 710 048
4.0 mm
(.157 in)
3.5 mm
(.139 in)
16
1
2
3
F00E04A
05-02-10
The water flow regulator valve is mounted directly
onto the muffler.
SPX MODEL
1. Water supply hose of regulator valve
2. Regulated water to injection fitting
3. Water injected into the muffler
GSX LIMITED, XP LIMITED AND GTX LIMITED
1. Water supply from tuned pipe water jacket
2. Regulated water to injection fitting
3. Water injected into the muffler
NOTE: The water injected into the muffler is not
regulated by the valve. A calibrated water injec-
tion fitting of 3.0 mm (.118 in) inside diameter lim-
its water flow into the muffler.
The water flow regulator valve has a calibrated
spring and a tapered needle which regulate the
injected water in the tuned pipe.
At low speed, water pressure in the supply hose
of the regulator valve is not sufficient to overcome
the spring of the regulator valve; more water is
being delivered to the injection fitting at the tuned
pipe.
LOW SPEED OPERATION
1. Water entering regulator valve
2. Water exiting regulator valve (less restriction)
3. Water injected in the muffler
At higher speed, water pressure increases in the
supply hose of the regulator valve and gradually
overcomes the return spring of the regulator
valve. Less water is being delivered to the injec-
tion fitting at the tuned pipe.
F01E1FA
1 2 3
1 F06D1WB 2 3
-
CAUTION
Do not change the calibration of the spring,
otherwise serious engine damage can occur.
1
F01E2BA
3
2
05-02-11
HIGH SPEED OPERATION
1. Water entering regulator valve
2. Water exiting regulator valve (more restriction)
3. Water injected in the muffler
Adjustment
The water flow regulator valve has been calibrat-
ed at the factory and should not be modified.
NOTE: Water flow regulator valves ordered from
the parts channel are also calibrated.
If the maximum engine speed cannot be attained
or if the engine has poor performance, the water
flow regulator valve should be considered in the
troubleshooting of the problem.
Disassembly
the spring no. 5.
1. Spring
2. Cover
Remove fitting no. 7 from valve housing.
1. Fitting
Unscrew the tapered needle no. 8.
NOTE: Hold the valve to prevent it from turning.
N
WARNING
Firmly hold cover to valve base. The spring in-
side the valve is applying a pressure against
the cover.
1
F01E2CA
3
2
F01E1RA
1
2
F01E1SA
1
05-02-12
1. Tapered needle
Remove the tapered needle from valve housing.
1. Remove tapered needle
Pull the valve slightly. Using pliers, release the
clamp which retains the bellows no. 10.
Remove valve no. 9 and bellows no. 10.
Loosen clamp to separate valve from bellows.
1. Clamp
Inspection
Inspect parts for damage. Verify especially bel-
lows for cracks.
Assembly
bly procedures.
F01E1TA
1
F01E20A
1
F01E21A
F01E24A 1
05-02-13
CARE
For flushing purposes, the cooling system is equip-
ped with either a fitting spigot or a hose adapter
depending upon the model.
For flushing operation, a coupler hose is available
(unnecessary for models with the hose adapter)
to connect to the fitting spigot. A garden hose is
used to flush the whole system by backwash. For
flushing procedure, refer to FLUSHING AND LU-
BRICATION 02-03.
For winterization of cooling system, refer to STOR-
AGE 02-05.
SPX, GS, GTS and GTI Models
When servicing the hull, always rotate watercraft
counterclockwise (seen from the rear). Rotating
watercraft on the opposite side could allow resid-
ual water in tuned pipe to enter the engine and
cause damage.
When servicing the hull, always rotate watercraft
clockwise (seen from the rear). Rotating water-
craft on the opposite side could allow residual wa-
ter in tuned pipe to enter the engine and cause
damage.
TYPICAL
Towing the Watercraft in Water
Special precautions should be taken when towing
a Sea-Doo watercraft in water.
Maximum recommended towing speed is 24
km/h (15 MPH).
When towing your watercraft in water, pinch the
water supply hose from the jet pump housing to
the engine with a large Hose Pincher (P/N 529 030
400).
F01L45C
Max. 90
max. 90
F06L0GA
F01B23A
05-02-14
This will prevent the cooling system from filling
which may lead to water being injected into and
filling the exhaust system. Without the engine
running there isnt any exhaust pressure to carry
the water out the exhaust outlet.
Snugly install the hose pincher on the water sup-
ply hose as shown in the following illustrations.
GS, GTS AND GTI MODELS
1. Hose pincher
SPX MODEL
1. Hose pincher
XP LIMITED
1. Hose pincher
GSX LIMITED AND GTX LIMITED
1. Hose pincher
-
CAUTION
Failure to do this may result in damage to
the engine. If you must tow a stranded wa-
tercraft in water and do not have a hose
pincher be sure to stay well below the max-
imum towing speed of 24 km/h (15 MPH).
F02E04A 1
F01E29A
1
-
CAUTION
When finished towing the watercraft, the
hose pincher must be removed before oper-
ating it.
F08E01A 1
F07E03A 1
06-01-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
FUEL CIRCUIT........................................................................................................................ 06-02-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 06-02-6
REMOVAL........................................................................................................................... 06-02-6
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 06-02-10
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 06-02-11
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURIZATION................................................................................... 06-02-11
AIR INTAKE............................................................................................................................ 06-03-1
REMOVAL........................................................................................................................... 06-03-3
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 06-03-4
CARBURETOR ....................................................................................................................... 06-04-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 06-04-2
REMOVAL........................................................................................................................... 06-04-2
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 06-04-3
DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION................................................................................... 06-04-3
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 06-04-5
INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................. 06-04-8
ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................................................ 06-04-8
GTX RFI
Subsection 02 (FUEL CIRCUIT)
06-02-1
FUEL CIRCUIT 0
SPX Model
F01F2ZS
3
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
1
2
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
7
6
1 Nm
(9 lbfin)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
10
12
11
5
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
4
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
4
13
8
9
Engine
Body
FLAT RATE PARTS
06-02-2
GS and GTI Models
F06F0MS
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
3
1
2
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
7
6
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
5
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
Dielectric
grease
4
9
8
10
11
12
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Engine
Body
4
14
13
FLAT RATE PARTS
06-02-3
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
3
1
2
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
7
6
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
5
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
Dielectric
grease
4
14
9
8
10
11
12
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Engine
Body
4
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
13
F06F0NS
FLAT RATE PARTS
06-02-4
XP Limited
F08F04S
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
7
6
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
Synthetic
grease
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
4
5
4
13
2
1
3
9
8
10
13
11
12
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Synthetic
grease
14
Engine
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
06-02-5
GTS Model
F02F1RS
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
1
2
3
7
6
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
Engine
Dielectric
grease
14
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
9
8
10
11
12
4
5
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
13
4
FLAT RATE PARTS
06-02-6
GENERAL
To secure or cut Oetiker clamps on fuel lines, use
pliers (P/N 295 000 070).
1. Cutting clamp
1. Securing clamp
1. Securing clamp in limited access
When replacing fuel lines on SEA-DOO water-
craft, be sure to use B1 hoses as available from
Bombardier parts department. This will ensure
continued proper and safe operation.
REMOVAL
1, Fuel Filter
Open storage compartment cover.
Remove basket.
XP Limited
Open engine cover and remove basket.
GTS Model
Press on vent tube upper part to enable to with-
draw tube from body.
N
WARNING
Whenever repairing the fuel system, always
verify for water infiltration in reservoir. Re-
place any damaged, leaking or deteriorated
fuel lines.
F01B03A
1
F01B04A
1
N
WARNING
Use of improper fuel lines could compromise
fuel system integrity.
F01B05A
1
06-02-7
TYPICAL
1. Press on vent tube
All Models
Turn the fuel valve to OFF position.
Unscrew fuel filler cap to remove any fuel pres-
sure in system.
Unscrew the fuel filter bowl no. 2 counterclock-
wise then pull toward the bottom.
TYPICAL
Step : Loosen counterclockwise
Step : Pull
Pull fuel filter no. 1 toward the bottom.
TYPICAL
8, Fuel Baffle Pick Up
NOTE: The baffle pick up has an integrated fuel
sender for the fuel gauge.
1. Pick up tube
2. Fuel sensor
3. Baffle pick up
Disconnect BLACK negative cable, then RED pos-
itive cable of battery.
N
WARNING
The engine must not be running and fuel
valve must be set to OFF position. Gasoline
is flammable and explosive under certain
conditions. Always work in a well ventilated
area.
F02L1MA
1
F01F01A
2
1
1
2
N
WARNING
Always disconnect battery cables exactly in
the specified order, BLACK negative cable
first.
F01F04A
F01F20A
1
2
3
06-02-8
Empty fuel tank.
SPX Model
Remove storage basket from watercraft.
Siphon fuel tank.
Loosen clamp no. 4 and disconnect fuel filler hose
no. 5.
1. Disconnect fuel filler hose
Disconnect fuel sender of baffle pick up.
Loosen lower clamp no. 10 and remove fuel baf-
fle pick up.
1. Remove fuel baffle pick up
GTS Model
Siphon fuel tank.
Remove vent tube.
1. Remove vent tube
Disconnect fuel filler hose no. 5 from fuel tank.
1. Disconnect fuel filler hose
Loosen lock nut and remove fuel filter from re-
verse system support.
N
WARNING
Fuel is flammable and explosive under cer-
tain conditions. Always work in a well venti-
lated area. Always wipe off any fuel spillage
from the watercraft.
F01F3DA
1
F01F3EA
1
F02L14A
1
F02F1MA
1
06-02-9
1. Remove fuel filter
Disconnect the fuel lines from baffle pick up and
loosen lower clamp no. 10.
NOTE: Identify fuel line positions to ease reas-
sembly.
1. Disconnect fuel hoses
2. Loosen lower clamp
Disconnect the middle and front fuel tank straps
no. 13.
1. Front fuel tank strap
2. Middle fuel tank strap
From the engine compartment, disconnect the
strap retaining the oil injection reservoir and fuel
tank.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the oil injec-
tion reservoir.
Move fuel tank forward until the fuel baffle pick up
can be removed from the storage compartment
opening.
GS and GSX Limited
Siphon fuel tank.
Remove steering assembly. Refer to STEERING
SYSTEM for procedure.
GTI and GTX Limited
Syphon fuel tank.
Remove glove box.
XP Limited
Tilt seat. Refer to HULL/BODY for procedure.
Remove access plug on body.
Syphon fuel tank.
F02F1NA
1
F02F1OA
1
2
F02F1PA 1
2
06-02-10
GS, GSX Limited, GTI and GTX Limited
Disconnect fuel lines from baffle pick up and loos-
en lower clamp no. 10.
TYPICAL
1. Disconnect fuel hoses
2. Loosen lower clamp
Disconnect wiring harness of fuel sender.
Remove baffle from fuel tank.
All Models
Remove upper clamp no. 12 from adapter no. 11
and slide adapter from baffle.
Push inward on the 3 clips at the base of the baf-
fle in order to remove the filter. Pry base off using
a small slotted screwdriver (if necessary).
INSPECTION
1, Fuel Filter
Inspect fuel filter condition. Carefully use low
pressure compressed air to clean fuel filter. Re-
place filter if permanently clogged or damaged.
2, Fuel Filter Bowl
Check filter bowl for water contamination.
3, Gasket
Inspect gasket condition. Make sure gasket is
well positioned into the filter bowl no. 2.
1. Gasket in bowl
5, Fuel Filler Hose
Verify fuel filler hose for damage. Always ensure
that clamps no. 4 are well positioned and tight-
ened. Torque clamps to 4 Nm (35 lbfin).
6, Pressure Relief Valve
This valve will eliminate fuel spillage when the
watercraft is upside down. If pressure is built up
in fuel system the valve should open at 10 kPa
(1.5 PSI) to release the pressure.
NOTE: It is a one-way valve with an arrow to indi-
cate the air flow.
7, Check Valve
Black side of the one-way check valve is the valve
outlet. It allows air to get in reservoir.
F02F1OA
1
2
N
WARNING
Ensure that there is no leakage from the fuel
filter.
N
WARNING
If pressure relief valve is stuck, the pressure
in fuel system will build up and it may cause
fuel leakage in engine compartment.
F01F02A
1
06-02-11
9, Baffle Pick Up Filter
Inspect filter no. 9 of baffle pick up. Clean or re-
place as necessary.
14, Fuel Tank
Visually inspect the inside and outside of the fuel
tank necks for crack(s). If crack(s) are existing, re-
place fuel tank.
Check with your finger to feel the inside and out-
side surfaces of fuel tank. Flex fuel tank necks to
ensure there are no hidden cracks.
1. Tank upper surface
2. Inspect outside, above upper surface
3. Normal molding seam
4. Inspect inside, above upper surface
5. Base of the neck
A. Approx. 4mm (5/32 in)
NOTE: A fuel tank is comprised of 3 components:
the tank, the fuel pick up neck and the filler neck.
The necks are injection molded and the tank is
then blow molded over the necks. During the
molding process, a small molding seam may ap-
pear on the inner side of the necks at approxi-
mately 4 mm (5/32 in) from the base of the neck.
It is a normal situation to have a molding seam
and it should not be confused with a crack.
ASSEMBLY
to the following.
8, Baffle Pick Up
Slide adapter no. 11 onto baffle pick up no. 8 until
it stops on rib. Install clamp no. 12.
Install baffle pick up no. 8 into fuel tank and
push it until it sits on fuel tank neck. Install clamp
no. 10 and torque both clamps to 3 Nm (27 lbfin).
GTS Model Only
Insert vent tube in body and clip it in place.
1. Install vent tube
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURIZATION
Pressure Test
Proceed as follows:
Fill up fuel tank.
Disconnect air inlet hose of fuel tank from body.
Install a hose pincher (P/N 295 000 076) on fuel
tank vent hose.
F07F06A
4 2
1
A 3 5
N
WARNING
Vent tube must be in place to provide proper
bilge ventilation.
N
WARNING
Whenever doing any type of repair on water-
craft or if any components of the fuel system
are disconnected, a pressure test must be
done before starting engine. Ensure to verify
fuel line ends for damage. Always cut dam-
aged end before reinstallation.
F02L14A
1
06-02-12
TYPICAL
1. Disconnect air inlet hose
2. Install a hose pincher to vent hose
Connect pump gauge tester (P/N 295 021 800)
to air inlet hose.
NOTE: This pump is included in the ENGINE LEAK
TESTER KIT (P/N 295 500 352).
Turn fuel valve to OFF position and pressurize
fuel system to 34 kPa (5 PSI). If no leaks are
found, turn fuel valve to ON position and pres-
surize once more.
If pressure is not maintained locate leak and re-
pair/replace component leaking. To ease leak
search spray a solution of soapy water on com-
ponents, bubbles will indicate leak location.
NOTE: The system must maintain a pressure of
34 kPa (5 PSI) during 10 minutes. Never pressur-
ize over 34 kPa (5 PSI).
Reconnect air inlet hose of fuel tank to body.
NOTE: Before removing the hose pincher, block
with your finger the outlet fitting to feel if air is
coming out when removing hose pincher. This will
indicate that pressure relief valve and the outlet
fitting are not blocked.
Remove hose pincher from fuel tank vent hose.
N
WARNING
If any leak is found, do not start the engine
and wipe off any fuel leakage. Do not use
electric powered tools on watercraft unless
system has passed pressure test.
R
E
S
O
U
T
F01F0KA
2
1
Subsection 03 (AIR INTAKE)
06-03-1
AIR INTAKE 0
F00F0DS
1
9
4
8
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
8
Loctite
242
Loctite
242
6
Loctite
242
2
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
5
SPX
10
7
Loctite 518
3
GS/GTS/GTI
Loctite 518
7
Loctite 242
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
06-03-2
F06F0DS
4
Loctite 242
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
2
Super Lube
grease
24 Nm
(17 lbfft)
Loctite
242
3
Loctite 242
FLAT RATE PARTS
06-03-3
REMOVAL
1, Air Intake Silencer Cover
Unlock the 6 retaining slides holding air intake si-
lencer cover and remove cover.
TYPICAL
1. Air intake silencer cover
2. Unlock
4, Air Intake Silencer Base
Remove screws no. 2 of retaining plate no. 3.
Pull out retaining plate no. 3 and air intake silencer
base no. 4.
1. Retaining plate
2. Remove screws
7, Flame Arrester Base
Remove flame arrester no. 5.
Remove screws no. 8 retaining support no. 6 of
flame arrester base to the cylinder head cover
(717 engine) or to the exhaust manifold (787 en-
gine).
1. Remove support
Remove screws no. 10 from flame arrester base
then withdraw base.
1, Air Intake Silencer
Remove the air vent tube support from body
opening (GSX Limited).
Remove seat support (GTX Limited).
Unlock the clip no. 2 on top of air intake silencer.
1. Clip
F01F2OA
1 2
F00F02A
1
2
F00F03A 1
F06D34A 1
06-03-4
Push the air intake silencer out of the carburetor
adapter no. 3.
Pull the air intake silencer rearward to remove it
from the lower bracket no. 4 and remove it in a
rotating movement.
The air intake silencer is a molded piece and it can
not be opened. It has an integrated flame arrester.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is essentially the reverse of removal
procedures. However pay particular attention to
the following.
7, Flame Arrester Base
Apply Loctite 518 on mating surfaces of flame ar-
rester base.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on screws no. 10 and
5, Flame Arrester
Inspect condition of flame arrester. Replace or
clean as necessary.
SPX Model
Position the flame arrester with its embossment
toward TOP.
9, Gasket
Inspect condition of gasket. Make sure to proper-
ly installed gasket.
1, Air Intake Silencer
Apply Super Lube grease (P/N 293 550 014) to
mating surface of air intake silencer.
Make sure the air intake silencer is retained by the
lower bracket no. 4.
-
CAUTION
Do not modify air intake system, otherwise
calibration will be affected.
N
WARNING
Do not operate watercraft without flame ar-
rester.
F00F04A
Subsection 04 (CARBURETOR)
06-04-1
CARBURETOR 0
Mikuni BN-38I, BN-40I and BN-46I
F06F0ES
Loctite
242
12
3
6
14
13
7
Loctite 242
15
4
19
5
18
17
16
20
21
Synthetic
grease
2
13
1
8
9
11
Loctite
577
20
21
20 Nm
(15 lbfft)
Anti-seize lubricant
10
FLAT RATE PARTS
06-04-2
GENERAL
The following illustration shows which part of the
carburetor begins to function at different throttle
plate openings.
VIEW FROM AIR INTAKE OPENING
1. Throttle plate openings
2. Throttle plate closed
3. Throttle plate wide opened
4. Low-speed screw
5. Pilot jet
6. Main jet and high-speed screw
The carburetor(s) is (are) equipped with a fuel ac-
celerator pump.
The fuel accelerator pump is linked to the throttle
valve via a linkage.
A metering jet in the fuel inlet hose controls fuel
flow to the pump.
A check valve no. 21 on the fuel outlet hose helps
to prime the system.
REMOVAL
To remove carburetor(s) from engine, proceed as
follows:
Remove air vent tube support (SPX, GSI and GSX
Limited.
Remove air intake silencer. Refer to AIR INTAKE
06-03.
Turn fuel valve to OFF position.
Disconnect pulse line.
TYPICAL
1. Pulse line
2. Loosen gear clamp
Disconnect fuel supply line from fuel pump.
Disconnect fuel return line.
Disconnect oil injection pump cable, throttle cable
and choke cable.
Remove screws no. 20 and lock washers no. 21
retaining carburetor(s).
TYPICAL
1. Screw
Remove carburetor(s).
1
F01F13A
2
3
4
5
6
F06F0LA
1
2
F07F03A
1 1
1 1
06-04-3
CLEANING
The carburetor exterior surfaces should be cleaned
with a general solvent and dried with compressed
air before disassembly.
Carburetor body and jets should be cleaned with
a carburetor cleaner. Follow manufacturers in-
structions.
Inspect O-rings, diaphragms and gaskets.
DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION
Inspect parts for corrosion damage (shaft, throttle
plate, spring, screw, check valve housing, etc.).
1, Needle Valve
Inspect needle valve tip for a grooved condition. If
worn, needle and seat must be replaced as a
matched set.
2, Low Speed Screw
Check tip for a grooved condition. Replace if nec-
essary.
3, Diaphragm
PUMP DIAPHRAGM LEAK TEST
Using a suitable pump gauge tester, perform the
following test proceeding as follows:
Install pump gauge tester (P/N 295 000 114) on
pulse nipple.
Pump tester until it reaches 28 kPa (4 PSI).
TYPICAL
1. Pump gauge tester
2. Install on pulse nipple
Diaphragm must stand pressure for 10 seconds.
If pressure drops, replace diaphragm.
4, Pump Body
Check fuel pump valve operation as follows:
Connect a clean plastic tubing to the inlet nipple
and alternately apply pressure and vacuum with
the mouth. The inlet valve should release with
pressure and hold under vacuum.
TYPICAL
1. Fuel outlet nipple
2. Pulse nipple
3. Inlet nipple
-
CAUTION
Be careful at carburetor cleaning not to remove
paint. Paint removal will cause carburetor to
rust very rapidly. Repaint if necessary.
N
WARNING
Solvent with a low flash point such as gaso-
line, naphtha, benzol, etc., should not be used
as they are flammable and explosive.
-
CAUTION
Heavy duty carburetor cleaner may be harm-
ful to the rubber parts, O-rings, etc. Therefore,
it is recommended to remove these parts pri-
or to cleaning.
N
WARNING
Some fuel may be present in fuel pump. Be
careful not to swallow fuel when under vac-
uum.
F01F0XA
1
2
F01F0WA
1
2
3
06-04-4
Repeat the same procedure at the outlet nipple.
This time the outlet valve should hold with pres-
sure and release under vacuum.
Inspect valves. The pumping area should be free
of holes, tears or imperfections. Replace as needed.
5, Filter
To verify filter condition proceed as follows:
Remove pump cover no. 16, gasket no. 17, dia-
phragm no. 18 and then pump body no. 4 and di-
aphragm no. 19.
Remove filter from carburetor body then clean fil-
ter and blow carefully with compressed air (low
pressure).
Replace filter if damaged.
TYPICAL
1. Filter
20, Fuel Accelerator Pump
Disconnect inlet and outlet hoses from accelera-
tor pump nipples.
TYPICAL
1. Fuel inlet hose
2. Fuel outlet hose
Using a suitable pump gauge tester, perform the
following test proceeding as follows:
Install pump gauge tester (P/N 295 000 083) on
inlet nipple.
Obstruct outlet nipple with a finger and hold
while pumping.
Pump tester until it reaches 28 kPa (4 PSI).
2. Hose installed to inlet nipple
3. Outlet nipple obstructed
Diaphragm must stand pressure for 10 seconds.
If pressure drops, replace diaphragm.
Verify accelerator pump check valves operation as
follows:
F01F0YA
1
F06F06A 1 2
F06F07A 2 1 3
06-04-5
Connect a clean plastic tubing to the valve inlet
nipple and alternately apply pressure and vacuum.
The check valve should release with pressure and
hold under vacuum.
TYPICAL
1. Apply pressure and vacuum at inlet nipple
To check the injector, install pump gauge tester to
the injector hose.
NOTE: Injectors are also equipped with check
valves.
TYPICAL
1. Install pump gauge tester to injector hose
2. Injector
Pump tester. Injector check valve should open at
13 3 PSI.
NOTE: If the obtained valve is too low, the check
valve is leaking. If it is too high, less fuel will be
delivered which may lead to engine hesitation un-
der acceleration.
ASSEMBLY
When assembling pump, ensure to properly posi-
tion components together. Refer to previous illus-
trations if necessary.
6,7, Choke Plate and Throttle Plate
When installing plate onto shaft, close plate so
that it centers into carburetor bore. Firmly tighten
screws.
8, Needle Valve Lever
Rounded end of needle valve lever must be flush
with surrounding metering chamber floor and not
with body assembly. Place the end of a ruler over
lever to check adjustment.
1. Metering chamber floor
2. Lever end
3. Flush
N
WARNING
Some fuel may be present in fuel pump.
F06F08A
1
F04F0JB
1
2
-
CAUTION
Always apply Loctite 242 (blue) on screw
threads prior to installing screws.
1
F01F0ZA
3
2
06-04-6
To adjust, bend lever very slightly to change its
height.
HIGH LEVER
Step : Depress here
Step : Push tab down
LOW LEVER
Step : Depress here
Step : Pry up here
POP-OFF PRESSURE TEST
Proceed as follows:
Install pump gauge tester on carburetor fuel in-
let nipple.
Obstruct fuel return nipple with a finger.
Pump tester until inlet release pressure is
reached (seen by a sudden pressure drop).
TYPICAL
2. Install on inlet nipple
3. Obstruct outlet nipple
Refer to the following table for pop-off pressure
specifications:
NOTE: Pressure test should be performed three
times to obtain a valid reading.
If pop-off pressure is not within specification,
check control lever adjustment. Replace spring as
necessary.
LEAK TEST
Needle valve must stand a pressure of 69 kPa
(10 PSI) for 30 seconds. Otherwise, hold carbure-
tor upside down, pour oil over needle valve and
apply pressure.
-
CAUTION
When adjusting lever, do not pry it so that it
applies pressure on needle. This could dam-
age valve seat/needle.
F01F0HA
2 1
1
2
F01F34A
2 1
1
2
MODELS
V.S.
(mm)
SPRING
(g)
POP OFF
(min.)
POP OFF
(max.)
SPX 1.5 95 36 40
GS 1.5 95 36 40
GSX Ltd 2.0 95 19 23
XP Ltd 2.0 95 19 23
GTS 1.5 95 36 40
GTI 1.5 95 36 40
GTX Ltd 2.0 95 19 23
-
CAUTION
Do not stretch or cut spring.
F01F10A
1
2
3
06-04-7
Check for bubbles. If they come from seat or
O-ring, bubbles will exit around seat. Retighten as
necessary.
If it still leaks remove needle and seat and replace
O-ring.
If bubbles come from needle, replace needle and
seat.
9,10, Main Jet and Pilot Jet
Pilot jet and main jet are replaceable. Different jet
sizes are available to suit temperature and altitude
conditions. Always inspect spark plug tip condi-
tion when dealing with pilot jet and main jet. Spark
plug tip condition gives a good indication of carbu-
retor mixture setting.
NOTE: To have access to pilot jet or main jet,
check valve housing must be removed.
TYPICAL
1. Pilot jet
2. Gasket
3. Main jet
4. Check valve housing removed
11, Check Valve Assembly
The check valve is needed if a back pressure oc-
curs into carburetor. It will prevent fuel from flow-
ing back into carburetor lower portion.
Inspect check valve, it should be free of holes,
tears or imperfections. Replace as needed.
1. Check valve
NOTE: Prior to check valve assembly installation,
remember to set gasket.
3,12, Diaphragm and Cover
Install diaphragm with its integrated O-ring into
carburetor groove. Make sure that the tab of cover
is inserted into carburetor notch.
13, O-ring
When installing O-rings of low speed and high
speed screws, apply some BOMBARDIER LUBE
(P/N 293 600 016) to prevent sticking.
Lubricate pump plunger, roller and cam with syn-
thetic grease (P/N 293 550 010) and roller shaft
with BOMBARDIER LUBE (P/N 293 600 016).
TYPICAL
1. Apply synthetic grease to plunger
2. Apply BOMBARDIER LUBE on roller shaft
-
CAUTION
Adjustments vary with temperature and alti-
tude. Always observe spark plug condition
for proper jetting.
1
F01F11A
2
3
4
F01F12A
1
F06F06B 1 2
06-04-8
INSTALLATION
At installation, pay attention to the following:
Install carburetor(s) with gasket(s) to intake mani-
fold (rotary valve cover for the 787 engine).
Apply Loctite 577 on screws no. 20. Then, install
screws no. 20 with lock washers no. 21 and
torque to 20 Nm (15 lbfft).
Fuel Lines and Hose Clamps
If fuel line ends are damaged, cut damaged end
before reinstallation.
Properly install clamps.
For fuel system pressurization, refer to FUEL CIR-
CUIT 06-02.
ADJUSTMENTS
Twin Carburetor Synchronization
With idle speed screw not touching throttle lever
stopper on MAG carburetor, both throttle plates
are in closed position.
787 ENGINE SHOWN
1. Stopper
2. Idle speed screw
Loosen jam nuts on carburetor linkage and adjust
linkage with adjustment nut.
Make sure threads length is the same on each
side of linkage and flat surfaces of both ends are
parallel with each other.
1. Jam nuts
2. Adjustment nut
3. Flat surfaces
Tighten jam nuts and torque to 3 Nm (27 lbfin).
NOTE: Grease carburetor linkage at both ends
with synthetic grease (P/N 293 550 010).
Connect linkage between both carburetor levers.
Ensure both throttle plates are still in closed posi-
tion.
NOTE: The linkage installation is done with the
marks located near PTO carburetor throttle lever
to ease adjustment if to be performed in the wa-
tercraft.
787 ENGINE SHOWN
1. Throttle lever PTO side
2. Marks
N
WARNING
Make sure there is no leak in fuel system.
F01F31A
1 2
-
CAUTION
Throttle plates must open simultaneously,
otherwise this will cause engine to vibrate
and/or misfire.
F01F1YA
1
2
3
F01F32A
1 2
06-04-9
Throttle Cable
Lubricate cable with BOMBARDIER LUBE lubri-
cant.
Throttle lever must reach handlebar grip without
causing strain to cable or carburetor cable bracket.
1. Must touch handlebar grip
Ensure carburetor throttle plate(s) is (are) fully open
at full throttle position. At this position, throttle le-
ver stopper is almost in contact (0.5 mm (1/64 in))
with carburetor body.
NOTE: Apply a light pressure on the throttle plate(s),
a slight play should be obtained.
To adjust, loosen jam nut then turn adjustment nut
as necessary.
717 ENGINE
1. Adjustment nut
2. Jam nut
3. Throttle lever stopper
787 ENGINE
1. Throttle lever stoppers (behind levers)
2. Adjustment nut
947 ENGINE
1. Throttle cable
2. Adjustment nut
Tighten jam nut and recheck adjustment.
After throttle cable adjustment, always proceed
with the oil injection pump cable adjustment. Re-
fer to OIL INJECTION PUMP 07-03.
-
CAUTION
Improper cable adjustment will cause strain
on cable and/or damage cable bracket or
throttle lever at handlebar.
F01K08A
1
F01G0YC
1 2 3
N
WARNING
Make sure idle speed screw contacts stopper
when throttle lever is fully released at han-
dlebar.
-
CAUTION
Improper oil injection pump synchronization
with carburetor can cause serious engine
damage.
F01F32B
1
2
F06F0FA
1 2
06-04-10
2, Low Speed Screw
717 ENGINE
1. Low speed screw
787 ENGINE
1. Low speed screw (PTO)
2. Low speed screw (MAG)
947 ENGINE
1. Low speed screw (PTO side shown)
Tighten low speed screw until a slight resistance
is felt. Then, back it off to the specification as per
following chart.
NOTE: Turning screw clockwise leans mixture and
turning screw counterclockwise enriches mixture.
Start and warm up engine.
Check that engine idles and runs smoothly. Make
sure engine reacts quickly to throttle lever depres-
sion. If necessary, readjust low speed screw
( 1/4 turn).
NOTE: On twin carburetor engines, both low
speed screws must be adjusted exactly the same
way. Never adjust screws more than 1/4 turn at a
time.
14, High Speed Screw
The high speed screw is sealed with a plastic cap
that allows an adjustment of 1/4 turn.
NOTE: Turning screw 1/4 turn counterclockwise
enriches mixture and turning screw clockwise
leans mixture.
F06F0GA
1
F01F33A
2 1
F06F0HA
1
-
CAUTION
Do not attempt to set engine idle speed with
low-speed screw.
WATERCRAFT MODEL LOW SPEED SCREW
SPX 1.5 turns
GS/GTS/GTI 1.25 turns
GSX Limited/
XP Limited/GTX Limited
2 turns
-
CAUTION
-
CAUTION
Do not attempt to adjust high speed screw
by removing plastic cap.
06-04-11
717 ENGINE
1. High speed screw
787 ENGINE
1. High speed screws
947 ENGINE
1. High speed screw (PTO side shown)
15, Idle Speed Screw
Turning screw clockwise increases engine idle
speed and turning screw counterclockwise de-
creases engine idle speed.
717 ENGINE
1. Idle speed screw
F06F0IA 1
F01F2QA 1
F06F0PB
1
F01G0YD
1
06-04-12
787 ENGINE
1. Idle speed screw
947 ENGINE
1. Idle speed screw
NOTE: On twin carburetor engines, there is only
one idle speed screw.
Connect an induction-type tachometer (P/N 295
000 100) on spark plug cable of magneto side to
measure engine speed.
NOTE: To adjust idle speed, ensure flame arrester
and air intake silencer are installed.
Start engine and bring to normal operating tem-
perature.
Turn screw so that engine idles at 1500 RPM in
water or 3000 RPM out of water.
Ensure throttle cable is properly adjusted and idle
speed is set at 1500 RPM in water.
With the engine not running, start adjustment by
loosening adjustment screw until there is a small
gap between lever tab and pump plunger.
717 ENGINE SHOWN
1. Adjustment screw
2. Small gap
Turn adjustment screw clockwise until lever tab
touches plunger.
Then, turn adjustment screw an additional 1/4
turn clockwise. The adjustment is now complet-
ed.
F01F32C
1
F06F0KA
1
-
CAUTION
F02F1QA
1
2
07-01-1
Section 07 LUBRICATION SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
OIL INJECTION SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 07-02-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 07-02-7
OIL SYSTEM PRESSURIZATION...................................................................................... 07-02-7
OIL INJECTION PUMP .......................................................................................................... 07-03-1
REMOVAL........................................................................................................................... 07-03-4
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 07-03-4
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 07-03-4
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 07-03-4
ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................................... 07-03-5
CHECKING OPERATION.................................................................................................... 07-03-7
Subsection 02 (OIL INJECTION SYSTEM)
07-02-1
OIL INJECTION SYSTEM 0
SPX and GTS Models
F02G07S
To electrical box
4
3
2
1
Dielectric
grease
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-02-2
GS Model
F06G03S
Loctite 518
1
2
3
4
1
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
Dielectric
grease
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-02-3
GSX Limited
F06G04S
1
Loctite 518
2
3
4
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
Dielectric
grease
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-02-4
XP Limited
F08G01S
Dielectric
grease
3
To oil
injection
pump
4
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-02-5
GTI Model
F
R
O
N
T
A
V
A
N
T
F07G01S
1
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
2
1
2
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
1.2 Nm
(11 lbfin)
4
3
To engine
crankcase
(supply)
To oil
injection
pump
To engine
crankcase
(return)
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-02-6
GTX Limited
F07G03S
Dielectric
grease
27 Nm
(20 lbfft)
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
1
3
2
1
2
4
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-02-7
GENERAL
Whenever repairing the oil injection system, al-
ways verify for water infiltration in reservoir.
Perform also a pressure test of the oil injection
system.
1,2, Clamp and Hose
Verify oil filler neck hose for damage. Always en-
sure that clamps are well positioned and tight-
ened. Torque clamps to 3.5 Nm (31 lbfin).
All Models
3, Check Valve
Black side of the one-way check valve is the valve
outlet. It allows air to get in reservoir.
4, Oil Filter
Oil filter should be replaced annually.
OIL SYSTEM PRESSURIZATION
Pressure Test
Proceed as follows:
Fill up oil reservoir.
Install a hose pincher to rotary valve shaft oil
supply hose (except the 947 engine).
Install a hose pincher to rotary valve shaft oil
return hose (except the 947 engine).
Install a hose pincher to oil injection pump sup-
ply hose.
to check valve of oil injection reservoir vent.
NOTE: Use the same pump included in the EN-
GINE LEAK TESTER KIT (P/N 295 500 352).
TYPICAL
1. Connect pump to check valve
Pressurize oil system to 21 kPa (3 PSI). If pres-
sure is not maintained, locate leak and repair/re-
place component leaking. To ease leak search
spray a solution of soapy water on compo-
nents, bubbles will indicate leak location.
NOTE: The system must maintain a pressure of
21 kPa (3 PSI) for at least 10 minutes. Never pres-
surize over 21 kPa (3 PSI).
Disconnect pump gauge tester and remove
hose pinchers.
N
WARNING
Whenever oil system components are dis-
connected or replaced, a pressure test must
be done before starting engine. Ensure to
verify oil line ends for damage. Always cut
damaged end before reinstallation.
-
CAUTION
If any leak is found, do not start the engine
and wipe off any oil leakage.
1
F01G0IA
Subsection 03 (OIL INJECTION PUMP)
07-03-1
OIL INJECTION PUMP 0
717 Engine
F00G02S
Loctite 242
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
5
1
6
Loctite 242
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
2
3
Loctite 242
Loctite 518
4
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-03-2
787 Engine
F01G0TT
8
1
6
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
7
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
Loctite
242
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-03-3
947 Engine
F06G05S
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
7
Loctite 242
4.5 Nm
(40 lbfin)
6
1
6
8
FLAT RATE PARTS
07-03-4
REMOVAL
1, Oil Injection Pump
717 Engine
Remove air intake silencer (refer to AIR INTAKE
06-03).
Remove carburetor (refer to CARBURETOR 06-04).
Remove rotary valve cover (refer to ROTARY
VALVE 04-07).
Remove Allen screws no. 5 retaining intake man-
ifold no. 2 to rotary valve cover.
Separate intake manifold from rotary valve cover.
To separate oil pump from intake manifold no. 2,
remove oil pump gear no. 3 using gear holder
(P/N 290 277 905) and unscrew lock nut no. 4.
1. Gear holder
Remove 2 Allen screws no. 6 with flat washers re-
taining oil injection pump to intake manifold no. 2.
Remove pump.
947 Engine
Remove tuned pipe head. Refer to EXHAUST
SYSTEM 04-08.
787 and 947 Engines
Disconnect oil injection pump cable no. 7.
Remove 2 Allen screws no. 6 with flat washers
retaining oil injection pump to magneto housing
cover.
Pull pump.
Disconnect oil hoses from fittings of oil injection
pump.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Some oil pump parts are not available in
single parts. A gasket set is available for the
pump.
If the pump is found defective, it should be re-
placed by a new one.
CLEANING
Discard all seals and O-rings. Clean metal compo-
nents in a solvent.
ASSEMBLY
717 Engine
1,2, Oil Injection Pump and Intake
Manifold
Install oil injection pump to intake manifold.
Torque screws no. 5 to 6 Nm (53 lbfin).
TYPICAL
1. Small oil line
3, Oil Pump Gear
Install gear to oil injection pump shaft. Torque lock
nut no. 4 to 6 Nm (53 lbfin).
NOTE: Make sure 1 washer is installed on each
side of gear.
A00C17B
1
-
CAUTION
Whenever oil injection lines are removed, al-
ways make the routing as shown.
F01D4SA
1 1
07-03-5
2, Intake Manifold
Install intake manifold to rotary valve cover and
torque screws no. 5 to 10 Nm (89 lbfin).
TYPICAL
A. 10 Nm (89 lbfin)
787 and 947 Engines
1,8, Oil Injection Pump and Shaft
Make sure shaft no. 8 is installed in crankshaft
end.
Install pump. Secure with flat washers and screws
no. 6. Torque to 6 Nm (53 lbfin).
Install oil injection pump cable.
ADJUSTMENT
Preliminary Synchronization
NOTE: To check synchronization of pump as a
routine maintenance, see Final Synchronization.
Make sure idle speed of engine is properly adjust-
ed.
Ensure carburetor butterfly(ies) is (are) in closed
position.
NOTE: On a twin carburetor engine, make sure
carburetors are properly synchronized. If neces-
sary, refer to CARBURETOR 06-04.
Turn idle speed screw until it contacts stopper.
Turn idle speed screw 2 turns.
Turn cable adjustment nut to align marks on
pump.
NOTE: A mirror may be used to facilitate this ver-
ification.
717 Engine
TYPICAL
1. Jam nut
2. Adjustment nut
3. Aligned marks
787 and 947 Engines
1. Aligned marks
-
CAUTION
As oil injection pump adjustment is depen-
dent on throttle cable position, make sure to
perform throttle cable adjustment first.
F01D4RC A
F01D4RE
2
3
1
F07G02B
1
07-03-6
787 Engine
NOTE: The adjustment nut and jam nut for the oil
injection pump cable are located at the cable sup-
port on PTO side carburetor.
1. Adjustment nut on this side
2. Jam nut
947 Engine
NOTE: The adjustment nut and jam nut for the oil
injection pump cable are located at the cable sup-
port on MAG side carburetor.
1. Adjustment nut
All Engines
Start and bring engine to normal operating tem-
perature.
Adjust idle speed to specification. Refer to CAR-
BURETOR 06-04.
Stop engine.
Final Synchronization
Eliminate throttle cable free-play by depressing
throttle lever until a slight resistance is felt. In this
position, marks on pump body and lever must
align.
NOTE: A mirror may be used to facilitate this ver-
ification.
If necessary, turn cable adjustment nut to obtain
pump mark alignment. Refer to above illustra-
tions.
Tighten jam nut and recheck alignment marks.
Bleeding
Ensure oil injection reservoir is sufficiently filled.
Install a dry rag below oil injection pump.
Loosen bleed screw to allow oil to flow.
717 ENGINE
1. Bleed screw
-
CAUTION
cooled using the flush kit. If air bubbles are
present in the oil injection system, bleed
system before operating engine.
F01F32G
1 2
F06F0OB
1
-
CAUTION
Proper oil injection pump adjustment is very
important. Any delay in the opening of
pump can result in serious engine damage.
-
CAUTION
Oil injection system must be bled and ad-
justment checked before operating engine.
1
F01D4SC
07-03-7
787 and 947 ENGINES
1. Bleed screw
Keep bleeding until all air has escaped from line.
Make sure no air bubbles remain in oil supply line.
Tighten bleed screw.
Wipe any oil spillage.
Check small oil lines of pump. They must be full
of oil.
If not, run engine at idle speed while manually
holding pump lever in fully open position. Do not
activate throttle lever.
CHECKING OPERATION
On Watercraft
NOTE: Oil line supply must be full of oil. See
bleeding procedure above.
Start engine and run at idle while holding the
pump lever in fully open position. Oil must ad-
vance into small oil lines.
NOTE: The engine should have a rich mixture,
idling irregularly and emitting smoke at exhaust
outlet.
If not, remove pump assembly and check the
pump gear (717 engine) or shaft (787 and 947 en-
gines) for defects, replace as necessary. Test
pump as describes below:
NOTE: Through normal use, oil level must not
drop in small tubes. If oil drops, verify check valve
operation. Replace as necessary.
Bench Test
The oil pump must be removed out of watercraft.
Connect a hose filled with injection oil to main line
fitting. Insert other hose end in an injection oil
container. Using a counterclockwise (reverse po-
sition) rotating drill rotate pump shaft. Oil must
drip from fittings in parts of rotary valve cover
while holding lever in a fully open position.
TYPICAL
1. Supply oil line to an oil container
2. Hold lever in fully open position
3. Counterclockwise (reverse) rotating drill
4. Oil must drip here
For an accurate test, each port should be checked
separately to ensure equal delivery on both ports.
To obtain a precise result of the oil pump delivery
rate, rotate it counterclockwise at 1500 RPM for a
total time of 30 seconds.
NOTE: To ensure accuracy of test, oil lines should
be completely filled before starting test.
-
CAUTION
F07G02A
1
F01G02A
1
2
3
4
07-03-8
Compare the results with the chart below. If oil
pump is out of specification, replace it.
NOTE: Test can also be done at 3000 RPM. Dou-
ble quantities in chart.
ENGINE
OIL PUMP FLOW RATE AT
1500 RPM (30 SECONDS)
717 1.24 - 1.51 mL (each port)
787 0.71 - 0.87 mL (each port)
947 0.83 - 1.01 mL (each port)
08-01-1
Section 08 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
IGNITION SYSTEM................................................................................................................ 08-02-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 08-02-1
IGNITION TIMING ............................................................................................................. 08-02-5
IGNITION SYSTEM TESTING PROCEDURE.................................................................... 08-02-12
SPARK PLUGS................................................................................................................... 08-02-16
CHARGING SYSTEM............................................................................................................. 08-03-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 08-03-1
TESTING PROCEDURE ..................................................................................................... 08-03-1
BATTERY............................................................................................................................ 08-03-4
STARTING SYSTEM.............................................................................................................. 08-04-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 08-04-4
STARTING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................................... 08-04-5
STARTER REMOVAL.......................................................................................................... 08-04-6
STARTER DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................. 08-04-6
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 08-04-8
PARTS INSPECTION.......................................................................................................... 08-04-9
STARTER ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 08-04-9
STARTER INSTALLATION ................................................................................................. 08-04-11
STARTER SPECIFICATION ................................................................................................ 08-04-14
INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES .................................................................................. 08-05-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 08-05-1
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 08-05-1
DIGITALLY ENCODED SECURITY SYSTEM........................................................................ 08-06-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 08-06-1
GTX RFI
Subsection 02 (IGNITION SYSTEM)
08-02-1
IGNITION SYSTEM 0
GENERAL
717 Engine
The digital Capacitor Discharge Ignition (CDI) sys-
tem includes the following components:
Magneto
It is the primary source of electrical energy. It
transforms magnetic field into electric current.
The flywheel contains 4 permanent magnets and
spins around the generating coil. This electric cur-
rent flows to the ignition coil (GTS model) or the
Multi-Purpose Electronic Module (GS and GTI
models).
1. Flywheel
2. Generating coil
Ignition Coil
TYPICAL
GTS Model
The ignition coil performs two functions:
It has an integrated capacitor discharged ignition
(CDI) module, which controls the spark occur-
rence (ignition timing curve).
Every half revolution of the flywheel, a critical
point occurs when the position of the magnets
changes the polarity of the current flowing from
the generating coil.
The CDI module detects the change of polarity
and signals at the right time the primary winding
of the ignition coil.
The secondary winding of the ignition coil steps
up the voltage input to high voltage current for
both spark plugs.
GS and GTI Models
The ignition coil steps up the voltage input from
the Multi-Purpose Electronic Module to high volt-
age current for both spark plugs.
The ignition coil is located in the rear electrical
box, on right side of watercraft.
1
F00H0EA
2
F01H2NA
08-02-2
Multi-Purpose Electronic Module
(MPEM)
The MPEM is directly powered by the battery. It
has a micro-processor inside of its sealed case.
The MPEM is responsible of the following electri-
cal functions:
interpreting information
distributing information
start/stop function
timer
Digitally Encoded Security System
ignition (GS and GTI models)
engine rev limiter
Fuses are directly mounted onto the MPEM.
GTS Model
TYPICAL
GS and GTI Models
On these models, the MPEM is also used as a
junction box, eliminating the need of an electrical
box.
All electrical components or accessories are di-
rectly linked to the MPEM.
Wire position are identified with a series of num-
ber on the MPEM. AMP plug connectors are
used.
The regulator/rectifier is also mounted on the
MPEM.
TYPICAL
787 and 947 Engines
The 787 and 947 engines have a digital Direct
Current-Capacitor Discharge Ignition (DC-CDI)
system.
Compared to the magneto system, the DC-CDI
system offers a more powerful and stable ignition
at low RPM.
SPX, GSX Limited and GTX Limited
The high amperage/voltage components are lo-
cated into a rear electrical box.
SPX MODEL
1. Rear electrical box
F01H2OA
F00H0FA
F00H0DB
1
08-02-3
GSX LIMITED
1. Electrical box
GTX LIMITED
1. Electrical box
XP Limited
The high amperage/voltage components are lo-
cated into a front electrical box.
XP LIMITED
1. Electrical box
SPX Model
The other components are located in the conven-
tional electrical box.
The other components are integrated to the Multi-
Purpose Electronic Module (MPEM).
SPX, GSX Limited, XP Limited and GTX
Limited
The ignition system includes the following com-
ponents:
Battery
The battery is the primary power source for this
system.
F06E06A
1
F07H07B
1
F00H0AB
1
F00H0KA
08-02-4
Trigger Coil
The trigger coil is mounted outside the rotor (in-
side the magneto housing of the engine) and is
not adjustable.
Its purpose is to signal the engine position to the
Multi-Purpose Electronic Module. The rotor has
two protrusions (180 degrees apart) that, when
coupled with the trigger coil, accomplish the signal-
ing.
1. Coil
2. Magnet
3. Rotor protrusion
4. Magnetic field outside of coil
5. Magnetic field crossing coil
6. Current to MPEM
7. Rotor
(MPEM)
The MPEM is directly powered by the battery. It
has a micro-processor inside of its sealed case.
The MPEM is responsible of the following electri-
cal functions:
interpreting information
distributing information
start/stop function
timer
Digitally Encoded Security System
ignition
engine rev limiter
Fuses are directly mounted onto the MPEM.
SPX Model
On these models, the MPEM is also used as a
junction box, eliminating the need of an electrical
box.
All electrical components or accessories are di-
rectly linked to the MPEM.
Wire position are identified with a series of num-
ber on the MPEM. AMP plug connectors are
used.
The regulator/rectifier is also mounted on the
MPEM.
F06H04A
N
S
N
S
A00E4JA
6
3
1
2
1
2
4
5
7
F00H0JA
08-02-5
1. Multi-Purpose Electronic Module
Ignition Coil
The ignition coil steps up the voltage input from
the Multi-Purpose Electronic Module to high volt-
age current for both spark plugs.
IGNITION TIMING
Before checking ignition timing with a strobo-
scopic timing light (dynamic test), it is mandatory
to scribe a timing mark on the PTO flywheel (stat-
ic test) corresponding to the specific engine.
Also, the timing mark scribed on the PTO flywheel
can be used to troubleshoot a broken magneto
woodruff key.
NOTE: Do not use the factory mark found on the
PTO flywheel to check ignition timing or trouble-
shoot any problems.
787 and 947 Engines
Normally ignition timing adjustment should not be
required. It has been set at factory and it should
remain correctly adjusted since every part is fixed
and not adjustable. The only time the ignition tim-
ing might have to be changed would be when re-
placing the crankshaft, the magneto rotor, the
trigger coil and the MPEM. If the ignition timing is
found incorrect, you should first check for proper
crankshaft alignment. This might be the indication
of a twisted crankshaft.
With this DC-CDI system, the ignition timing can
be checked with either the engine hot or cold. Al-
so, the ignition timing is to be checked at 3500
RPM with the timing light.
NOTE: Between 3000 and 4000 RPM, the spark
advance does not change. So when checking igni-
tion timing at 3500 RPM, a change in engine
speed within 500 RPM will not affect the timing
mark when checked with the timing light.
Static Test
All Engines
1. Disconnect MAG side spark plug wire and con-
nect wire to grounding device then remove
spark plug.
2. Remove PTO flywheel guard.
717 Engine
3. Install timing mark pointer tool on engine using
wing nuts previously removed.
1. Timing mark pointer tool (P/N 295 000 130)
-
CAUTION
The relation between the PTO flywheel mark
position and crankshaft position may change
as the PTO flywheel might tighten/loosen on
the crankshaft. As an example, when the en-
gine is accelerated out of water, PTO fly-
wheel may tighten then loosen when the
engine is decelerated. This will result in a
false ignition timing reading. Always verify
PTO flywheel mark position before checking
ignition timing with an appropriate timing
light. If mark does not align with tool, repeat
static test to ensure flywheel has not loosen
before changing the ignition timing.
F06H0SA
1
F01H5SA 1
08-02-6
787 and 947 Engines
4. Remove middle screw securing the engine to
the rear engine mount. Reinstall screw with
timing mark pointer tool.
1. Timing mark pointer tool (P/N 295 000 135)
All Engines
5. Install and adjust a TDC gauge (P/N 295 000
143) in MAG side spark plug hole.
TYPICAL
1. TDC gauge on MAG side
6. Rotate PTO flywheel counterclockwise (when
facing it) until piston is at Top Dead Center.
TYPICAL
1. Adjust gauge dial at zero
7. From this point, rotate flywheel clockwise to
reach proper specification according to engine.
Refer to the following chart.
8. Scribe a thin mark on PTO flywheel in the mid-
dle of tool slot (717 engine) or aligned with tim-
ing mark pointer tool (787 and 947 engines).
F06H05A
1
F01H5TA
1
ENGINE
IGNITION TIMING
(BTDC)
717 2.59 mm (.102 in)
787 3.38 mm (.133 in)
947 3.60 mm (.142 in)
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
1
F01H4LA
08-02-7
TYPICAL
1. Tool slot
2. Flywheel mark
NOTE: This mark becomes the reference when
using the stroboscopic timing light.
9. Remove TDC gauge.
10. Reinstall spark plug and connect wire.
Dynamic Test
To check ignition timing, use Bombardier timing
light (P/N 529 031 900).
717 Engine
NOTE: To perform this procedure, make sure to
use a stroboscopic timing light rated up to 6000
RPM. Otherwise, an inaccurate reading will be ob-
tained.
The ignition components are affected by temper-
ature variation, therefore, timing must be checked
when engine is cold, after idling for a MAXIMUM
of 20 seconds.
1. Connect an induction-type tachometer (P/N
295 000 100) to spark plug wire.
1. Tachometer pick-up
2. Connect timing light pick-up to MAG side spark
plug wire.
1. Timing light pick-up
-
CAUTION
The static test cannot be used as a timing
procedure, therefore, always check the tim-
ing with a stroboscopic timing light.
F01H5SB 1 2
A00B4FA
F00H0GA 1
F00H0HA
1
08-02-8
3. Start engine and point timing light straight in
line with timing tool slot. Bring engine to 6000
RPM.
1. Timing light straight in line with tool slot
4. Check if PTO flywheel mark aligns with timing
tool slot.
NOTE: On this system, timing advance decreas-
es as engine speed increases.
If timing mark aligns with tool slot, timing is prop-
erly set. If mark does not align with tool slot, re-
check PTO flywheel mark before adjusting igni-
tion timing to ensure PTO flywheel has not loosen.
787 and 947 Engines
1. Connect an induction-type tachometer (P/N
295 000 100) to spark plug wire.
1. Tachometer pick-up
2. Connect timing light pick-up to MAG side spark
plug wire.
1. Timing light pick-up
3. Rev the engine to 3500 RPM and point beam of
timing light straight in line with timing mark
pointer.
-
CAUTION
If engine is to be run more than a few sec-
onds, engine must be cooled using the flush
kit.
F00H0IA
1
F06H06A
1
F00H0HA
1
08-02-9
1. Timing light straight in line with tool slot
NOTE: If mark on PTO flywheel is perfectly align-
ed with timing mark pointer, no adjustment is re-
quired. If mark does not align with pointer, re-
check PTO flywheel mark before adjusting ignition
timing to ensure PTO flywheel has not loosen.
Ignition Timing Adjustment
717 Engine
Remove battery (GTS model).
Remove magneto housing cover and wire support.
For removal of magneto, refer to MAGNETO SYS-
TEM 04-04.
Timing is performed by moving armature plate;
clockwise to retard spark occurrence or counter-
clockwise to advance.
TYPICAL
1. To retard
2. To advance
To adjust, loosen 3 armature plate retaining screws
and slightly rotate armature plate in proper direc-
tion.
NOTE: As a guideline, turn the armature plate the
same amount needed to align mark on PTO fly-
wheel.
TYPICAL
1. Retaining screw
-
CAUTION
If engine is to be run more than a few sec-
onds, engine must be cooled using the flush
kit.
F06H07A
1
A25E0RA
1
2
A25E0VA
1
1
1
08-02-10
Example 1
When PTO flywheel mark is on right side of timing
tool slot, it indicates advanced timing.
1. Too advanced timing
In this case, turn armature plate clockwise when
facing it.
Example 2
When PTO flywheel mark is on left side of timing
tool slot, it indicates retarded timing.
1. Retarded timing
In this case, turn armature plate counterclockwise
when facing it.
After adjustment, tighten armature plate retaining
screws.
Reinstall removed parts. Refer to MAGNETO SYS-
TEM 04-04.
Recheck ignition timing (make sure engine is cold).
Repeat armature plate positioning procedure if
timing mark position is not adequate.
787 and 947 Engines
To correct the ignition timing, the data of the
MPEM is changed using the MPEM programmer
(P/N 295 000 127).
NOTE: For more information on the programmer,
refer to its guide.
Through the MPEM programmer, the ignition tim-
ing can be advanced up to 3 or retarded up to 4.
The timing mark refer to the physical component
position when the spark must occur. The MPEM
must be synchronized with the mark. For in-
stance, on a particular engine, the timing correc-
tion may need to be advanced to 2 so that the
mark aligns with timing mark pointer tool. This is
not the real spark advance, just a correction for
the tolerances of the mechanical components.
Knowing that, you select with the programmer
the higher or lower number to advance or retard
the actual timing correction by referring to the fol-
lowing chart.
-
CAUTION
Armature plate screws must have Loctite
242 (blue) applied before tightening. Make
sure armature plate screws are well secured.
F01H5UA
1
F01H5VA
1
-
CAUTION
If the ignition timing is adjusted too ad-
vanced, this will cause serious damage to
the engine.
TIMING CORRECTION CHART
PROGRAMMER NUMBER
(MPEM)
IGNITION TIMING
CORRECTION
2 3
3 2
4 1
1 0
5 -1
6 -2
7 -3
8 -4
08-02-11
Examples:
a. You found the flywheel mark advanced. You
must retard the ignition timing.
The programmer gives you the number 3.
Referring to the chart, number 3 returns a
correction of 2 (advanced) and this is too
much in this case.
You estimate the correction should be set to
1 (advanced) to align flywheel mark. Back in
the chart, look to find 1 (advanced). This
gives number 4. Enter this number with the
programmer.
You recheck the timing with the timing light
and if the mark is aligned, ignition timing is
properly set.
b. You found the flywheel mark advanced. You
must retard the ignition timing.
correction of 2 (advanced) and this is too
much in this case.
programmer.
and found that the flywheel mark is still too
advanced. You know now that the correction
made previously was not enough and you es-
timate the correction should be set to - 2 (re-
tarded) to align flywheel mark. Back in the
chart, look to find - 2 (retarded). This gives
number 6. Enter this number with the pro-
grammer.
and if the mark is aligned, ignition timing is
properly set.
c. You found the flywheel mark retarded. You
must advance the ignition timing.
correction of 1 (advanced) and this is not
enough in this case.
programmer.
and if the mark is aligned, the ignition timing
is properly set.
Proceed as Follows to Adjust the Ignition
Timing with the MPEM Programmer:
1. Connect the communication cable to the
MPEM programmer and the other end to the
safety lanyard switch on the craft.
2. Press the ON/C button on programmer and
enter your password.
3. Press 3 to choose Vehicle info in program-
mer.
4. Press 4 to choose Engine param.
5. Press 2 to choose Timing adjust.
6. The programmer display a number that is
stored in the MPEM.
7. Press to choose yes for modify then press
Enter.
8. Now punch in the number that corresponds to
the degree you want for the ignition timing
then press Enter.
9. Press Menu to go back one level.
10. Press 8 to choose Save + Quit (even if item
no. 8 is not visible on the display, it is active
when you select it).
11. Press Enter to confirm yes you want to save
modifications to the MPEM.
12. You must see Operation successful. This
confirms that the new timing data has been
stored in the MPEM.
13. Unplug communication cable from safety lan-
yard switch on craft.
14. Press Off to close the programmer.
At this point, you can install the watercraft safety
lanyard and start the engine to check the effect of
the correction on the ignition timing. If further ad-
justment is required, repeat the procedure.
NOTE: The MPEM features a permanent (non-
volatile) memory and keeps the ignition timing
programmed even when the watercraft battery is
disconnected.
08-02-12
IGNITION SYSTEM TESTING
PROCEDURE
When dealing with ignition problems, the follow-
ing items should be verified in this order:
1. Spark occurrence/spark plug condition.
2. Battery condition.
3. Electrical connections.
4. Engine start/stop switch.
5. Safety lanyard switch.
6. Timer.
7. Multi-Purpose Electronic Module (MPEM).
8. Magneto output (717 engine).
9. Ignition coil output.
NOTE: To perform verification, a good quality mul-
timeter such as Fluke 73 (P/N 529 022 000) should
be used.
Engine Start/Stop Switch Verification
Disconnect the YELLOW/RED wire of the start/
stop switch. Using an ohmmeter, connect test
probes to YELLOW/RED wire and to ground.
Measure resistance, it must be an open circuit
(switch is normally open). Depress and hold switch,
the ohmmeter should read close to 0 ohm.
Safety Lanyard Switch Verification
If 2 short beeps are not heard when installing the
safety lanyard, refer to DIGITALLY ENCODED SE-
CURITY SYSTEM 06-06.
The following continuity tests can also be per-
formed using an ohmmeter:
Disconnect switch wires.
Safety Lanyard Removed
Connect test probes to switch BLACK and BLACK/
YELLOW wires. Measure resistance, there should
be no continuity (open circuit).
Connect one test probe to the WHITE/GRAY wire
and the other test probe to the switch terminal.
Measure resistance, it must be close to 0 ohm.
Connect one test probe to the BLACK wire and
the other test probe to the switch ring. Measure
resistance, it must be close to 0 ohm.
Safety Lanyard on Switch
YELLOW wires. Measure resistance, it must be
close to 0 ohm.
Timer Verification
The timer is integrated into the MPEM.
Always confirm first that the fuses are in good
condition.
To confirm operation of timer, remove safety lan-
yard from switch. After a 5 seconds delay, de-
press start/stop button once. The timer should
stay on for about 33 seconds (for example,
gauge(s) will be activated) and then turn off.
Rev Limiter Verification
To check engine rev limiter, connect an induction
tachometer (P/N 295 000 100), start engine and
check its maximum speed; it should be at 7000
50 RPM for a 717 engine, and 7200 50 RPM for
(MPEM) Verification
GTS Model
The multi-purpose electronic module testing must
be done with all wires disconnected from circuit.
Otherwise testing equipment (ohmmeter) could
be damaged.
Refer to the following chart for MPEM testing. Al-
ways respect polarity in chart.
-
CAUTION
Whenever replacing a component in ignition
system, check ignition timing.
-
CAUTION
When disconnecting wires, BLACK/RED wire
must never touch solenoid positive termi-
nal. When replacing a MPEM, make sure to
replace it with the right model.
08-02-13
Most of circuit can be tested with an ohmmeter
but a 100% test doesnt mean the MPEM is in
perfect condition.
All Other Models
It is not possible to accurately check the MPEM
condition without specialized tools. Therefore, re-
place MPEM with a good known unit to conduct
testing.
NOTE: Before replacing the MPEM, make sure all
connectors are properly secured and there is no
water in connectors. Check also the signal and
power contacts in the AMP plug connectors. See
WIRING DIAGRAMS 14-01.
Generating Coil Verification
717 Engine
STATIC TEST
Disconnect magneto wiring harness connector.
Install the 4-pin magneto harness adapter (P/N
295 000 131).
TYPICAL
Check resistance with a multimeter. Refer to the
following table for values and wire colors.
1. Multimeter
2. Four-pin magneto harness adapter
3. RED/BLACK wire
4. BLACK wire
METER (+) LEAD METER (-) VALUE
RED
(ring terminal)
RED
(female terminal)
< 1
RED
(ring terminal)
RED/PURPLE
(female terminal)
< 1
RED
(ring terminal)
BLACK
(ring terminal)
> 20 k
BLACK/RED
BLACK
(ring terminal)
> 10 k
WHITE/GREY
BLACK
(ring terminal)
> 100 k
TAN/BLACK
BLACK
(ring terminal)
> 200 k
YELLOW/RED
(female terminal)
BLACK
(ring terminal)
> 10 k
YELLOW/RED
(male terminal)
BLACK
(ring terminal)
> 50 k
BLACK
(ring terminal)
RED
(ring terminal)
> 10 k
-
CAUTION
Whenever connecting MPEM, always have
battery disconnected from circuit. If MPEM
must be connected when circuit is activated,
always connect BLACK/RED wire first to igni-
tion coil/CDI module to prevent wire from
touching solenoid positive terminal.
PART NAME
ADAPTER
WIRE
RESISTANCE
Generating coil
BLACK with
RED/BLACK
40-76
F01B28A
F01H5WA
2 1
3 4
08-02-14
DYNAMIC TEST
1. Connect spark plug cables to grounding device.
2. Disconnect magneto wiring harness connector.
3. Install the 4-pin magneto harness adapter (P/N
295 000 131).
4. Connect positive test probe of the multimeter
to the RED/BLACK wire of the 4-pin magneto
harness adapter.
5. Connect negative test probe of the multimeter
to BLACK wire of the 4-pin magneto harness
adapter.
6. Set multimeter to Vac scale.
7. Crank engine and note result. The obtained val-
ue should be between 18 and 25 Vac.
8. If the generating coil is out of specification, re-
place it.
NOTE: If the generating coil tests good, discon-
nect the primary wires of the ignition coil. Crank
engine and check voltage at primary wires. It
should be at least 20 Vdc. If there is insufficient or
no voltage, either the MPEM or wiring harness is
defective.
Trigger Coil Verification
787 and 947 Engines
STATIC TEST: CONTINUITY
295 000 136).
3. Connect one of the multimeter probes to the
WHITE wire of the 6-pin magneto harness
adapter.
4. Connect the other multimeter probe to the BLACK/
YELLOW wire of the 6-pin magneto harness
adapter.
5. Measure resistance; it should be between 190-
300 ohms.
1. Multimeter
2. Six-pin magneto harness adapter
3. WHITE wire
4. BLACK/YELLOW wire
DYNAMIC TEST
295 000 136).
3. Connect one of the multimeter probes to the
WHITE wire of the 6-pin magneto harness
adapter.
4. Connect the other multimeter probe to the BLACK/
YELLOW wire of the 6-pin magneto harness
adapter.
5. Crank engine and note result. The obtained val-
ue should be between 0.2 and 0.5 Vac.
6. If the trigger coil is out of specification, replace
it.
Ignition Coil Verification
All Engines
Before conducting any testing on the ignition coil,
make sure there is at least 20 Vdc at the primary
wires. If there is insufficient voltage, the ignition
problem is occurring before the ignition coil.
STATIC TEST
NOTE: An ignition coil with good resistance mea-
surement can still be faulty. Voltage leak can occur
at high voltage level which is not detectable with
an ohmmeter.
F01B28A
F01H5YA
1 2 3 4
08-02-15
Primary Winding
GTS Model
Due to the integrated CDI module, it is not possi-
ble to take any resistance measurement.
All Other Models
1. Remove the 2 female spade connectors from
the primary side of the ignition coil.
2. With the multimeter set on the resistance scale,
connect the meter probes to the primary termi-
nals of the coil.
3. Resistance should be between 0.34 - 0.62 ohm.
Secondary Winding
The spark plug caps must be removed from high
tension cables, because they are resistor caps.
The cap resistance is 4.48 K ohms.
1. Resistor cap
2. High-tension cable
NOTE: A short circuit will read 0 ohm (or close to)
on ohmmeter.
DYNAMIC TEST
All Models Except GTS
Use an ignition coil tester, available from after-
market tool/equipment suppliers.
1. With ignition coil removed from craft, discon-
nect spark plug caps from high tension cables.
2. Hook high tension leads from tester to ignition
coil high tension cables.
3. Connect 2 smaller tester leads to primary of ig-
nition coil.
TYPICAL
1. Leads to secondary
2. Leads to primary
4. Turn power switch to 12 volts and you should
observe spark jumping at a predetermined gap
of 7 to 8 mm (.276 to .311 in).
If there is no spark, if it is weak or intermittent, the
coil is defective and should be replaced.
IGNITION COIL
PART NAME WIRE RESISTANCE
Secondary
winding
(GTS model)
End of each spark
plug cable, spark
plug caps removed
9 - 15 k
Secondary
winding
(all other
models)
End of each spark
plug cable, spark
plug caps removed
8.4 - 15.6 k
A00E0QA
1
2
-
CAUTION
Do NOT use coil tester on metal work bench.
Follow manufacturer instructions.
ON
OFF
12 V
6 V
F00H14 A
1
2
08-02-16
SPARK PLUGS
Disassembly
First unscrew the spark plug one turn.
Clean the spark plug and cylinder head with pres-
surize air then completely unscrew.
Heat Range
The proper heat range of the spark plugs is deter-
mined by the spark plugs ability to dissipate the
heat generated by combustion.
The longer the heat path between the electrode
tip to the plug shell, the hotter the spark plug op-
erating temperature will be and inversely, the
shorter the heat path, the colder the operating
temperature will be.
A cold type plug has a relatively short insulator
nose and transfers heat very rapidly into the cylin-
der head.
Such a plug is used in heavy duty or continuous
high speed operation to avoid overheating.
The hot type plug has a longer insulator nose
and transfers heat more slowly away from its fir-
ing end. It runs hotter and burns off combustion
deposits which might tend to foul the plug during
prolonged idle or low speed operation.
1. Cold
2. Hot
A too hot plug will result in overheating and pre-
ignition, etc.
A too cold plug will result in fouling or may cre-
ate carbon build up which can heat up red-hot and
cause pre-ignition or detonation.
Fouling
Fouling of the spark plug is indicated by irregular
running of the engine, decreased engine speed
due to misfiring, reduced performance, and in-
creased fuel consumption. This is due to a loss of
compression. Other possible causes are: pro-
longed idling, or running on a too rich mixture due
to a faulty carburetor adjustment or incorrect fuel.
The plug face of a fouled spark plug has either a
dry coating of soot or an oily, glossy coating given
by an excess either of oil or of oil with soot. Such
coatings form a conductive connection between
the center electrode and ground.
Spark Plug Analysis
1. Overheated (light grey)
2. Normal (brownish)
3. Fouled (black)
The plug face (and piston dome) reveals the con-
dition of the engine, operating condition, method
of driving and fuel mixture. For this reason it is
advisable to inspect the spark plug at regular inter-
vals, examining the plug face (i.e. the part of the
plug projecting into the combustion chamber) and
the piston dome.
A00E09A
1 2
-
CAUTION
Severe engine damage might occur if a
wrong heat range plug is used.
A00E0AA
1 2 3
08-02-17
Spark Plug Installation
Prior to installation make sure that contact surfac-
es of the cylinder head and spark plug are free of
grime.
1. Using a wire feeler gauge, set electrode gap ac-
cording to the following chart.
2. Apply anti-seize lubricant over the spark plug
threads to prevent possible seizure.
3. Hand screw spark plug into cylinder head and
tighten with a torque wrench and a proper
socket.
1. Proper socket
2. Improper socket
Spark Plug Chart
NOTE: Refer to next page for NGK Spark Plug
Symbol Explanation.
ENGINE
SPARK
PLUG
TORQUE
Nm (lbfft)
GAP
mm (inch)
717
787
947
NGK
BR8ES
24 (17)
0.5-0.6
(.020-.024)
A00E0BA
2
1
08-02-18
NGK Spark Plug Symbol Explanation
10: 1.0 mm (.040")
11: 1.1 mm (.044")
13: 1.3 mm (.050")
14: 1.4 mm (.055")
15: 1.5 mm (.060")
20: 2.0 mm (.080")
B R 8
E S
15
Thread
diameter
Heat rating
numbers
Reach
Firing end
construction
Construction
PREFIX SUFFIX
WIDE GAP
19 mm
(3/4")
Taper
Seat
12.7 mm
(1/2")
11.2 mm
(7/16")
21 mm
(53/54")
E:
F:
H:
L:
Z:
2 Hot
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 Cold
18 mm
14 mm
10 mm
12 mm
8 mm
12 mm x 19 mm
Reach
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
J:
Special Design
Single Ground
Special Alloy
Dual Ground
Special Alloy
Racing Type
Racing Version
of V-Type
Half Heat Range
Standard Center
Electrode
Fine Wire Center
Electrode
Booster Gap
V-Grooved Center
Electrode
A:
GV:
B:
C:
G:
L:
S:
V:
X:
Y:
Blank
18 mm 12 mm
(31/64")
14 mm 9.5 mm
(3/8")
F02H0MS
Compact Type
Projected
Insulator Type
Resistor Type
Surface Discharge
Inductive
Suppressor Type
M:
P:
R:
U:
Z:
A01E1PS
Standard
Type
CROSSCUTS AND GAP STYLES OF SPARK PLUGS
Surface
Discharge Type
Projected
Insulator Type
Taper
Seat Type
V-Type
Subsection 03 (CHARGING SYSTEM)
08-03-1
CHARGING SYSTEM 0
GENERAL
Magneto
The purpose of the charging system is to keep the
battery at a full state of charge.
The magneto is the primary source of electrical
energy. It transforms magnetic field into electric
current (AC).
717 Engine
The magneto has a three-pole coil. Capacity is 160
watts.
787 and 947 Engines
The magneto has a 3 phase, Y wound stator on
18 poles. Capacity is 180 watts.
Rectifier/Regulator
717 Engine
A half-wave rectifier receives magneto AC current
and transforms it into direct current (DC) to allow
battery charging.
Included in the same unit, a regulator keeps volt-
age at a steady level (14.5 to 14.8 volts) to prevent
any damage to components.
787 and 947 Engines
A dual 1/2 wave series rectifier receives the mag-
neto AC current and transforms it into direct cur-
rent (DC) to allow battery charging.
Included in the same unit, a regulator keeps volt-
age at a steady level (14.5 to 14.8 volts) to prevent
any damage to components.
Battery
The battery is the DC source for the electric start-
er, the Multi-Purpose Electronic Module and all ac-
cessories.
Fuse
GTS Model
A 15 A fuse protects the charging system.
All Models Except GTS and XP Limited
Two 15 A fuses protect the charging system. The
first one is mounted on the MPEM and the other
one is located in the rear electrical box.
XP Limited
Two 15 A fuses protect the charging system. The
first one is mounted on the MPEM and the other
one is located in the front electrical box.
All Models
If the battery is regularly discharged, check fuse
condition.
The rectifier/regulator could be the culprit of a blown
fuse. To check, simply disconnect the rectifier/
regulator from the circuit.
If the fuse still burns, check for a defective wire.
TESTING PROCEDURE
NOTE: First, ensure that battery is in good condi-
tion prior to performing the following tests.
Rectifier/Regulator
NOTE: All models with a 947 engine, the rectifier/
regulator is integrated in the MPEM.
1. Due to internal circuitry, there is no static test
available.
DYNAMIC TEST
Current Test
Proceed as follows:
Start engine.
Lay an inductive ammeter on positive cable of
battery.
Bring engine to approximately 5500 RPM.
Depending on battery charge, current reading
should be approximately 4 amperes for the 717
engine or 5 amperes for the 787 and 947 engines.
If not, check magneto output prior to concluding
that rectifier is faulty.
-
CAUTION
Do not use a higher rated fuse as this cause
severe damage.
08-03-2
Voltage Test
Proceed as follows:
Start engine.
Connect a multimeter to battery posts. Set mul-
timeter to Vdc scale.
Bring engine to approximately 5500 RPM.
If multimeter reads over 15 volts, regulator is de-
fective. Replace it.
NOTE: If it is continually necessary to add distilled
water to the battery, this indicates an over voltage
situation, requiring replacement of the rectifier/
regulator. If, on the other hand, the battery will not
stay charged, the problem can be any of the
charging circuit components. If these all check
good, you would be accurate in assuming the
problem to be in the rectifier/regulator.
If there is no charging at the battery with the pre-
ceding voltage test, the following test can also be
performed.
SPX and GTS Models
Open the electrical box.
Disconnect the RED and BLACK wires of the rectifier/
regulator.
GS and GTI Models
Disconnect the connector housing of the rectifier/
regulator.
Using an appropriate terminal remover (Snap-on
TT600-4), remove the RED and BLACK wires from
the tab housing of the rectifier/regulator.
Reconnect the connector housing.
Connect the positive probe of a multimeter to the
RED wire and the negative probe to the BLACK
wire.
Set multimeter to Vdc scale.
Start and rev engine to 3500 RPM. The obtained
value should be between 12 and 25 Vdc.
NOTE: If the rectifier/regulator is within the speci-
fication, either the MPEM or wiring harness be-
tween the rectifier and battery is defective. If the
rectifier/regulator is out of specification and the bat-
tery charging coil (or stator) test good, the rectifier/
regulator is defective.
Battery Charging Coil
717 Engine
1. Disconnect the magneto wiring harness con-
nector.
295 000 131).
3. Check resistance between the YELLOW and
YELLOW/BLACK wires of the magneto har-
ness adapter. Refer to the following table.
NOTE: A short circuit will read 0 ohm (or close to)
on ohmmeter.
1. Multimeter
2. Magneto harness adapter
3. YELLOW and YELLOW/BLACK wires
DYNAMIC TEST
nector.
295 000 131).
3. Connect test probes of the multimeter to the
YELLOW and YELLOW/BLACK wires of the 4-pin
magneto harness adapter.
4. Start and rev engine to 3500 RPM. The ob-
tained value should be between 25 and 40 Vac.
5. If the battery charging coil is out of specifica-
tion, replace it.
PART NAME
ADAPTER
WIRE COLOR
RESISTANCE
()
Battery
charging coil
YELLOW with
YELLOW/BLACK
0.05-0.6
F02H0KA
1 2 3
08-03-3
Stator
787 and 947 Engines
nector.
295 000 136).
3. Check resistance between two of the YELLOW
wires. The resistance should be between 0.1 to
1.0 ohm.
1. Multimeter
3. YELLOW wires
4. Place either meter lead into the remaining YEL-
LOW wire and note the resistance (same as
step no. 3). If the readings are out of specifica-
tion, the stator will need to be replaced.
STATIC TEST: INSULATION
nector.
295 000 136).
3. Insert multimeter positive (+) probe to one of
the YELLOW wire of the 6-pin magneto har-
ness adapter.
4. Ground the multimeter negative (-) probe to the
engine or the stator iron core and note the read-
ing.
1. Multimeter
3. Positive (+) probe to YELLOW wire
4. Negative (-) probe to ground
5. Repeat test with the other two YELLOW wires
of the 6-pin magneto harness adapter.
NOTE: There should be no continuity (infinity) be-
tween the stator insulated coils and ground. If
there is a reading, the stator coils and/or the wir-
ing from the coils is grounded and needs to be
replaced or repaired.
DYNAMIC TEST
nector.
295 000 136).
3. Connect test probes of the multimeter to two
of the YELLOW wires of the 6-pin magneto har-
ness adapter.
4. Set multimeter to Vac scale.
5. Start and rev engine to 3500 RPM. The ob-
tained value should be between 45 and 70 Vac.
6. If the stator is out of specification, replace it.
F01H5ZA
1 3
3 2
F01H60A
1 3
2
4
08-03-4
BATTERY
Troubleshooting
Removal
Proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the BLACK negative cable first.
2. Disconnect the RED positive cable last.
3. Remove the vent line from the battery.
4. Remove the holding strap(s).
5. Withdraw battery from watercraft being careful
not lean it so that electrolyte flows out of vent
elbow.
Cleaning
Clean the battery casing, caps, cables and battery
posts using a solution of baking soda and water.
Remove corrosion from battery cable terminals
and battery posts using a firm wire brush. Rinse
with clear water and dry well.
Inspection
Visually inspect battery casing for cracks or other
possible damage. If casing is damaged, replace
battery and thoroughly clean battery tray and
close area with water and baking soda.
Inspect battery posts for security of mounting.
Inspect for cracked or damaged battery caps, re-
place defective caps.
Electrolyte Level
Check electrolyte level in each cell, add distilled
water up to upper level line.
Battery Testing
There are 2 types of battery tests: unloaded and
loaded. An unloaded test is made on a battery
without discharging current. It is the simplest and
commonly used. A loaded test gives more accura-
cy of the battery condition.
SYMPTOM: DISCHARGED OR WEAK BATTERY
CAUSE REMEDY
1. Battery posts and/or
cable terminal
oxidized.
Clean and coat with
dielectric grease.
2. Loose or bad
connections.
Check wiring and
connector cleanliness,
damaged or short circuit.
3. Faulty battery
(sulfated, doesnt
keep a full charge,
damaged casing,
loose post).
Replace.
4. 15 amp fuse(s) burnt
or faulty rectifier.
First check fuse.
If it is in good condition,
check rectifier/regulator.
5. Faulty battery
charging coil
(or stator).
Replace.
N
WARNING
Battery BLACK negative cable must always
be disconnected first and connected last.
Never charge or boost battery while in-
stalled in watercraft.
N
WARNING
Electrolyte is poisonous and dangerous.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing.
Wear a suitable pair of non-absorbent
gloves when removing the battery by hand.
-
CAUTION
Should any electrolyte spillage occur, imme-
diately wash off with a solution of baking
soda and water.
-
CAUTION
Do not allow cleaning solution to enter bat-
tery.
N
WARNING
Battery caps do not have vent holes. Make
sure that vent line is not obstructed.
-
CAUTION
Add only distilled water in an activated bat-
tery.
08-03-5
Unload Test
Check charge condition using either a hydrometer
or multimeter.
With a multimeter, voltage readings appear in-
stantly to show the state of charge. Always re-
spect polarity. A fully charge battery will have a
reading of 12.6 Vdc.
A hydrometer measures the charge of a battery in
terms of specific gravity of the electrolyte. A fully
charge battery will have a specific gravity be-
tween 1.265 to 1.280.
Most hydrometers give a true reading at 21C
(70F).
1. Specific gravity 1.265
In order to obtain correct readings, adjust the ini-
tial reading by adding .004 points to the hydrom-
eter readings for each 5.5C (10F) above 21C
(70F) and by subtracting .004 point for every
5.5C (10F) below 21C (70F).
This chart will be useful to find the correct read-
ing.
Load Test
This is the best test of battery condition under a
starting load. Use a load testing device that has an
adjustable load.
Apply a load of 3 times the ampere-hour rating of
the battery. At 14 seconds into the test, check
battery voltage; if battery is in good condition, it
will have at least 10.5 Vdc.
Battery Storage
Disconnect and remove battery from watercraft
as explained in Removal.
Check electrolyte level in each cell, add distilled
water up to upper level line.
The battery must always be stored in fully charged
condition. If required, charge until specific gravity
of 1.265 is obtained.
A17E0JA
1
ELECTROLYTE
TEMPERATURE OPERATION TO
PERFORM
C F
38
32
27
100
90
80
.012
.008
.004
Add
to the
reading
21 70 correct reading
16
10
4
-1
60
50
40
30
.004
.008
.012
.016
Subtract
from the
reading
EXAMPLE NO. 1
Temperature above 21C (70F):
Hydrometer reading: 1.250
Electrolyte temperature: -1C (30F)
Subtract .016 Sp. Gr.
Corrected Sp. Gr. is 1.234
EXAMPLE NO. 2
Temperature above 21C (70F):
Hydrometer reading: 1.235
Electrolyte temperature: 38C (100F)
Add .012 Sp. Gr.
Corrected Sp. Gr. is 1.247
-
CAUTION
Do not overfill.
-
CAUTION
Battery electrolyte temperature must not ex-
ceed 50C (122F). The casing should not
feel hot.
08-03-6
Clean battery terminals and cable connections using
a wire brush. Apply a light coat of dielectric grease
on terminals.
Clean battery casing and caps using a solution of
baking soda and water.
Rinse battery with clear water and dry well using
a clean cloth.
Store battery on a wooden shelf in a cool dry
place. Such conditions reduce self-discharging
and keep fluid evaporation to a minimum. Keep
battery away from dew, high moisture and direct
sunlight.
During the storage period, recheck electrolyte lev-
el and specific gravity readings at least every
month. If necessary, keep the battery at its upper
level line and near full charge as possible (trickle
charge).
Activation of a New Battery
A new battery is factory fresh dry charged. For
storage purposes, it is fitted with a temporary
sealing tube.
NOTE: In case of accidental premature removal
of caps or sealing tube, battery should be given a
full charge.
Perform the following operations anytime a new
battery is to be installed.
1. Remove the sealing tube from the vent elbow.
2. Remove caps and fill battery to UPPER LEVEL
line with electrolyte (specific gravity: 1.265 at
21C (70F)).
NOTE: This battery may fill slower than others
due to the anti-spill check ball design.
1. Sealing tube removed
2. Battery electrolyte
3. Upper level line
3. Allow the battery to stand for 30 minutes MIN-
IMUM so that electrolyte soak through battery
cells.
1. 30 minutes
-
CAUTION
Do not allow cleaning solution to enter bat-
tery.
N
WARNING
Never charge or boost battery while in-
stalled in watercraft.
-
CAUTION
Do not remove the sealing tube or loosen
battery caps unless activation is desired.
N
WARNING
Failure to remove the sealing tube could re-
sult in an explosion.
A17E0FB
2
1
3
A17E0GA
1
08-03-7
4. Readjust the electrolyte level to the UPPER
LEVEL line.
1. Battery electrolyte
2. Upper level line
5. Connect a 2 A battery charger for 3 to 5 hours.
Step : Connect + lead to battery + post
Step : Connect - lead to battery - post
Step : Plug battery charger
6. Disconnect battery charger.
Step : Unplug battery charger
Step : Disconnect - lead
Step : Disconnect + lead
7. Test battery state of charge. Use a hydrometer.
1. Specific gravity 1.265
8. If electrolyte level has dropped after charging,
fill with distilled water to UPPER LEVEL line. Af-
ter water is added, continue charging for 1 to 2
hours to mix water with electrolyte.
9. Reinstall caps and clean any electrolyte spillage
using a solution of baking soda and water.
Charging a Used Battery
For best results, battery should be charged when
the electrolyte and the plates are at room temper-
ature. A battery that is cold may not accept cur-
rent for several hours after charging begun.
-
CAUTION
If charging rate raises higher than 2.4 A re-
duce it immediately. If cell temperature rises
higher than 50C (122F) or if the casing feels
hot, discontinue charging temporarily or re-
duce the charging rate.
N
WARNING
Always charge in a well ventilated area. Al-
ways turn battery charger off prior to discon-
necting cables.
A17E0RB
1
2
A17E0IA
- +
2 1
3
1
2
3
N
WARNING
Never charge battery while installed in wa-
tercraft.
A17E0IB
- +
1
3 2
1
2
3
A17E0JA
1
08-03-8
Do not charge a frozen battery. If the battery
charge is very low, the battery may freeze. If it is
suspected to be frozen, keep it in a heated area
for about 2 hours before charging.
The time required to charge a battery will vary de-
pending on some factors such as:
Battery temperature: The charging time is in-
creased as the temperature goes down. The
current accepted by a cold battery will remain
low. As the battery warms up, it will accept a
higher rate of charge.
State of charge: Because the electrolyte is
nearly pure water in a completely discharged
battery, it cannot accept current as well as elec-
trolyte. This is the reason the battery will not
accept current when the charging cycle first be-
gins. As the battery remains on the charger, the
current from the charger causes the electrolytic
acid content to rise which makes the electro-
lyte a better conductor and then, the battery
will accept a higher charging rate.
Type of charger: Battery chargers vary in the
amount of voltage and current that they can
supply. Therefore, the time required for the bat-
tery to begin accepting measurable current will
also vary.
Charging a Very Flat or Completely Discharged
Battery
The battery charger should have an adjustable
charging rate. Variable adjustment is preferred,
but a unit which can be adjusted in small incre-
ments is acceptable.
The battery charger must be equipped with an
ammeter capable of accurately measuring current
of less than 1 ampere.
Unless this procedure is properly followed, a good
battery may be needlessly replaced.
Measure the voltage at the battery posts with
an accurate voltmeter. If it is below 10 volts, the
battery will accept current at very low rate, in
term of milliamperes, because electrolyte is
nearly pure water as explained above. It could
be some time before the charging rate increas-
es. Such low current flow may not be detect-
able on some charger ammeters and the
battery will seem not to accept any charge.
Exceptionally for this particular case, set the
charger to a high rate.
NOTE: Some chargers have a polarity protection
feature which prevents charging unless the charg-
er leads are connected to the correct battery ter-
minals. A completely discharged battery may not
have enough voltage to activate this circuitry,
even though the leads are connected properly.
This will make it appear that the battery will not
accept a charge. Follow the charger manufactur-
ers instruction on how to bypass or override this
circuitry so that the charger will turn on and
charge a low-voltage battery.
Since the battery chargers vary in the amount
of voltage and current they provide, the time
required for the battery to accept measurable
charger current might be up to approximately
10 hours or more.
If the charging current is not up to a measurable
amount at the end of about 10 hours, the bat-
tery should be replaced.
If the charging current is measurable before the
end or at the end of about 10 hours, the battery
is good and charging should be completed in
the normal manner as specified in Activation
of a new battery.
It is recommended that any battery recharged
by this procedure be load tested prior to return-
ing it to service.
Charging Two or More Batteries at a
Time
Connect all positive battery posts together and
use a charger with a capacity (rated) equal to:
number of battery to be charged multiply by 2 A.
For example: Charging 5 batteries at a time re-
quires a 10 A rated charger (5 x 2 A = 10 A).
N
WARNING
Always charge battery in a well ventilated
area.
08-03-9
TYPICAL
1. Two batteries = 4 A
Battery Installation
Proceed as follows:
1. Install battery in its emplacement.
2. Secure vent line to the battery and support. En-
sure vent line is not kinked or obstructed.
3. First connect RED positive cable.
4. Connect BLACK negative cable last.
NOTE: On the SPX model, secure the negative
battery cable on top of the small ground wire with-
out using a washer.
SPX MODEL
1. Negative battery cable on top of small ground wire
5. Apply dielectric grease on battery posts.
6. Verify cable routing and attachment.
GTS Model
Secure RED positive battery cable using right
strap of battery.
GTS MODEL
1. Strap retaining RED positive cable
2. Vent tube connected and secured in support
N
WARNING
Always charge battery(ies) in a well ventilat-
ed area.
N
WARNING
Always connect battery cables exactly in the
specified order, RED positive cable first
BLACK negative cable last.
N
WARNING
Vent line must be free and open. Avoid skin
contact with electrolyte.
A17E0PA
- +
+ -
1
F01H63A
1
F01H0AA
2
1
Subsection 04 (STARTING SYSTEM)
08-04-1
STARTING SYSTEM 0
717 Engine
F00H0BT
6
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
7
8
9
10
11
5
3
2
1
12
13
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
Loctite 242
Dielectric grease
17
14
Loctite 271
Ground cable
15
16
Loctite 242
4
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
FLAT RATE PARTS
08-04-2
787 Engine
25 Nm
(18 lbfft)
F00H13S
6
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
7
8
9
10
11
5
3
2
1
12
13
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
Loctite 242
Dielectric
grease
17
22 Nm
(16 lbfft )
14
Loctite 271
Ground cable
15
19
Loctite 242
4
16
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
Loctite 242
16
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
Loctite 242
18
FLAT RATE PARTS
08-04-3
947 Engine
F06H1XS
17
Loctite 242
Dielectric
grease
10
Loctite
242 10
12
Loctite 271
Ground cable
Synthetic
grease
7
11
8
9
8
6
1
2
3
5
Synthetic
grease
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
08-04-4
GENERAL
Causes of troubles are not necessarily related to
starter but may be due to a burnt fuse, faulty bat-
tery, start/stop switch, safety lanyard switch,
MPEM, solenoid, electrical cables or connections.
Check these components before removing start-
er. Consult also the starting system troubleshoot-
ing table on next page for a general view of possi-
ble problems.
Fuse
Make sure 5 A fuse on MPEM is in good condi-
tion.
The solenoid may be the cause of a burnt fuse. If
the solenoid checks good, one of the accessory
may be defective.
Battery
To check battery condition, refer to STARTING SYS-
TEM 08-04.
MPEM
If 2 short beeps are not heard when installing the
safety lanyard, refer to DIGITALLY ENCODED SE-
CURITY SYSTEM 08-06.
Engine Start/Stop Switch
Switch condition can be checked with an ohmme-
ter.
Disconnect the switch YELLOW/RED wire. Con-
nect 1 test probe to the YELLOW/RED wire and
the other test probe to ground.
Measure resistance, it must be an open circuit
(switch is normally open). Depress and hold switch,
the ohmmeter should read close to 0 ohm.
Safety Lanyard Switch
The following continuity tests can be performed
using an ohmmeter:
Disconnect switch wires.
Safety Lanyard Removed
YELLOW wires. Measure resistance, there should
be no continuity (open circuit).
Connect one test probe to the WHITE/GRAY wire
and the other test probe to the switch terminal.
Measure resistance, it must be close to 0 ohm.
Connect one test probe to the BLACK wire and
the other test probe to the switch ring. Measure
resistance, it must be close to 0 ohm.
Safety Lanyard on Switch
YELLOW wires. Measure resistance, it must be
close to 0 ohm.
Solenoid
NOTE: Solenoid is located in the electrical box.
Inspect connections and clean as necessary.
Static Test: Continuity
With a multimeter, check primary winding resis-
tance. It should be approximately 5 ohms.
There should be no continuity between the posi-
tive posts of the solenoid.
Dynamic Test
Depress start/stop button and measure the volt-
age on the solenoid positive posts with a multim-
eter.
If there is no voltage and battery is in good condi-
tion, replace the solenoid.
Electrical Cables or Connections
Check all connections, cables and wires. Tighten
any loose cables. Replace any chafe wires.
N
WARNING
Short circuiting electric starter is always a
danger, therefore disconnect the battery
ground cable before carrying out any kind of
maintenance on starting system. Do not
place tools on battery.
08-04-5
STARTING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
Starter does not turn. Burnt 5 A fuse. Check wiring condition and replace
fuse.
Poor contact of battery terminal(s). Clean and tighten terminal(s).
Poor battery ground cable connection. Clean and tighten.
Weak battery. Recharge or replace battery.
Poor contact of start/stop switch,
safety lanyard switch or solenoid.
Replace.
Open circuit: start/stop switch or
solenoid.
Replace.
Safety lanyard or MPEM. Refer to DIGITALLY ENCODED
SECURITY SYSTEM 08-06.
Starter engages; but does
not crank the engine.
Poor contact of brush. Straighten commutator and brush.
Burnt commutator. Turn commutator in lathe.
Worn commutator segments. Undercut mica.
Shorted armature. Repair or replace armature.
Weak brush spring tension. Replace brush holder or spring.
Weak magnet. Replace yoke assembly.
Worn bushings. Replace clutch.
Weak battery. Recharge or replace battery.
Starter turns, but
overrunning clutch pinion
does not mesh with ring
gear.
Worn clutch pinion gear. Replace clutch.
Defective clutch. Replace clutch.
Poor movement of clutch on splines. Clean and correct.
Worn clutch bushing. Replace clutch.
Worn ring gear. Replace ring gear.
Starter motor keeps
running.
Shorted solenoid winding. Replace solenoid.
Melted solenoid contacts. Replace solenoid.
Sticking or defective starter clutch. Lubricate or replace.
Presence of salt water in the electrical
box which gives continuity.
Verify electrical box watertightness.
08-04-6
STARTER REMOVAL
Disconnect BLACK cable ground connection from
battery.
Disconnect RED cable connection from battery.
717 and 787 Engines
Remove the following parts:
cables from starter
screw no. 13 of starter rear support
starter mount screws no. 16
947 Engine
Disconnect starter cables and loosen Allen screws
no. 16 retaining starter bracket to engine.
1. Positive starter cable
2. Negative starter cable
3. Allen screw
Remove bracket and starter.
NOTE: To remove the starter drive assembly, mag-
neto flywheel has to be removed. Refer to MAG-
NETO SYSTEM 04-04 and BOTTOM END 04-06.
STARTER DISASSEMBLY
717 and 787 Engines
Before disassembling, trace index marks on yoke
no. 1 and clutch housing no. 10 to ease further
assembly.
TYPICAL
1. Trace indexing marks
Remove starter support nuts no. 12 then through
bolts no. 5. Separate end frame no. 3 from yoke
assembly no. 1. Withdraw yoke assembly from
armature no. 11.
Brush holder no. 2 can be removed from end frame
no. 3 by unscrewing nut retaining terminal.
Check that the radial play between the armature
shaft and end frame is not greater than 0.20 mm
(.008 in). Replace end frame if so.
Tap the pinion stop collar no. 7 using a screwdriv-
er. Remove circlip no. 6. Disassemble pinion stop
collar no. 7 and spring no. 8.
1. Pinion stop collar
N
WARNING
Always disconnect ground cable first and re-
connect last.
F06H1EA
2 3
3 1
F01H0PA
1
A03E04A
1
08-04-7
Turn clutch assembly no. 9 clockwise to remove
it from armature assembly no. 11.
Pull housing from armature.
947 Engine
Locate index marks on yoke no. 1 and end covers
no. 3 and no. 6.
1. Index marks
Loosen through bolts no. 5.
1. Through bolts
Remove end cover no. 3 and gasket on armature
shaft side.
Remove thrust washer no. 7 from armature shaft.
1. Thrust washer
Remove the other end cover no. 6 and gasket.
Remove the 3 washers no. 8 and no. 9 from ar-
mature shaft.
1. Washers
Remove armature no. 11.
1. Pull armature shaft
F06H1FA
1
F06H1GA
1
F06H1HA
1
F06H1IA
1
F06H1JA 1
08-04-8
Release brush wires of yoke from brush holder
no. 2.
Remove brush holder no. 2.
1. Remove brush holder
To remove brushes from yoke no. 1, loosen nut
and remove washers.
1. Loosen nut and remove washers
Remove brushes.
To remove bearing and seal in end cover, release
tabs of retainer.
1. Retainer
CLEANING
Discard all O-rings.
Clean brushes and holders with a clean cloth
soaked in solvent. Brushes must be dried thor-
oughly with a clean cloth.
Blow brush holders clean using compressed air.
Remove dirt, oil or grease from commutator using
a clean cloth soaked in suitable solvent. Dry well
using a clean, dry cloth.
Clean engine ring gear teeth and drive unit
(clutch).
NOTE: Bushings or bearings must not be cleaned
with grease dissolving agents.
Immerse all metal components in cleaning solu-
tion. Dry using a clean, dry cloth.
F06H1KA
1
F06H1LA
1
-
CAUTION
Yoke assy and drive unit assembly must not
be immersed in cleaning solvent.
N
WARNING
Always wear safety glasses when using
compressed air.
F06H1MA
1
08-04-9
PARTS INSPECTION
11, Armature
NOTE: An ohmmeter may be used for the follow-
ing testing procedures, except for the one con-
cerning shorted windings in armature.
Check commutator for roughness, burnt or scored
surface. If necessary, turn commutator on a lathe,
enough to resurface only.
Check commutator for mica depth. If depth is less
than 0.20 mm (.008 in), undercut mica. Be sure
that no burrs are left and no copper dust remains
between segments after undercutting operation
is completed.
1. Commutator undercut 0.20 mm (.008 in)
Check commutator out of round condition with V-
shaped blocks and an indicator. If commutator out
of round is more than 0.40 mm (.016 in), commu-
tator should be turned on a lathe.
Check commutator outer diameter. If less than
27 mm (1.063 in), replace.
2, Brush Holder
Check brush holder for insulation using an ohm-
meter. Place one test probe on insulated brush
holder and the other test probe on brush holder
plate. If continuity is found, brush holder has to be
repaired or replaced.
4, Brush
Measure brush length. If less than 8.5 mm (.335 in),
replace them.
NOTE: New brush length is 12 mm (.472 in).
1. New
2. Wear limit, 8.5 mm (.335 in)
9, Overrunning Clutch
Pinion of overrunning clutch should turn smoothly
in clockwise direction, and should not slip in a
counterclockwise direction. If defective, replace.
Check pinion teeth for wear and damage. If defec-
tive, replace.
NOTE: Always check engine ring gear teeth for
wear and damage. If defective replace ring gear.
Refer to MAGNETO 04-04.
STARTER ASSEMBLY
Reverse the order of disassembly to reassemble
starter. However, attention should be paid to the
following operations.
717 and 787 Engines
Prior to assembling, coat sliding surfaces on ar-
mature shaft splines, overrunning clutch and
bushing (717 engine) with G.E. Versilube G 341 M
or ESSO Beacon 325 lubricant or equivalent.
After placing pinion stop collar no. 7 on armature
shaft no. 11, fit circlip no. 6 into armature shaft,
then make sure that it is properly secured.
F01H0RA
1
A03E06A
A03E05A
2
1
08-04-10
Slide stop collar no. 7 over circlip no. 6 and se-
cure in place by punching it at 2 or 3 places.
1. Armature shaft
2. Circlip
3. Pinion stop collar
4. Punch
1,10, Yoke Assembly and Clutch
Housing
Align previously traced indexing marks.
TYPICAL
1. Align marks
Open brushes no. 4 and slide over commutator.
Align end frame locating notch with yoke locating
protrusion and properly sit brush holder no. 2 into
yoke no. 1.
1. Locating protrusion is the higher one
1. Brush holder locating notch
To ease end frame installation, retain brush holder
with a small screwdriver while installing end
frame.
A03E0EA
1
2
4
3
F01H0QA
1
F01H0SA
1
F01H0TA
1
08-04-11
Step : Retaining brush holder with a screwdriver
Step : Align here
Align end frame notch with brush holder notch/
yoke protrusion.
947 Engine
Install new O-rings and gaskets.
Insert thrust washer no. 7 onto armature shaft
with the non-metallic surface facing the end cover.
1. Non-metallic surface on this side
Install the 3 washers no. 8 and no. 9 onto arma-
ture shaft, with the thicker one in the middle.
1. Thick washer in the middle
When installing end covers no. 3 and no. 6 to
yoke, align index marks.
Apply Loctite 271 (red) on through bolts no. 5 and
STARTER INSTALLATION
procedure. However, pay particular attention to
the following.
Make sure that starter and engine mating surfac-
es are free of debris. Serious trouble may arise if
starter is not properly aligned.
717 and 787 Engines
13,16, Screw
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on threads and torque
starter screws to 22 Nm (16 lbfft).
17, Nut
Connect the RED positive cable to the starter and
torque nut to 6 Nm (53 lbfin). Apply dielectric
grease on terminal and nut.
-
CAUTION
Make sure end frame fits perfectly on yoke.
F01H0UA
2
1
1
2
F06H1HA
1
F06H1NA
1
08-04-12
14,15, Screw and Teeth Washer
Apply Loctite 271 (red) to screw.
Connect BLACK negative cable to starter using
flat washer, teeth washer and screw. Torque screw
to 22 Nm (16 lbfft). Apply dielectric grease on
terminal and screw.
717 ENGINE SHOWN
Step : Torque nut to 6 Nm (53 lbfin)
Step : Apply Loctite 271 on screw
Step : Torque screw to 22 Nm (16 lbfft)
Step : Apply dielectric grease
787 Engine
18, Locking Collar
Install the locking collar of the fuel hose. Apply
Loctite 242 (blue) on nut no. 19 and torque to
25 Nm (18 lbfft).
787 ENGINE
1. Locking collar
2. Nut
947 Engine
10, Screw
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) to Allen screws of starter
bracket and torque to 10 Nm (89 lbfin).
17, Nut
Connect the RED positive cable to the starter and
torque nut to 6 Nm (53 lbfin). Apply dielectric
grease on terminal and nut.
N
WARNING
Always connect RED positive cable first then
BLACK negative cable last. Whenever con-
necting the RED positive cable to the starter
motor make sure the battery cables are dis-
connected to prevent electric shock.
F01H1JC
1 4
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1 2 F07H03A
08-04-13
12, Screw
Apply Loctite 271 (red) to Allen screw. Connect
BLACK negative starter cable using flat washer,
teeth washer and screw. Torque to screw 10 Nm
(89 lbfin). Apply dielectric grease.
947 ENGINE
1. Torque nut to 6 Nm (53 lbfin), apply dielectric grease and install
protection cover
2. Apply Loctite 271 to threads and torque screw to 10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
3. Apply Loctite 242 to threads and torque screw to 10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
N
WARNING
Always connect RED positive cable first then
BLACK negative cable last. Whenever con-
necting the RED positive cable to the starter
motor make sure the battery cables are dis-
connected to prevent electric shock.
F06H1EA
2 3
3 1
08-04-14
STARTER SPECIFICATION
717 and 787 Engines
947 Engine
Nominal output 0.6 kW
Voltage 12 V
Rated time 30 seconds
Rotation Counterclockwise (viewed from pinion side)
Weight Approx. 2 kg (4.4 lb)
Performance specification at 20C (68F) No load 11.5 V 20 A max. 5500 RPM
Load 8.5 V 170 A max. 2200 RPM
Stall 5 V 350 A max. 0 RPM
Battery 19 Ah
Nominal output 0.8 kW
Voltage 12 V
Rated time 30 seconds
Rotation Counterclockwise (viewed from pinion side)
Weight 1.7 kg (3.7 lb)
Performance specification at 20C (68F) No load 10.9 V 45 A max. 8600 RPM
Load 9 V 120 A max. 5350 RPM
Stall 2.25 V 390 A max. 0 RPM
Battery 12 V, 19 Ah
Subsection 05 (INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES)
08-05-1
INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES 0
GENERAL
It is possible to activate the instruments when the
engine is not running.
Make sure the safety lanyard is removed, then de-
press the start/stop button.
The timer of the MPEM will maintain the gauge(s)
activated during a period of approximately 33 sec-
onds.
INSPECTION
Exterior Temperature Sensor
GTX Limited
The temperature sensor is located in the storage
cover.
Remove the back panel of the storage cover to
access the temperature sensor.
1. Temperature sensor
To check if the temperature sensor is operational,
activate the Info Center and select the exterior
temperature mode.
Use a heat gun to warm up the sensor. The tem-
perature should raise rapidly on the gauge.
If not, replace the temperature sensor.
Lake Temperature Sensor
The lake temperature sensor is integrated with
the speed sensor located on the ride plate.
To check if the lake temperature sensor is opera-
tional, activate the Info Center and select the lake
temperature mode.
With a garden hose, spray the speed sensor with
water. The lake temperature on the Info Center
should adjust to the water temperature.
If not, replace the speed sensor.
Compass
GTX Limited
The compass is located in the storage cover.
Remove the back panel of the storage cover to
access the compass.
1. Compass
Remove the compass from the support.
Activate the Info Center.
Change the direction of the compass and keep it
horizontal ( 10). There should be a change of
direction on the Info Center.
NOTE: To check the accuracy of the compass,
you can use a portable compass and point it in the
same direction. Compare the given directions,
they should be the same.
F07H01A
1
F07H02A 1
08-05-2
Tachometer
GTX Limited
The PURPLE wire is the 12 Vdc power source of
the tachometer.
The BLACK wire is the ground.
The GRAY wire is the pulse signal from the multi-
purpose electronic module (MPEM).
Speed Sensor
GSX Limited, XP Limited, GTI and
GTX Limited
The speedometer gives a reading through a
speed sensor. Speed sensor is installed on riding
plate. It works with the water flow which turns a
magnetic paddle wheel that triggers an electronic
pick-up that in turn sends a speed signal to the
speedometer.
The paddle wheel is protected by the pick-up
housing.
1. Pick-up housing
2. Paddle wheel
To check if the speed sensor is operational, dis-
connect the speed sensor connector housing
from inside bilge.
Using an appropriate terminal remover (Snap-on
TT600-4), remove the PURPLE/YELLOW and
BLACK/ORANGE wires from the tab housing of
the speed sensor.
Reconnect the PURPLE/YELLOW and BLACK/
ORANGE wires in the receptacle housing.
Connect the positive probe of a multimeter to
speed sensor PURPLE/YELLOW wire and the
negative probe to speed sensor BLACK/ORANGE
wire.
With the safety lanyard removed, depress the start/
stop button to activate the MPEM timer.
Slowly rotate the paddle wheel. Every 1/8 turn,
the observed voltage should fluctuate between
5.5 and 8.5 Vdc.
Speedometer
GSX Limited, XP Limited, GTI and
GTX Limited
the speedometer.
The PURPLE/YELLOW wire is the pulse signal
from the speed sensor.
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
x 1000
0
Bombardier
R
F07H04A
2
1
F01H3VA
20
10
30 40
50
60
70
0
R
F07H05A
08-05-3
Info Center
TYPICAL
This is a LCD multifunction gauge. It features the
following functions:
fuel level
low fuel level
low oil level
low voltage
overheating
hourmeter
clock
maintenance information
chronometer
tachometer
speedometer
peak speed
average speed
trip meter
VTS (GSX Limited)
compass (GTX Limited)
exterior temperature (GTX Limited)
lake temperature
The Info Center also features a red warning LED
which blinks whenever one of the following cir-
cumstances occur: low fuel, low oil, low voltage
and overheating.
For example, if the fuel level is low, the LED and
the message LOW FUEL will blink.
As a self test, all LCD segments and the LED will
turn on for 3 seconds each time the watercraft is
started.
SCROLLING FUNCTIONS
Press the MODE button until the desired function
is displayed on the Info Center.
RESET A FUNCTION
To reset a function such as the chronometer, peak
speed, trip meter, etc., select the desired function
using the MODE button then press and hold the
SET button for 2 seconds.
DISPLAY PRIORITIES
The clock (and compass for the GTX Limited) is
the basic mode of the Info Center.
The chronometer, tachometer and speedometer
are the only other functions that may be chosen
to replace the clock mode.
If an another function is chosen, the clock mode
will be displayed again after 4 seconds.
In the event of a warning message such as low
fuel is displayed, the message will blink and over-
ride any other functions.
If more than one warning message is displayed,
the messages will blink and reappear every 4 sec-
onds.
LANGUAGE OPTION
While in the clock mode, press and hold the SET
button for 2 seconds. Language option will be dis-
played.
Press the MODE button to scroll language (En-
glish, French and Spanish).
Press the SET button to confirm the selected lan-
guage and return to the clock mode.
ENGLISH/METRIC OPTION
Press and hold both MODE and SET buttons for
2 seconds. The system will be automatically
changed.
CHRONOMETER
Select the chronometer mode and press the SET
button to start or stop the chronometer.
Press the SET button for 2 seconds to reset the
chronometer.
CLOCK SETTING
While in the clock mode, press and hold both
MODE and SET buttons for 2 seconds. The clock
will blink to confirm the setting mode.
Bombardier
F07H06A
08-05-4
Press the MODE button to adjust the hours and
the SET button to adjust the minutes.
Press again on both the MODE and SET buttons
to exit the setting mode (or the gauge will auto-
matically exit the setting mode after 10 seconds).
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
When the watercraft is due for a maintenance in-
spection, the message MAINT will blink.
To clear the MAINT message, press the SET
button for 2 seconds during the message blinking.
Verification
the Info Center.
The RED/PURPLE wire is the 12 Vdc from the bat-
tery protected by a 5 A fuse on the MPEM.
The accuracy of some features of the Info Center
can be checked with a potentiometer.
FUEL LEVEL
Disconnect the 4-circuit connector housing of the
Info Center.
Using an appropriate terminal remover, remove
the PINK wire from the tab housing.
Disconnect the 2-circuit connector housing which
contains a PURPLE and BLACK wires.
Remove the BLACK wire from the receptacle
housing.
Connect potentiometer test probes to the PINK
and BLACK wires.
Adjust potentiometer to the resistance values as
per following chart to test the accuracy of the
gauge.
NOTE: The gauge must be activated to obtain a
reading.
VTS
GSX Limited
Info Center.
Connect potentiometer test probes to the BROWN/
WHITE and BROWN/BLACK wires.
gauge.
reading.
RESISTANCE
()
FUEL LEVEL
LCD GRAPHIC
LOW FUEL
LEVEL RED
LIGHT
0 + 2.2 FULL OFF
17.8 2.2 7/8 OFF
27.8 2.2 3/4 OFF
37.8 2.2 5/8 OFF
47.8 2.2 1/2 OFF
57.8 2.2 3/8 OFF
67.8 2.2 1/4 OFF
77.8 2.2 1/8 ON
89.0 2.2 EMPTY ON
RESISTANCE
()
VTS LEVEL LCD
GRAPHIC
167.3 2.2 11/11 (UP)
153.0 2.2 10/11
138.7 2.2 9/11
124.4 2.2 8/11
110.1 2.2 7/11
95.8 2.2 6/11
81.5 2.2 5/11
67.2 2.2 4/11
52.9 2.2 3/11
38.6 2.2 2/11
24.3 2.2 1/11 (DOWN)
08-05-5
LAKE TEMPERATURE
Info Center which contains a BLACK/ORANGE
and TAN/ORANGE wires.
Connect potentiometer test probes to the BLACK/
ORANGE and TAN/ORANGE wires.
gauge.
reading.
EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE
Info Center which contains a TAN/WHITE and
BLACK/WHITE wires.
Connect potentiometer test probes to the TAN/
WHITE and BLACK/WHITE wires.
gauge.
reading.
Fuel Gauge/Low Oil Warning Light
SPX, GS, GTS, GTI and XP Limited
The fuel gauge has a pointer which indicates fuel
level in the tank.
The low oil warning light is part of the gauge. It
will light when injection oil level is low.
RESISTANCE
()
DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE (C)
25407.3 5 2
19911.1 10 2
15718.0 15 2
12495.0 20 2
10000.0 25 2
8054.9 30 2
6528.3 35 2
RESISTANCE
()
DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE (F)
22799.0 45 4
17262.0 55 4
13470.0 65 4
10496.3 75 4
8264.4 85 4
6528.3 95 4
RESISTANCE
()
DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE (C)
25590.1 5 2
20005.8 10 2
15761.7 15 2
12510.2 20 2
10000.0 25 2
8047.8 30 2
6518.7 35 2
RESISTANCE
()
DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE (F)
22919.8 45 4
17491.7 55 4
13487.5 65 4
10501.5 75 4
8252.0 85 4
6518.7 95 4
08-05-6
SPX, GTS AND XP LIMITED
1. Low oil warning light
GS AND GTI MODELS
1. Low oil warning light
Variable Trim Gauge
SPX and XP Limited
The trim gauge shows the riding angle of the wa-
tercraft.
TYPICAL
1. Bow up
2. Bow down
Accuracy of gauge can be checked with a potenti-
ometer.
Disconnect 2-circuit connector housing of
BROWN/BLACK and BROWN/WHITE wires of
gauge.
Connect potentiometer test probes to BROWN/
BLACK and BROWN/WHITE wires of gauge.
Adjust potentiometer to the resistance values
as per following chart to test accuracy of gauge.
NOTE: Gauge must be activated to obtain a read-
ing.
If gauge is not within the specifications, replace it.
1 0
Bombardier
F01G07A
1
Bombardier
F06H0DA
1
RESISTANCE ()
GAUGE NEEDLE
POSITION
10 - 45
95 0
180 + 45
VTS
Bombardier
F01H4RA
1
2
VTS
Bombardier
F01H0EA
+ 45
0
45
08-05-7
Fuel Baffle Pick Up Sender
The baffle pick-up has an integrated fuel sender.
To verify fuel sender, a resistance test should be
performed with a multimeter allowing the float to
move up through a sequence.
1. Pick up tube
2. Fuel sender
3. Baffle pick-up
The resistance measured between PINK/BLACK
and PINK wires must be in accordance with fuel
level (measured from under the flange) as speci-
fied in the following charts.
FUEL LEVEL AND RESISTANCE
(SPX)
FUEL LEVEL
(mm)
RESISTANCE
()
From 206.1 5 and more 0 + 2.2
From 189.1 to 206 5 17.8 2.2
From 162.1 to 189 5 27.8 2.2
From 135.1 to 162 5 37.8 2.2
From 108.1 to 135 5 47.8 2.2
From 81.1 to 108 5 57.8 2.2
From 54.1 to 81 5 67.8 2.2
From 40.1 to 54 5 77.8 2.2
From 0 to 40 5 89.8 2.2
F01F20A
1
2
3
(GTS)
FUEL LEVEL
(mm)
RESISTANCE
()
From 257.9 5 and more 0 + 2.2
From 234.4 to 257.8 5 17.8 2.2
From 200.9 to 234.3 5 27.8 2.2
From 167.4 to 200.8 5 37.8 2.2
From 134 to 167.3 5 47.8 2.2
From 100.5 to 133.9 5 57.8 2.2
From 67 to 100.4 5 67.8 2.2
From 40.1 to 66.9 5 77.8 2.2
From 0 to 40 5 89.8 2.2
(GS, GSX Limited, GTI and GTX Limited)
FUEL LEVEL
(mm)
RESISTANCE
()
From 248.9 5 and more 0 + 2.2
From 234.4 to 248.8 5 17.8 2.2
From 200.9 to 234.3 5 27.8 2.2
From 167.4 to 200.8 5 37.8 2.2
From 134.0 to 167.3 5 47.8 2.2
From 100.5 to 133.9 5 57.8 2.2
From 67.0 to 100.4 5 67.8 2.2
From 40.1 to 66.9 5 77.8 2.2
From 0 to 40.0 5 89.8 2.2
08-05-8
Oil Sensor
The sensor sends the signal to the low-oil level
light in the fuel gauge or the LED in the Info Cen-
ter.
1. Oil sensor
The bottom of the sensor has a small reservoir
with two small holes underneath to let the oil en-
ter inside and one at the top to let the air enter
allowing the oil to flow out.
When there is enough oil inside the oil tank (and
therefore in the sensor reservoir), the sensor de-
tects the liquid and the light DOES NOT turn on.
When the oil level goes at critical LOW level in-
side the oil tank (and therefore in sensor reser-
voir), the sensor detects the absence of liquid and
the light TURNS ON.
To check the oil sensor, unplug its connector and
pull sensor out of oil tank.
Using a multimeter, check the continuity between
the BLUE and BLUE/BLACK terminals.
When sensor is out of oil tank and its reservoir is
empty, resistance must be infinite (open circuit).
NOTE: Wait about 15-20 seconds before taking
any reading to give the oil enough time to flow out
or inside sensor reservoir.
Soak sensor in oil so that its reservoir fills up.
Maximum resistance should be approximately
2 (closed circuit).
1. Measure resistance here
2. Sensor reservoir
To Reinstall Sensor:
Remove rubber seal from sensor.
Install seal in oil tank hole.
Push sensor in seal.
Plug connector.
NOTE: This sensor turns the LED to ON if the
connector has been forgotten unconnected even
when there is enough oil in tank.
(XP Limited)
FUEL LEVEL
(mm)
RESISTANCE
()
From 325 5 and more 0 + 2.2
From 294 to 325 5 17.8 2.2
From 263 to 294 5 27.8 2.2
From 225 to263 5 37.8 2.2
From 190 to 225 5 47.8 2.2
From 149 to 190 5 57.8 2.2
From 93 to 149 5 67.8 2.2
From 41 to 93 5 77.8 2.2
From 0 to 41 5 89.8 2.2
F00H0LA 1
TEST CONDITION READING ()
Sensor OUT of oil (open circuit)
Sensor soaked IN oil 2 max. (closed circuit)
F03H0BA
1
2
08-05-9
VTS Switch
SPX, GSX Limited and XP Limited
Always confirm first that the fuse is in good con-
dition.
Disconnect BLACK wire, BLUE/WHITE wire and
GREEN/WHITE wire of VTS switch.
Using a multimeter, connect test probes to switch
BLACK and BLUE/WHITE wires; then, connect
test probes to switch BLACK and GREEN/WHITE
wires.
Measure resistance; in both test it should be high
when button is released and must be close to
zero when activated.
VTS Motor
Always confirm first that the fuse is in good con-
dition.
Motor condition can be checked with a multime-
ter. Install test probes on both BLUE/ORANGE
and GREEN/ORANGE wires. Measure resistance,
it should be close to 1.5 ohm.
If motor seems to jam and it has not reached the
end of its stroke, the following test could be per-
formed.
First remove motor, refer to VARIABLE TRIM SYS-
TEM 09-05. Then manually rotate worm to verify
VTS system actuating mechanism for free opera-
tion.
Connect motor through a 15 A fuse directly to the
battery.
Connect wires one way then reverse polarities to
verify motor rotation in both ways.
If VTS actuating mechanism is correct and the
motor turns freely in both ways, VTS module
could be defective.
If VTS motor does not stop at the end of its stroke
while installed, the motor could be defective.
VTS Control Module
It receives its current from the battery. It is pro-
tected by its own 7.5 A fuse.
RESISTANCE TEST
Disconnect BROWN/BLACK wire and BROWN/
WHITE wire of VTS control module.
Connect test probes of a multimeter to BROWN/
BLACK wire and BROWN/WHITE wire of VTS
control module.
NOTE: To permit VTS actuation when engine is
not running, remove safety lanyard from switch
and depress start/stop button to activate MPEM
timer.
Push on VTS switch down position until motor
stops.
Read the resistance on the ohmmeter, it should
indicate a resistance of 24 ohms 1%.
Push on VTS switch up position until motor stops.
Read the resistance on the ohmmeter, it should
indicate a resistance of 167 ohms 1%.
NOTE: If the VTS control module passes this re-
sistance test, it doesnt mean it is in perfect con-
dition.
RESISTANCE ()
NOZZLE
POSITION
167 1%
24 1%
UP
DOWN
Subsection 06 (DIGITALLY ENCODED SECURITY SYSTEM)
08-06-1
DIGITALLY ENCODED SECURITY
SYSTEM 0
GENERAL
The Digitally Encoded Security System (DESS)
features an anti-start protection against unautho-
rized use of the watercraft.
The following components are specially designed
for this system: Multi-Purpose Electronic Module
(MPEM), safety lanyard cap and safety lanyard
switch.
The safety lanyard cap has a magnet and a ROM
chip. The chip has a unique digital code.
The DESS circuitry in the watercraft MPEM is ac-
tivated at the factory. Therefore, a safety lanyard
must be programmed to start the engine.
NOTE: Actually, it is the memory of the MPEM
which is programmed to recognize the digital
code of the safety lanyard cap. This is achieved
with the MPEM programmer (P/N 529 034 500).
Refer to its Guide to program a safety lanyard.
The system is quite flexible. Up to eight safety
lanyards may be programmed in the memory of
the watercraft MPEM. They can also be erased.
NOTE: If desired, a safety lanyard can be used on
other watercraft equipped with the DESS.
The memory of the MPEM is permanent. If the
battery is disconnected, no information is lost.
The memory of the MPEM has also two self-
diagnostic modes.
When ordering a new MPEM from the regular
parts channel, the DESS circuitry will be activated.
08-06-2
Basic Self-Diagnostic Mode
It is self-activated when the safety lanyard cap is being installed on the watercraft switch. It gives imme-
diate monitoring. Some codes may occur only when pressing the start/stop button. Refer to the following
chart.
SIGNAL CAUSE REMEDY
2 short beeps
(while installing
safety lanyard on
watercraft switch)
Safety lanyard is
recognized by the MPEM.
Ignition is authorized, engine can start.
1 long beep
(while installing
safety lanyard on
watercraft switch or
when pressing
start/stop button)
Safety lanyard on switch
for more than 10 minutes
without starting engine.
Bad connection between
safety lanyard cap and
switch.
Remove and reinstall safety lanyard on switch.
Remove and replace the safety lanyard on the
switch until 2 short beeps are heard to indicate
the system is ready to allow engine starting.
Unprogrammed or
defective safety lanyard.
Use the safety lanyard that has been programmed
for the watercraft. If it does not work, check
safety lanyard condition with the programmer.
Replace safety lanyard if reported defective. If it
still does not work, enable more detail about the
failure.
Salt water in safety
lanyard cap.
Clean safety lanyard cap to remove salt water.
Improper operation of
MPEM or defective wiring
harness.
Enable advanced diagnostic mode to obtain more
detail about the failure.
8 short beeps Defective MPEM
(memory).
Replace MPEM.
Continuous beep Engine overheating. Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 03-01.
08-06-3
Advanced Self-Diagnostic Mode
It needs to be enabled manually. Proceed as follows:
1. Remove safety lanyard cap from watercraft switch.
2. Press 5 times on the watercraft start/stop button.
NOTE: 1 short beep and 1 long beep must be heard. They validate beginning of diagnostic mode.
3. Install safety lanyard on watercraft switch.
4. Press the watercraft start/stop button again.
NOTE: If everything is correct, engine will start. Otherwise, refer to the following chart.
If you need to listen again the coded beeps, remove safety lanyard and repeat the procedure to activate
the diagnostic mode.
If there is more than one problem, the MPEM will send only one error code. When the problem is solved,
the MPEM will send a second code and so on until all problems are resolved.
SIGNAL CAUSE REMEDY
No beep Engine actually starts. Everything is correct.
1 long and
1 short beeps
No safety lanyard has ever been
programmed in watercraft MPEM.
Use programmer and program a
safety lanyard. This code can occur
only when you receive a new MPEM
from the factory and no key has ever
been programmed.
2 short beeps MPEM can not read the digital code
of the safety lanyard cap or the
magnet is defective.
Check safety lanyard cap condition
with the MPEM programmer.
Replace safety lanyard if reported
defective.
Mixed wires at safety lanyard switch
connectors or bad connections.
Check switch wiring harness.
2 long beeps Wrong safety lanyard or bad
connection of the DESS wires.
Use the safety lanyard that has been
programmed for the watercraft. If
the problem is not resolved, check
safety lanyard cap condition with the
MPEM programmer. Replace safety
lanyard if reported defective.
3 short beeps Wiring harness of DESS switch is
grounded or there is a short circuit.
Check wiring harness and safety
lanyard switch.
09-01-1
Section 09 PROPULSION SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
JET PUMP.............................................................................................................................. 09-02-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 09-02-2
JET PUMP INSPECTION ON WATERCRAFT.................................................................... 09-02-2
REMOVAL........................................................................................................................... 09-02-5
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 09-02-6
CLEANING ......................................................................................................................... 09-02-9
PARTS INSPECTION.......................................................................................................... 09-02-9
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 09-02-12
PUMP PRESSURIZATION ................................................................................................. 09-02-18
INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................. 09-02-19
DRIVE SYSTEM..................................................................................................................... 09-03-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 09-03-5
REMOVAL........................................................................................................................... 09-03-5
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 09-03-9
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 09-03-9
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 09-03-11
INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................. 09-03-12
LUBRICATION.................................................................................................................... 09-03-15
REVERSE SYSTEM................................................................................................................ 09-04-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 09-04-2
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 09-04-2
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 09-04-3
ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................................... 09-04-5
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 09-04-8
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 09-04-8
ASSEMBLY ........................................................................................................................ 09-04-9
ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................................... 09-04-10
VARIABLE TRIM SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 09-05-1
GENERAL........................................................................................................................... 09-05-3
REMOVAL........................................................................................................................... 09-05-3
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 09-05-3
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 09-05-3
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 09-05-4
INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................. 09-05-4
ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................................... 09-05-5
Subsection 02 (JET PUMP)
09-02-1
JET PUMP 0
F00J05T
SPX/GTS
17
17
28
Loctite
271
10
29
8
7
6
9
29
25
23
26
24
27
18
19
11
14
13
12
Loctite
242
3
1
20 Nm
(15 lbfft)
Loctite
242
4
2
3
2
4
1
20 Nm
(15 lbfft)
Loctite
242
5
5
GS/GTS/GTI
SPX/
GSX Limited/
XP Limited/
GTX Limited
23
22
21
Loctite
518
Synthetic
grease
20
15
16
Loctite
518
Loctite
PST
Synthetic
oil
Right
Stuff
Right
Stuff
Loctite
518
All models except GS, GTS and GTI
Loctite
242
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-02-2
GENERAL
The jet pump housing and venturi are made of
plastic.
On the GS, GTS and GTI models, the jet pump hous-
ing is a one piece plastic unit, including the stator.
On other models, the jet pump housing has a sta-
tor made of bronze which offers greater strength.
The nozzle is made of plastic on the GS, GTS and
GTI models, and of aluminum on the other mod-
els.
Impeller Identification
To identify the impellers refer to the following il-
lustration and chart.
1. Stamped part number
JET PUMP INSPECTION ON
WATERCRAFT
To work on watercraft, securely install it on a stand.
Thus, if access is needed to water inlet area, it will
be easy to slide underneath watercraft.
A lift kit (P/N 295 100 044) can be used to install
watercraft on a stand.
TYPICAL
1. Lift kit
2. Work stand
F02J0VA
1
WATERCRAFT
MODEL
IMPELLER
P/N
MATERIAL PITCH
SPX 271 000 828
Stainless
steel
Progressive
pitch
16-23
GS 271 000 821
Stainless
steel
Progressive
pitch
11-22
GSX Limited 271 000 810
Stainless
steel
Progressive
pitch
16-25
XP Limited 271 000 818
Stainless
steel
Progressive
pitch
16-25
GTS 271 000 826
Stainless
steel
Progressive
pitch
11-22
GTI 271 000 885
Stainless
steel
Progressive
pitch
11-22
GTX Limited 271 000 786
Stainless
steel
Progressive
pitch
14-21
F01J42A
1
2
09-02-3
Impeller Condition
Condition of impeller no. 20, boot no. 15 and ring
no. 16 can be quickly checked from underneath
of the watercraft. Remove grate and look through
water inlet opening.
TYPICAL
1. Inspect impeller and boot
Impeller/Wear Ring Clearance
This clearance is critical for jet pump performance.
Clearance can be checked from water inlet open-
ing or from venturi side. However, the last meth-
od requires more work.
To check clearance from water inlet side, remove
inlet grate.
To check clearance from venturi side, remove
venturi/nozzle assembly as described in Oil In-
spection in this subsection.
Using a feeler gauge with 30 cm (12 in) blades,
measure clearance between impeller blade tip
and wear ring. Measure each blade at its center.
Clearance should not exceed 1.0 mm (.040 in). If
clearance is greater, disassemble jet pump and in-
spect impeller and wear ring. Renew worn parts.
TYPICAL MEASURING FROM WATER INLET SIDE
1. Feeler gauge
TYPICAL MEASURING FROM VENTURI SIDE
1. Feeler gauge
Oil Inspection
Detach ball joint of steering cable from nozzle.
Detach ball joint of VTS link rod.
Detach ball joint of reverse cable and springs from
reverse gate (GTS model only).
F01J0DA
1
F01J0EA
1
F01J0FA
1
09-02-4
All Models
Remove 4 screws retaining venturi to jet pump
housing.
GTI and GTX Limited
Remove reverse gate and support.
All Models
Pull nozzle and venturi from jet pump housing.
NOTE: On the GTS model, the venturi and reverse
gate are removed as an assembly.
Remove plug from cover.
TYPICAL
1. Remove plug
Check oil level, it should be at bottom of hole
threads.
If oil level is low, check impeller shaft housing for
leaks. A pressure test must be performed. See
PUMP PRESSURIZATION in this subsection.
To check oil condition, insert a wire through oil lev-
el hole then withdraw. A whitish oil indicates wa-
ter contamination.
This may involve defective impeller shaft seal
and/or O-ring of housing cover. Jet pump unit
should be overhauled to replace seal.
If everything is correct, apply Loctite PST 592 on
plug and reinstall it on cover. Properly reinstall re-
moved parts.
Oil Replacement
Remove venturi as described in Oil Inspection.
Remove 3 screws retaining cover.
1. Screws
Using a fiber hammer, gently tap cover to release
it from housing cover.
Thoroughly clean reservoir and inside of cover
with a solvent. Check O-ring condition. Replace as
necessary.
Apply a thin layer of Loctite 518 on mating surface
of cover and reinstall it with its O-ring. Torque
screws to 4 Nm (35 lbfin).
Remove plug from cover.
Pour oil through hole until oil reaches the bottom
of hole threads. Use SEA-DOO JET PUMP SYN-
THETIC OIL (P/N 293 600 011) only. Oil will drain
slowly into center area of housing, wait a few min-
utes and readjust oil level.
Apply Loctite PST 592 on plug and reinstall it on
cover.
Properly reinstall removed parts.
F01J5IA
1
-
CAUTION
This is a synthetic oil. Do not mix with min-
eral based oil. Do not mix oil brands.
F02J0TB 1
09-02-5
REMOVAL
5, Nozzle
Disconnect steering cable from jet pump nozzle.
GS, GTS, GTI and GTX Limited
Remove 2 retaining screws no. 1, 2 sleeves no. 2,
4 locking disks no. 4.
TYPICAL
1. Screw
2. Locking disks
3. Sleeve
Remove nozzle.
Disconnect ball joint of VTS link rod.
Loosen 2 screws each side of trim ring.
1. Screws
Remove nozzle.
11, Venturi
Remove nozzle no. 5 prior removing venturi.
Remove 4 retaining screws and withdraw venturi.
1. Remove screws
9, Jet Pump Housing
SPX and GTS Models
Remove air vent tube support from body opening
(SPX model).
Disconnect engine water supply hose and both
bailer pick-up tubes in bilge.
TYPICAL
1. Bailer pick-up tubes
2. Engine water supply hose
Detach ball joint of VTS link rod.
F01J3BE
2
1
2 3
3
F01J5FA
1
F02J0TA
1
1
F01J0IA
1
2
09-02-6
Detach ball joint of reverse cable and springs (GTS
model) from reverse gate.
All Models except GTS
Loosen 4 hexagonal nuts no. 6 and remove flat
washers and lock washers from jet pump hous-
ing.
Remove jet pump with a wiggle movement.
GTS Model
Remove nozzle.
Loosen 4 hexagonal nuts no. 6 and remove flat
washers and lock washers from jet pump hous-
ing.
Using screws previously removed from nozzle, in-
stall jet pump housing remover tool (P/N 295 000
113) on venturi.
TYPICAL
Rotate handle clockwise to remove jet pump.
All Models
NOTE: After jet pump removal, if drive shaft re-
mains in the PTO flywheel (except XP Limited),
simply pull it out. If drive shaft is seized in the PTO
flywheel, refer to DRIVE SYSTEM 09-03.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Whenever removing a part, visually check
for damage such as: corrosion, crack, split, break,
porosity, cavitation, deformation, distortion, heat-
ing discoloration, wear pattern, missing plating,
missing or broken needles in needle bearing, wa-
ter damage diagnosed by black-colored spots on
metal parts, etc. Renew any damaged part. As a
quick check, manually feel clearance and end play,
where applicable, to detect excessive wear.
SPX and GTS Models
17, Fitting
Fittings can be removed with deep socket or vise
grip. Do not contact hose mounting area.
Fittings can be removed from pump housing with
the following suggested tool:
Use a 14 mm (9/16 in) deep socket.
Drill deep socket with a 14 mm (9/16 in) drill bit,
starting at hexagon head end as shown in fol-
lowing illustration.
Drill a 2.40 mm (3/32 in) hole in center of deep
socket as shown in following illustration.
Install 2.40 mm (3/32 in) roll pin in the center
hole.
1. Deep socket 14 mm (9/16 in)
2. Roll pin 2.40 mm (3/32 in)
A. 42.50 mm (1-43/64 in)
B. 36.80 mm (1-29/64 in)
-
CAUTION
When removing pump unit, a shim could
have been installed between hull and pump
housing. Be sure to reinstall it otherwise en-
gine and jet pump alignment will be altered.
F01J5JA
F01J2RA
A
B
2
1
09-02-7
All Models
18, Cover
With pump assembly in horizontal position, remove
3 retaining screws no. 19.
Place container under cover to catch oil.
Using a fiber hammer, gently tap cover to release
it from jet pump housing.
20, Impeller
Insert impeller shaft holder (P/N 295 000 082) on
impeller shaft flat end.
Using 2 screws previously removed from venturi,
secure shaft holder to housing.
1. Shaft holder
Heat impeller center with a propane torch to ap-
proximately 150C (300F) to break the Loctite
bond.
Install shaft holder in a vice.
1. Shaft holder
Impeller is loosened using impeller remover tool
(P/N 295 000 001).
Insert special tool in impeller splines.
1. Impeller remover tool
F00J07A 1
F00J0HA
1
F01J0TA
F00J08A
1
09-02-8
Rotate impeller remover tool counterclockwise
and unscrew completely impeller.
To remove impeller, apply a rotating movement
and pull at same time. Slide impeller out of hous-
ing. Remove tool from impeller.
21, Wear Ring
Place jet pump housing in a vise with soft jaws. It
is best to clamp housing using a lower ear.
Cut wear ring at two places.
NOTE: Wear ring can be cut using a jigsaw, a small
grinder or a low clearance hacksaw such as Snap-
on HS3 or equivalent.
TYPICAL
TYPICAL
1. Snap-on HS3
After cutting ring, insert a screwdriver blade be-
tween jet pump housing and ring outside diameter.
Push ring so that it can collapse internally.
Pull ring out.
24, Impeller Shaft
Remove shaft holder tool.
Remove impeller shaft with thrust washer and
thrust bearing.
22,23, Seal and Needle Bearing
Remove seal and bearings at the same time using
bearing/seal remover tool (P/N 295 000 144).
Insert bearing remover then press tool using a ar-
bor press until seal and bearings are out. However,
care should be taken not to damage bearing jour-
nals.
-
CAUTION
Never use any impact wrench to loosen im-
peller.
-
CAUTION
When cutting ring, be careful not to damage
jet pump housing.
F01J0VA
F01J0WA
1
F01J11A
09-02-9
1. Bearing/seal remover tool
NOTE: It is always recommended to renew both
bearings, even if only one bearing needs to be re-
placed.
CLEANING
Sealant can be removed with a wire brush (disc)
mounted on a drill or a scraper.
Properly clean all threads.
Remove all O-rings and clean parts in a solvent.
Carefully check water passages and oil passages.
Blow low pressure compressed air through them
and make sure they are clear.
TYPICAL
1. Water passages
2. Oil passages
Brush and clean impeller shaft threads, impeller
and drive shaft splines with Loctite Safety solvent
755 (P/N 293 800 019) or equivalent. Free threads
and splines from any residue.
PARTS INSPECTION
20, Impeller
Visually inspect impeller splines. Check for wear or
deformation. Renew parts if damaged.
NOTE: Check also PTO flywheel and drive shaft
condition. Refer to BOTTOM END 04-06 and DRIVE
SYSTEM 09-03.
Examine impeller in wear ring for distortion.
Check if blade tips are blunted round, chipped or
broken. Such impeller is unbalanced and will vi-
brate and damage wear ring, impeller shaft, shaft
seal or bearings. Renew if damaged.
1. Replaced if blunted round or damaged
Check impeller for cavitation damage, deep scratch-
es or any other damage.
F00J0MA
1
F01J13A
1
2
-
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage impeller shaft diam-
eter.
F02J0VB
1
09-02-10
1. Check for cavitation, deep scratches or other damage
21, Wear Ring
Check wear ring for deep scratches, irregular sur-
face or any apparent damage.
If impeller/wear ring clearance is too large and im-
peller is in good shape, renew wear ring.
22,24, Needle Bearing and Impeller
Shaft
WEAR
Inspect needle bearings and their contact surface.
Check for scoring, pitting, chipping or other evi-
dence of wear.
With your finger nail, feel contact surface of seal.
If any irregular surface is found, renew impeller
shaft.
Install bearings, then install impeller shaft and ro-
tate it. Make sure it turns smoothly.
RADIAL PLAY
Radial play is critical for jet pump unit life span.
Radial play of impeller shaft is checked with shaft
in housing, without impeller.
Retain housing in a soft jaw vise making sure not
to damage housing lug.
Set a dial gauge and position its tip onto shaft end,
close to end of threads.
Move shaft end up and down. Difference between
highest and lowest dial gauge reading is radial
play.
Maximum permissible radial play is 0.05 mm
(.002 in).
TYPICAL MEASURING IMPELLER SHAFT RADIAL PLAY
1. Dial gauge
2. Measure close to threads at shaft end
To check both bearings, proceed the same way
with other shaft end. Position gauge tip on diam-
eter, close to flats on shaft.
TYPICAL MEASURING IMPELLER SHAFT RADIAL PLAY
1. Dial gauge
2. Measure close to flats at shaft end
Excessive play can come either from worn bear-
ings or impeller shaft or damaged jet pump hous-
ing bearing surfaces.
Measuring shaft diameter will determine the de-
fective parts.
Using a micrometer, measure diameter on bear-
ing contact surfaces. Minimum shaft diameter
should be 22.24 mm (.876 in).
F02J0UA
1
F01J18A
1
2
F01J19A
1
2
09-02-11
1. Inspect for wear at the bearing pilot
2. Radial bearing raceway
NOTE: If shaft is to be replaced, it is recommend-
ed to replace both bearings at the same time. In
addition, it is suggested to replace thrust bearing
and thrust washer.
25,26, Thrust Washer and Thrust
Bearing
Visually inspect thrust washer, thrust bearing and
their contact surface. Check for scoring, pitting,
flaking, discoloration or other evidence of wear.
For best inspection, use a 7X magnifying glass to
check wear pattern.
TYPICAL
1. Worn roller (trunnion worn on end roller)
2. Good roller (cylindrical shape)
3. Look for scoring on retainer
NOTE: When replacing either washer or bearing,
it is recommended to renew both.
18,24, Cover and Impeller Shaft
END PLAY
End play of impeller shaft is checked with shaft in
housing, without impeller and with cover installed.
Retain housing in a soft jaw vise making sure not to
damage housing lug. Set a dial gauge and position
its tip on the end of shaft. Move shaft end by pull-
ing and pushing. Difference between highest and
lowest dial gauge reading is end play. Maximum
permissible end play (new) is 0.12 - 0.54 mm (.005 -
.021 in). Make sure vise is secured and not adding
to your measurement as you move impeller shaft.
1. Tip on shaft end
Excessive play comes from a worn anti-knock push-
er inside cover and wear of impeller shaft nose.
Using pliers, remove anti-knock pusher and spring
from cover.
TYPICAL
1. Pusher
Inspect pusher for any damage or deterioration.
F01J1AA
1
2
F01J52A
1
2
3
F01J2SA
1
F00J09A 1
09-02-12
Refer to the following illustration to determine the
wear limit of the pusher.
A. Wear limit 8.0 mm (.315 in)
Pusher should be replaced if it is not within spec-
ification.
Be sure to check end play after installing a new
pusher (if necessary).
Inspect impeller shaft nose for wear.
1. Impeller shaft nose
22, Seal
Carefully inspect seal lips. Make sure that lips are
not worn, distorted, cracked or show signs of any
other damage. Renew as necessary.
ASSEMBLY
21, Wear Ring
The wear ring features a lip on one edge; position
lip outwards of housing.
NOTE: To ease insertion into housing, apply BOM-
BARDIER LUBE lubricant (P/N 293 600 016) onto
outside circumference of wear ring.
To install ring in housing, use a square steel plate
of approximately 180 180 mm 6 mm thick
(7 7 in 1/4 in) and a press.
Manually engage ring in housing making sure it is
equally inserted all around. Press ring until it seats
into bottom of housing.
1. Seal lip
2. Press wear ring
If a press is not readily available, a piece of wood
such as a 2 4 in 12 in long, can be used.
Manually engage ring in housing making sure it is
equally inserted all around. Place wood piece over
ring. Using a hammer, strike on wood to push
ring. Strike one side then rotate wood piece about
90 and strike again. Frequently rotate wood piece
so that ring slides in evenly until it seats into bot-
tom of housing.
F00J0QA
A
F00J0AA
1
F01J5DA
1
2
09-02-13
1. Piece of wood
2. Seal lip facing upward
3. Wear ring
22,23, Seal and Needle Bearing
Bearings and seal will be properly installed in
housing using bearing/seal installer tool (P/N 295
000 107).
BEARING/SEAL INSTALLER TOOL
1. Seal side
2. Bearing side
Stamped end of bearings (showing identification
markings) must be located toward outside of hous-
ing.
Properly insert bearing on tool. Using an arbor
press only, push tool until tool flange contacts
housing. Proceed the same way for both bearings.
1. Stamped end this side
1. Press on tool until it stops
F01J5EA
1
3
2
F01J4KA
2
1
-
CAUTION
Never hammer the bearing into its housing.
-
CAUTION
This tool have been designed to properly po-
sition bearings and seal, thus providing
space for lubrication purposes. The tool
flanges allow this. If a different pusher type
is being used, components must be properly
positioned as follows.
F01J1HA
1
F00J0BA 1
09-02-14
Bearing on impeller side must be 1.5 to 2.5 mm
(.060 - .100 in) inside reservoir measured from
seal seat. Bearing on venturi side must be 2 to
3 mm (.080 - .120 in) inside reservoir measured
from thrust washer seat. Refer to following illus-
tration.
1. Seal seat
2. Stamped end of bearing
3. Thrust washer seat
4. Stamped end of bearing
A. 1.5 - 2.5 mm (.060 - .100 in)
B. 2 - 3 mm (.080 - .120 in)
Seal must be installed so that lips raised edges
are toward outside of housing (toward impeller).
Apply Loctite 518 (P/N 293 800 038) to seal hous-
ing, all around outer diameter and on seal seat.
Properly insert seal on tool.
NOTE: It is important when installing seals to
pack seal lip with grease before inserting bear-
ing/seal installer tool. Properly insert tool in seal
with a rotating movement.
1. Raised edge of seal this side
Push on tool end with a press until tool flange con-
tacts housing.
1. Press on tool until it stops
Apply synthetic grease (P/N 293 550 010) between
seal lips.
1. Loctite 518 all around and behind
2. Raised edge of seal lip this side
F01J1JA
B
3
4
A
1
2
F01J1KA
1
-
CAUTION
Prevent sealant from contacting any needles
of bearing.
F00J0CA
1
F01J1MA
1
2
09-02-15
25, Thrust Washer
Position jet pump housing no. 9 with the stator
vanes on top.
Insert thrust washer no. 25 in the stator seat.
1. Thrust washer properly installed in stator seat
26, Thrust Bearing
Apply Sea-Doo jet pump synthetic oil (P/N 293
600 011) on both sides of thrust bearing.
Position thrust bearing no. 26 on thrust washer
no. 25.
1. Thrust bearing on top of thrust washer
24, Impeller Shaft
To prevent seal lip damage when inserting impel-
ler shaft, use impeller shaft guide (P/N 295 000
002).
Insert tool onto shaft end then carefully install
shaft in jet pump housing.
1. Impeller shaft
2. Impeller shaft guide
NOTE: If jet pump housing rest against a table,
raise it slightly to allow complete shaft insertion
with the shaft guide.
Remove shaft guide.
20, Impeller
Apply Loctite primer N (P/N 293 600 012) on
threads of impeller shaft no. 24. Allow to dry for 2
minutes.
NOTE: Loctite primer is used to reduce Loctite
271 curing time and to activate stainless steel and
aluminum surfaces for better bonding action. If
applied, complete curing time is 6 hours, if primer
is not used, allow 24 hours for curing time.
F00J0DA 1
F00J0EA 1
F01J1OA
F00J0FA 1 2
09-02-16
Apply Loctite 271 (red) to shaft threads.
1. Apply Loctite 271 (red) on threads
Using 2 screws previously removed from venturi,
secure impeller shaft holder tool to housing.
Install shaft holder tool in a vice.
1. Impeller shaft holder secured in a vice
To ease impeller installation, apply BOMBARDIER
LUBE lubricant on wear ring.
Insert impeller into wear ring. Manually rotate im-
peller and push so that it slides on impeller shaft
threads. Carefully engage threads making sure
they are well aligned.
Install impeller remover/installer tool into impeller
splines and tighten.
1. Impeller remover/installer tool
Torque impeller to 70 Nm (52 lbfft) then remove
tools.
Apply synthetic grease (P/N 293 550 010) on im-
peller splines.
Insert a new boot no. 15 and ring no. 16 to impel-
ler.
1. Boot and ring
F00J0GA 1
F00J0HA
1
-
CAUTION
Make sure thrust washer and bearing are
not wedged in shaft groove. To check, manu-
ally pull and push jet pump housing, some
axial play must be felt.
-
CAUTION
Never use any impact wrench to tighten im-
peller.
F00J08A
1
F00J0IA 1
09-02-17
18, Cover
Install O-ring no. 27 to cover. Apply Loctite 518 on
O-ring. Make sure spring and anti-knock pusher
are in place.
1. Spring
2. Pusher
3. O-ring with Loctite 518
Install cover to jet pump housing making sure to
properly position filler plug on top side.
1. Filler plug toward top side of pump housing
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on screw threads and
evenly tighten cover screws. Torque to 4 Nm (35
lbfin).
Oil Fill
NOTE: It is highly recommended to perform a leak-
age test prior adding the oil. See PUMP PRESSUR-
IZATION in this subsection.
Place housing horizontally as in its operating posi-
tion so that filler plug is located on top. Remove
filler plug from cover. Pour SEA-DOO JET PUMP
SYNTHETIC OIL (P/N 293 600 011) in reservoir un-
til oil comes level with bottom of hole. Let oil drain
into housing and after a few minutes add more oil
until it is level with bottom of filler hole.
NOTE: When filling reservoir, oil must be poured
into cover quite slowly to allow complete housing
fill.
TYPICAL
1. Pour oil slowly until it is level with bottom of filler hole
11, Venturi
If needed, install new O-rings no. 10 around bailer
passages.
1. O-rings
3
F00J0PA
1 2
F01J5IA
1
-
CAUTION
This is a synthetic oil. Do not mix with min-
eral based oil. Do not mix oil brands.
F00J0JA 1
F00J0KA 1
09-02-18
Apply Loctite 518 (Gasket Eliminator) on mating
surface.
Position venturi with bailer passages on top.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on threads of screws
no. 12.
NOTE: On the GTI and GTX models, install the re-
verse support with the venturi.
Install screws no. 12, lock washers no. 13 and flat
washers no. 14 then torque to 21 Nm (16 lbfft).
17, Fitting
SPX and GTS Models
Apply Loctite PST 592 on plastic fitting threads.
Then thread fitting into pump housing until threads
are bottomed.
29, O-Rings
GS, GSX Limited, XP Limited, GTI, and GTX
Limited
Install O-rings no. 29 around bailer passages or
make sure they are in place if they were not re-
moved.
PUMP PRESSURIZATION
Whenever doing any type of repair on jet pump, a
pressure test should be done to check for leakage.
Proceed as follows:
Remove drain plug from cover.
Apply Loctite PST 592 on threads of fitting tool
(P/N 295 000 086) then secure on cover.
to fitting.
Pressurize pump to a maximum of 70 kPa (10
PSI).
Pump must maintain this pressure for at least
10 minutes.
NOTE: If there is a pressure drop spray soapy wa-
ter around cover. If there are no bubbles, impeller
shaft, impeller shaft seal, or jet pump housing is
leaking through porosity and has to be replaced.
Jet pump unit has to be disassembled. If jet pump
has been overhauled, the impeller shaft seal
no. 22 may be leaking; Add a small quantity of
Sea-Doo jet pump synthetic oil to wet the oil seal.
Let soak and recheck.
Disconnect pump gauge tester and remove fit-
ting.
Check oil level. Refill as necessary.
Apply Loctite PST 592 to threads of filler plug
then secure it in cover.
F02J0TA
1
1
-
CAUTION
Repair any leak, failure to correct a leak will
lead to premature wear of pump components.
F00J0LA
09-02-19
INSTALLATION
28, Neoprene Seal
SPX, GSX Limited, XP Limited and
GTX Limited
If neoprene seal is damaged, replace it with a new
one.
TYPICAL
1. Neoprene seal
9, Jet Pump Housing
SPX Models
Apply Loctite Right Stuff around bailer and water
supply fittings.
1. Apply Loctite Right Stuff where indicated
GTS Model
Apply Loctite Right Stuff around bailer and water
supply fittings as well as around wear ring lip.
1. Apply Loctite Right Stuff where indicated
All Models
Generously apply synthetic grease on drive shaft
splines.
Make sure rubber damper is on drive shaft end.
Install jet pump. If necessary, wiggle jet pump to
engage drive shaft splines in impeller.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on stud threads of jet
pump housing.
Install flat washers no. 8, lock washers no. 7 and
nuts no. 6. Tighten nuts of jet pump housing in
a criss-cross sequence and torque to 33 Nm
(24 lbfft).
NOTE: Slightly lubricate wear ring with BOM-
BARDIER LUBE lubricant to minimize friction dur-
ing initial start.
F01J50A
1
F01J21A
1
-
CAUTION
Some watercraft require a shim between
hull and pump; if shim has been removed at
pump removal, be sure to reinstall it, other-
wise engine alignment will be altered.
F01J21B
1
09-02-20
SPX and GTS Models
Secure water supply hose and both bailer tubes to
jet pump housing using tie raps.
1. Bailer tubes
Reinstall air vent tube support onto body (SPX model).
5, Nozzle
GS, GTS, GTI and GTX Limited
Insert bushings no. 3 in nozzle no. 5, positioning
their flanges from inside of nozzle.
Insert sleeves no. 2 in bushings no. 3.
Install nozzle no. 5 on venturi no. 11; position its
steering arm on RH side. Apply Loctite 242 (blue)
on screw threads (or use new screws with pre-
applied threadlocker). Install screws no. 1 and lock-
ing disks no. 4 then torque to 20 Nm (15 lbfft).
TYPICAL
1. Locking disks
SPX, GSX Limited, and XP Limited
Install nozzle/trim ring assembly.
Torque screws to 14 Nm (10 lbfft).
NOTE: Trim ring has a tight fit; to install, insert
both sides at the same time, taking care not to
break plastic bushings. Carefully use a plastic tip
hammer if necessary. Make sure steering arm of
jet pump is on right side and trim arm is above
venturi.
Steering Cable
Refer to section 10, STEERING SYSTEM.
Trim System
Refer to VARIABLE TRIM SYSTEM 09-05.
Reverse Cable
Refer to REVERSE SYSTEM 09-04.
F01J0IA
1
2
F01J3BA
1
2
1
N
WARNING
Whenever removing screw always renew
locking disks. Screw must be torqued as spec-
ified.
F01J5FA
1
Subsection 03 (DRIVE SYSTEM)
09-03-1
DRIVE SYSTEM 0
SPX Model
F01I0KS
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
Synthetic
grease
8
12
9
7
10
11
6
5
4
2
13
13
1
3
Synthetic
grease
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-03-2
F02I05S
Loctite
271
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
12
Synthetic
grease
13
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
Synthetic
grease
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-03-3
1
F06I05S
Synthetic
grease
2
3
4
15
16
17
15
9
10
11
Loctite 518
14
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
Loctite
518
13
Loctite
518
12
13
Synthetic
grease
Synthetic
grease
Synthetic
grease
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-03-4
XP Limited
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
Loctite
242
31 Nm
(23 lbfft)
Loctite
Right Stuff
Loctite 518
31 Nm
(23 lbfft)
Loctite 518
Loctite 518
Loctite
518
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
Synthetic
grease
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
Loctite 271
Loctite
518
Loctite
518
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
24
23
1
20
18
24
23
19
22
16
15
14
15
17
21
15
16
17
15
14
9
10
11
12
13
Synthetic
grease
Synthetic
grease
Synthetic
grease
Synthetic
grease
Synthetic
grease
F08I02S
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-03-5
GENERAL
Jet pump must be removed to replace any com-
ponents of the drive system. Refer to JET PUMP
09-02 for removal procedure.
REMOVAL
1, PTO Flywheel Guard
SPX, GS and GSX Limited
Remove seat (s).
Remove vent tube support.
Remove seat(s).
Remove seat support (except GTS model).
XP Limited
Open engine cover.
Remove storage basket.
Remove vent tubes from PTO flywheel guard.
2, Large Clamp
Unfasten large clamp of PTO flywheel boot no. 3
as follows:
Use pliers (P/N 295 000 069).
Insert pointed tips of pliers in closing hooks.
TYPICAL
1. Closing hooks
Squeeze pliers to draw hooks together and dis-
engage windows from locking hooks.
TYPICAL
1. Locking hooks
4, Small Clamp
Unfasten small clamp of PTO flywheel boot as fol-
lows:
Use pliers (P/N 295 000 054).
F01J0GA
1
F01J2AA
1
F01J29A
09-03-6
To open clamp, place flat side of plier on clamp
embossment, squeeze and twist plier.
5,6, Circlip and Floating Ring
Hold floating ring no. 6 and compress boot
no. 10; then, pull out circlip no. 5 from drive shaft
groove.
1. Push floating ring
2. Remove circlip
12, Drive Shaft
Simply pull out drive shaft.
NOTE: If the drive shaft is jammed into PTO fly-
wheel, make the following tool and use it in con-
junction with the jet pump housing remover (P/N
295 000 113) to withdraw drive shaft.
Raw Material:
1 aluminum alloy square of 51 mm (2 in)
305 mm (12 in).
2 aluminum rods of 28.5 mm (1-1/8 in) dia.
30 mm (1-3/16 in).
1. Use ball end mill for radius. This section of the slot should be
38 mm (1-15/32 in) deep
2. Drill 25 mm (1 in) hole in center to remove material
3. Weld all around
4. Drill 9 mm (11/32 in) hole
5. Drill through 9 mm (11/32 in)
6. Drill and tap 6 mm (1/4 in) holes
A. 305 mm (12 in)
B. 105 mm (4-1/8 in)
C. 16 mm (5/8 in)
D. 51 mm (2 in)
E. 36 mm (1-25/64 in)
F. 22 mm (7/8 in)
G. 17 mm (43/64)
H. 19 mm (3/4 in)
I. 35 mm (1-3/8 in)
J. 20.3 mm .18 (.800 in .007)
Mount on drive shaft puller the jet pump housing
remover; then, install assembly on drive shaft us-
ing screws.
F01B1TA
F02J0PA
F06I06A
1 2
3
2
C
D
E
D
F
F
G
6
5
4
H
F01I05A
A
B
J
I
1
09-03-7
TYPICAL
1. Jet pump housing remover
2. Drive shaft puller
3. Screws
XP Limited
12, Rear Drive Shaft
Remove rear access panel.
Remove protective plate no. 18.
1. Remove protective plate
Pull rear drive shaft until coupler no. 19 is disen-
gage from splines.
1. Pull drive shaft to disengage coupler from splines
Remove rear drive shaft.
Remove coupler no. 19.
20, Front Drive Shaft
Remove PTO flywheel guard no. 1.
Remove bolts, lock nuts and sleeves from sup-
port.
1. Remove bolts, lock nuts and sleeves
Loosen bolts and lock nuts retaining the lower sup-
port of the shock absorber.
-
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage hull rear section or
engine rubber mounts.
F01I06A
1
2
3
F08I03A 1
F08I04A 1
F08I04B 1
09-03-8
1. Remove bolts and lock nuts
Loosen 4 screws and remove bottom cover of
seat.
1. Remove cover
Loosen gear clamp retaining the outer boot of the
shock absorber.
Tilt seat.
Remove front drive shaft.
14, Seal Carrier of Mid Bearing
To remove the seal carrier from support, loosen
the 6 nuts no. 21.
1. Nut (6)
10, Boot
Loosen gear clamp no. 11 holding boot, then
carefully pull boot and carbon ring no. 8 from hull
insert.
8, Carbon Ring
Loosen gear clamp no. 9 then pull carbon ring from
boot no. 10.
F08Q01A 1
F08L11A 1
F08L12A 1
F05I05A
1
09-03-9
10, Boot
Loosen gear clamp no. 11 holding boot, then pull
boot with seal carrier.
14, Seal Carrier of Thru Hull Fitting
Loosen gear clamp no. 9 and remove seal carrier
from boot no. 10.
DISASSEMBLY
14, Seal Carrier
Bearing no. 16 and seals no. 15 can be easily re-
moved using the bearing/seal remover tool (P/N
295 000 144).
NOTE: The same tool is used for bearing and seal
removal of jet pump.
Properly support seal carrier housing no. 17 when
removing seals and bearing.
INSPECTION
12, Drive Shaft
Inspect condition of drive shaft and PTO flywheel
splines.
Inspect condition of groove.
With your finger nail, feel machined surface of
drive shaft. If any irregular surface is found, renew
drive shaft.
1. Surface condition
2. Groove condition
3. Splines condition
Excessive deflection could cause vibration and
damage to drive shaft splines, impeller, flywheel
or floating ring (seal carrier depending upon the
model).
Place drive shaft on V-blocks and set-up a dial
gauge in center of shaft. Slowly rotate shaft; dif-
ference between highest and lowest dial gauge
reading is deflection. Refer to the following illus-
tration.
Maximum permissible deflection is 0.5 mm
(.020 in).
MEASURING DRIVE SHAFT DEFLECTION
1. Dial gauge
2. V-blocks
13, Damper
Visually inspect shape of dampers for deformation
or other damage.
F01J11A
F01I0FA
3
2
1
F01J15A
1
2
09-03-10
6,7, Floating Ring and O-ring
Inspect condition of O-rings and floating ring con-
tact surface.
1. O-rings
2. Floating ring contact surface
10, Boot
To verify the preload of the boot, proceed as fol-
lows:
Measure installed length of boot.
1. Boot
A. Measure here
Push floating ring to compress boot; then, remove
circlip out of drive shaft groove.
2. Remove circlip
Slide floating ring far enough forward in order to
release it from carbon ring.
Measure boot free length.
Subtract the installed length measurement from
the free length measurement. A difference of 4 mm
to 12 mm (5/32 in to 15/32 in) should be obtained.
If the length is less than 4 mm (5/32 in), install a
spacer (P/N 293 250 017) between boot and thru
hull fitting.
1. Spacer
NOTE: Drive shaft must be removed to install
spacer.
16, Needle Bearing
Inspect seal carrier needle bearing. Check parts
for scoring, pitting, chipping or other evidence of
wear.
F01I0GA
1
2
F00J03A
1 A
F06I06A
1 2
F00J04B
1
09-03-11
ASSEMBLY
14, Seal Carrier
Properly support seal carrier housing no. 17 when
installing seals and bearing.
Install bearing no. 16 with the bearing/seal install-
er tool (P/N 295 000 107).
1. Press bearing in its housing
NOTE: Bearing can also be installed with the
same driver used at disassembly. Center bearing
in longitudinal axis of housing.
1. Push bearing centered in its housing
Install double-lip seal no. 15 with protector to-
ward jet pump.
On both seals no. 15, raised edge of lip must be
located outwards of seal carrier.
1. Double-lip seal toward engine
2. Double-lip seal with protector toward jet pump
3. Raised edge of lip outwards
4. Seal carrier
Apply Loctite 518 all around seals outside diame-
ter.
Seals no. 15 can be carefully installed in housing
using bearing/seal installer tool (P/N 295 000 107).
Push seals until tool comes in contact with hous-
ing.
TYPICAL
Pack seals and bearing with synthetic grease (P/N
293 550 010).
-
CAUTION
Ensure to install stamped end of bearing
(showing identification markings) first on
tool. Never hammer the bearing into its
housing.
F01J51A
1
F01J2TA
1
F01J2FA
2
1
3
4
3
F01J1YA
09-03-12
INSTALLATION
procedure. However, pay particular attention to
the following.
XP Limited
14, Seal Carrier of Mid Bearing
Properly index flanges no. 22 together.
Install seal carrier and hand tighten nuts no. 21.
NOTE: Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on studs.
Align the seal carrier using the following tools:
Support plate kit (P/N 529 035 506).
NOTE: Use plate (P/N 529 035 507) for the 155.6
mm (6-1/8 in) jet pump.
1. Plate (P/N 529 035 507)
2. Support (P/N 529 035 511)
Alignment shaft (P/N 295 000 141).
1. Alignment shaft
PTO flywheel adapter (P/N 295 000 157).
1. PTO flywheel adapter
Install support plate at rear of watercraft.
Install adapter on shaft.
Carefully slide shaft through support plate and
seal carrier. Insert adapter end into PTO flywheel.
TYPICAL
1. Alignment tool
2. Seal carrier
Torque seal carrier nuts no. 21 in a criss-cross se-
quence in 2 steps as per following illustration.
NOTE: It is very important to tighten nuts of seal
carrier in a criss-cross sequence to maintain its
alignment.
F00B0FA
1 2
F00B0GA
1
F00B05A
1
F05I08A
1 2
09-03-13
Step 1: Torque to 3 Nm (26 lbfin) as per sequence
Step 2: Torque to 10 Nm (88 lbfin) as per sequence
23,24, Damper and Bushing
Make sure to install dampers and bushing.
ENGINE SIDE SHOWN
1. Damper
2. Bushing
19,20, Coupler and Front Drive Shaft
Install front drive shaft with coupler.
12,24, Rear Drive Shaft and Damper
Install damper to rear drive shaft.
13, Damper
Install dampers no. 13 on drive shaft no. 12.
NOTE: Make sure dampers were not left in PTO
flywheel or impeller.
3, Drive Shaft
Install drive shaft and jet pump at the same time.
Insert drive shaft through carbon ring no. 8 and
floating ring no. 6.
NOTE: Make sure to install floating ring before in-
serting the drive shaft in the PTO flywheel.
Insert drive shaft through seal carrier no. 14 being
careful not to damage seals.
While holding jet pump, guide and engage drive
shaft splines in PTO flywheel. Rotate shaft to
properly index splines. Make sure boot is well po-
sitioned over shaft end.
XP Limited
12, Rear Drive Shaft
Insert drive shaft through seal carrier no. 14 being
careful not to damage seals.
Engage drive shaft splines in coupler no. 20. Ro-
tate shaft to properly index splines.
18, Protective Plate
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on bolts and torque lock
nuts to 10 Nm (88 lbfin).
5, Circlip
Push the floating ring to compress the boot. Insert
the circlip in the drive shaft groove.
F05I0EA
6
4
2 5
3
1
F05I0FA 1 2
-
CAUTION
When sliding the drive shaft through seal
carrier, the double lip seal can be folded
over. This would cause a seal carrier bearing
failure.
09-03-14
2. Insert circlip in the groove
Slide the floating ring onto the circlip.
2, Large Clamp
Secure large clamp no. 2 as follows:
Use pliers (P/N 295 000 069) as for removal.
Manually engage holding hook in large window.
This is a pre-clamping position only.
PRE-CLAMPING POSITION
1. Holding hook
2. Large window
Insert pointed tips of pliers first in closing
hooks.
TYPICAL
1. Closing hooks
Squeeze pliers. When both large and small win-
dows are directly over the 2 locking hooks,
press those windows down to engage hooks in
windows.
1. Press to engage hooks in windows
NOTE: At installation, clamp tail should be in op-
posite direction of engine rotation.
F06I06A
1 2
F01J23A
1
2
1
F01J2BA
F02J0IA
1
09-03-15
1. Engine rotation (counterclockwise)
2. Tail in opposite direction
4, Small Clamp
To secure small clamp no. 4, place notch side of
plier on clamp embossment and squeeze plier.
1. Squeeze plier
LUBRICATION
PTO Flywheel
Using a grease gun, carefully lubricate PTO fly-
wheel with synthetic grease (P/N 293 550 010),
until boot is just beginning to expand. At this
point, immediately stop greasing.
Seal Carrier
Using a grease gun, carefully lubricate seal carrier
of thru hull fitting until grease is just coming out of
seal.
F01J23B
1
2
1
F02J0PB
F01I0BB
F06I03A 1
09-03-16
XP Limited
Using a grease gun, lubricate seal carrier of mid
bearing with synthetic grease (P/N 293 550 010).
TYPICAL
1. Grease fitting
F05I09A
1
Subsection 04 (REVERSE SYSTEM)
09-04-1
REVERSE SYSTEM 0
GTS Model
F02J0NS
2
Synthetic
grease
6
4
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
5
1
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
3
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
7
Loctite
242
Loctite
242
20 Nm
(15 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-04-2
GENERAL
It is not necessary to remove reverse system
from watercraft for servicing. However reverse
system removal is necessary to replace reverse
support.
DISASSEMBLY
Remove storage tray from watercraft.
Press on vent tube upper part to enable to with-
draw tube from body.
TYPICAL
1. Press on vent tube
3, Shift Lever
To remove shift lever, unhook spring no. 2 from
sliding block no. 5 and pull spring from shift lever
stem.
TYPICAL
1. Sliding block
2. Spring
Withdraw shift lever stem and locking lever no. 1
from sliding block no. 5, then slide off locking le-
ver from stem.
TYPICAL
1. Locking lever
4,5, Triangular Lever and Sliding Block
Remove screw, lock nut, washers and bushing
holding reverse cable to triangular lever.
Remove lock nut and washer holding sliding block
to triangular lever and to support.
Remove screw, lock nut, washer and bushing
holding triangular lever to reverse support.
F02L1MA
1
F02J04A
1
2
F02J05A
1
09-04-3
TYPICAL
1. Reverse support
2. Reverse cable
3. Triangular lever
6, Reverse Support
In order to have access to screw holding lower
part of reverse support, remove front seat by pull-
ing on each side to release it from body.
Remove screw, lock nut and washers holding low-
er part of support.
Remove reverse cable from support.
Remove 2 Allen screws, lock nut and washer
holding guide plate and support.
TYPICAL
1. Guide plate
2. Allen screw
3. Screw and washer
7, Reverse Gate
Unhook reverse gate springs and remove ball joint
fasteners to release reverse cable from reverse
gate.
1. Reverse cable
2. Reverse gate spring (each side)
Unscrew reverse gate retaining screws from ven-
turi, then remove gate.
1. Screw (each side)
ASSEMBLY
to the following.
7, Reverse Gate
Install reverse gate with sleeve and washer. Apply
Loctite 242 (blue) on threads and torque to 20 Nm
(15 lbfft).
F02J06A
2
3
1
F02J07A
3
2
1
F02J08A
1
2
F02J09A
1
09-04-4
1. Screws, washers and sleeves
6, Reverse Support
For reverse support installation, torque screw to
8 Nm (71 lbfin) and Allen screws to 2 Nm
(18 lbfin).
4,5, Triangular Lever and Sliding Block
Insert bushing in triangular lever and then install
lever to reverse support.
TYPICAL
1. Bushing
Install reverse cable to triangular lever with bush-
ing, plastic washer(s) and flat washers.
Torque cable screw to 7 Nm (62 lbfin).
Torque triangular lever screw to 8 Nm (71 lbfin).
Install sliding block to lever and torque nut to
8 Nm (71 lbfin).
1,5, Locking Lever and Sliding Block
Insert locking lever end in support hole then align
lever and sliding block holes.
TYPICAL
1. Support hole
3, Shift Lever
NOTE: Always install shift lever with its open end
facing left side of watercraft, then push shift lever
stem through locking lever no. 1 and sliding block
no. 5 holes.
TYPICAL
1. Install shift lever as shown
-
CAUTION
Always hook reverse gate springs in order to
ease reverse gate operation.
F02J02B 1
F02J0CA
1
F02J0DA
1
F02J0EA
1
09-04-5
2, Spring
Insert spring in lever stem hole and then install
curved end in sliding block groove.
TYPICAL
1. Sliding block groove
Shift Lever Lubrication
Lubricate sliding block support sliding area and tri-
angular lever with synthetic grease. Also, lubri-
cate sliding washer and shift lever stem.
TYPICAL
1. Sliding washer
2. Sliding block
3. Support plate
ADJUSTMENT
7, Reverse Gate
Position handlebar in a straight ahead position,
nozzle should be parallel to rear of watercraft.
Using a square, set it to 129 3 mm (5-5/64
7/64 in), then position square end at the top mid-
dle of nozzle.
A. 129 3 mm (5-5/64 7/64 in)
Pull shift lever in REVERSE position.
TYPICAL
1. Shift lever in REVERSE position
With the gate down to REVERSE position it
should be at the specification.
NOTE: Push slightly on the gate in order to recov-
er spring tension and to obtain proper position of
the gate.
F02J0KA
1
F02D03A
1
2
3
F02J0HA
A
F02J0GA
1
09-04-6
1. REVERSE position
If reverse gate needs to be readjusted, it can be
done at support with adjustment nuts. Turn cable
nuts to obtain position.
NOTE: If reverse gate adjustment is not done ad-
equately, performance and steering control will be
reduced at reverse position.
TYPICAL
1. Support
2. Adjustment nuts
Tighten adjustment nuts and recheck gate posi-
tion.
Reinstall vent tube.
1. Install vent tube
Reinstall storage tray.
F02J0FA 1
F02J06B
1
2
N
WARNING
Vent tube must be in place to provide proper
bilge ventilation.
F02L14A
1
09-04-7
GTI and GTX Limited
F07J01S
19
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
15
Loctite 242
11
13
Synthetic
grease
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
Loctite
242
3.5 Nm
(31 lbfin)
20
Sealant
732
23
12
18
17
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
Loctite
242
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
14
2
21
5
3
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
Loctite
242
6
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
1
22
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
4
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
9
8
7
4
9 Nm
(80 lbfin)
16
10
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-04-8
DISASSEMBLY
1, Reverse Gate
Put shift lever in reverse position.
Disconnect reverse cable by loosing bolt no. 2
and lock nut no. 3 from cable lever.
Loosen 2 Allen screws no. 4 and remove reverse
gate.
5, Cable Lever
Loosen Allen screw no. 6 and remove cable lever.
7,8, Pawl Lock and Spring
Remove roll pin no. 9.
10, Reverse Gate Support
Loosen 4 bolts which retains reverse gate support
to venturi.
1. Support
2. Bolt
11, Interior Lever
Remove glove box.
Disconnect reverse cable by loosing bolt no. 12
and lock nut no. 13.
1. Reverse cable
2. Interior lever
Loosen bolt no. 14 retaining the interior lever.
1. Bolt
2. Shift lever
Remove the interior lever and spring no. 15.
16, Reverse Cable Support
Remove retaining block no. 17 of reverse cable
support by loosing bolts no. 18.
Loosen 3 bolts no. 19 retaining reverse cable sup-
port to body.
Remove reverse cable support.
INSPECTION
Visually inspect parts for wear or cracks. Replace
parts as required.
F07J02A
1 2 2
2 2
F07J03A
1 2
F07J04A
1 2
09-04-9
ASSEMBLY
bly procedures. However, pay particular attention
to the following.
15, Spring
Make sure to properly installed spring in reverse
cable support as per following illustration.
1. Spring
11,20, Interior Lever and Shift Lever
Install the interior lever in a rotating movement.
Engage properly the interior lever tabs in the shift
lever slots.
1. Shift lever
2. Interior lever tabs
Make sure the shift lever action is smooth and
precise. Forward, neutral and reverse positions
should be easy to select with a detent position be-
tween each.
8, Spring
Make sure spring is properly installed. One end of
the spring is hooked in the pawl lock and the other
end is retained by the stopper lock nut.
1. Pawl lock
2. Spring
3. Stopper lock nut
1, Reverse Gate
When installing the reverse gate, pay attention to
position its lever behind the reverse gate support
stopper.
1. Stopper
-
CAUTION
Apply all specified torques and service prod-
ucts as per main illustration.
F07J05A 1
F07J04B
2 1
F07J06A
3
2
1
F07J07A
1
09-04-10
21, Reverse Cable
Install reverse cable to cable lever as per following
illustration.
1. Bolt
2. Ball joint
3. Cable lever
4. Flat washer
5. Lock nut
ADJUSTMENT
Put shift lever in forward position.
Pull shift lever approximately 50 mm (2 in) and
push it back slowly in forward position.
The pawl lock no. 7 should be engaged in the an-
chor no. 22.
If not, adjust reverse cable. Loosen 2 bolts no. 18
at reverse cable support no. 16. Turn adjustment
nut no. 23 as required.
1. Reverse cable support
2. Loosen bolts
3. Adjustment nut
When adjustment is completed, there should be
gap of 2 to 3 mm (5/64 to 7/64 in) between handle
and left cover.
A. 2 to 3 mm (5/64 to 7/64 in)
-
CAUTION
Ensure cable ball joint is parallel to cable le-
ver (90 5) to minimize tension on cable.
Adjust as required.
F07J08A
4 5 3 4 2 1
F07J09A
1
2
3
2
F07J0AA
AA
Subsection 05 (VARIABLE TRIM SYSTEM)
09-05-1
VARIABLE TRIM SYSTEM 0
SPX Model
F01J5XS
1
Synthetic
grease
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Synthetic
grease
Loctite
242
Loctite 242
Loctite 242
2.5 Nm
(23 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Loctite 242
2
17
12
732
sealant
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
14
14
15
16
11
13
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-05-2
GSX Limited and XP Limited
F06J03S
1
Synthetic
grease
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Loctite
242
Loctite 242
Loctite 242
2.5 Nm
(23 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Loctite 242
2
12
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
14
15
16
11
13
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
Synthetic
grease
FLAT RATE PARTS
09-05-3
GENERAL
To test VTS control module, motor or switch, refer
to INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORIES 08-05.
REMOVAL
Disconnect ball joint no. 1.
Remove clamps no. 2.
Remove boot no. 3.
To loosen nut no. 4, use VTS socket tool (P/N 295
000 133).
Remove sealing washer no. 5.
SPX Model
Remove the spacer no. 17.
All Models
Disconnect wiring harnesses.
Pull out VTS assembly no. 6 from bilge.
DISASSEMBLY
7, Cover
Remove VTS cover by pressing on tabs.
1. Press tabs to remove cover
8, Motor
Disconnect wires of motor.
Remove retaining nuts no. 11.
1. Remove nuts
2. Disconnect wires
Pull on motor to remove it.
9,10, Worm and Sliding Shaft
Simply pull on worm and sliding shaft in order to
remove them.
INSPECTION
3, Boot
Make sure boot is in good condition. If it is cracked
or teared, replace boot.
9, Worm
Inspect threads and splines of worm for wear. If
worm replacement is necessary, renew also slid-
ing shaft.
F01B2PA
F01J1WA
1
1
F01J1XA
1
2
09-05-4
1. Inspect threads and splines
ASSEMBLY
to the following.
8,9,10, Motor, Worm and Sliding Shaft
Apply synthetic grease to worm.
Screw worm to sliding shaft.
Mesh worm splines to gear of motor.
1. Mesh worm spline to gear of motor
Install motor, worm and sliding shaft in VTS hous-
ing.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) to nuts no. 11 and tighten
to 7 Nm (62 Ibfin).
Connect wires of motor.
Install cover no. 7.
NOTE: Make sure seal no. 12 is in place.
INSTALLATION
procedures. However pay particular attention to
the following.
4,5, Nut and Sealing Washer
Place sealing washer on nut. Make sure seal lips
are facing toward hull.
1. Seal lips facing hull
2. Nut
F01J25A 1
F01J2PA
1
-
CAUTION
Make sure wire color codes match.
F01J2GA
F01J2LA
1
2
09-05-5
Apply Primer N to threads of VTS housing and
Loctite 242 (blue) to nut no. 4.
Install nut with sealing washer and torque to
6 Nm (53 lbfin) using the VTS socket tool.
1, Ball Joint
SPX Model
Install ball joint on RIGHT side of sliding shaft
no. 10 using bolt no. 13, washers no. 14 and nut
no. 15. Torque nut to 10 Nm (88 lbfin).
NOTE: Install boot on sliding shaft before secur-
ing ball joint.
1. Washers
2. Bolt
3. Nut
GSX Limited and XP Limited
Install ball joint on LEFT side of sliding shaft no. 10
using bolt no. 13, washers no. 14 and nut no. 15.
Torque nut to 10 Nm (88 lbfin).
NOTE: Install boot on sliding shaft before secur-
ing ball joint.
1. Washers
2. Bolt
3. Lock nut
ADJUSTMENT
Push on VTS button up position until motor stops.
When the nozzle is up (8), nozzle edge must not
interfere with venturi (there should be a gap of
1 mm (.039 in)).
NOTE: Activate timer to be able to position VTS.
1. No interference
2. Nozzle up
F01J0JA
1 2 3
F06J01C
2 1 3
F01J3IA
1
2
8
09-05-6
If an adjustment is necessary, loosen jam nut no. 16
of link rod ball joint no. 1. Turn adjustment nut of
ball joint to obtain the desired gap between trim
ring and venturi.
GSX LIMITED SHOWN
1. Turn adjustment nut of ball joint
Tighten jam nut of ball joint to 2.5 Nm (23 lbfin)
when adjustment is completed.
F06J01A
1
10-01-1
Section 10 STEERING SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
SPX MODEL........................................................................................................................... 10-02-1
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION....................................................................................... 10-02-2
GTS MODEL........................................................................................................................... 10-03-1
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION....................................................................................... 10-03-2
GS, GSX LIMITED, GTI AND GTX LIMITED......................................................................... 10-04-1
DISASSEMBLY................................................................................................................... 10-04-2
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 10-04-4
XP LIMITED............................................................................................................................ 10-05-1
DISASSEMBLY .................................................................................................................. 10-05-2
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 10-05-4
ALIGNMENT .......................................................................................................................... 10-06-1
Subsection 02 (SPX MODEL)
10-02-1
SPX MODEL 0
F01K1VS
1 Nm
(8.5 lbfin)
1
5
6
7
4
8
12
3
2
3
2
0.5 Nm
(4 lbfin)
1 Nm
(8.5 lbfin)
26 Nm
(19 lbfft)
8 Nm
(72 lbfin)
9
14
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
Synthetic
grease
13
17
11
10
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
15
13
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
16
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
19
7 Nm
(63 lbfin)
14 Nm
(10 lbfft)
19
14 Nm
(10 lbfft)
19
24
18
22
21
23
FLAT RATE PARTS
10-02-2
1, Cover
To replace the cover, loosen set screws no. 19 of
handlebar housing.
1. Set screw
Remove and reinstall 4 screws no. 2 and washers
no. 3.
1. Cover
2. Screws
4,8, Grip and Grip Insert
To remove grip, just pull out cap no. 5 from grip
end and remove screw no. 6 and washer no. 7.
Pull out grip.
To verify grip insert for damage, remove it from
handlebar.
When installing the grip insert in the handlebar
no. 12, ensure that its notch is properly inserted
in the hole beneath the handlebar.
Install grip no. 4 on handlebar no. 12 matching it
to the hex form on the grip insert.
Install flat washer no. 7 and screw no. 6.
Torque screw to 13 Nm (10 lbfft).
Install cap no. 5.
1. Grip insert
2. Grip
3. Flat washer
4. Screw. Torque to 13 Nm (10 lbfft)
5. Cap
9,12, Steering Stem and Handlebar
Disconnect wiring harnesses leading out of steer-
ing stem no. 9.
Disconnect throttle cable at carburetor.
Remove throttle cable from tie-blocks.
Unscrew bolts no. 16 retaining support no. 11 to
steering stem arm no. 10.
F00K01A
1
F00K02A
2 1
-
CAUTION
Ensure to install flat washer otherwise screw
will damage grip end.
F01K1PA
1 2
3
4
5
10-02-3
1. Bolts
2. Steering stem arm
Remove support no. 11 and steering stem arm
no. 10 from steering stem.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove steering ca-
ble from steering stem arm.
Pull out handlebar assembly.
the following.
Lubricate with synthetic grease thrust ring no. 13
of rear support no. 14 and front support no. 15.
REAR SUPPORT
1. Apply synthetic grease
2. Thrust ring shown removed for more clarity
FRONT SUPPORT
1. Apply synthetic grease
2. Thrust ring
NOTE: Make sure thrust rings are properly in-
stalled.
Install support no. 11 to steering stem arm
no. 10.
NOTE: Insert lock nuts no. 17 in support no. 11.
Screw only a few threads of the bolts no. 16.
TYPICAL
1. Support
3. Insert lock nuts
4. Screw only a few threads of the bolts
Install handlebar assembly into rear support
no. 14, taking care at the same time to insert
throttle cable and wiring harnesses.
-
CAUTION
While performing this procedure, take pre-
cautions to avoid damaging throttle cable
and wiring harnesses.
F01K17A 2
1
1
2 F01K0HA
F01K1FA
1
2
F01K09A
3
4
1
2
10-02-4
From bilge, route throttle cable and wiring har-
nesses into support no. 11 and steering stem arm
no. 10, and finally in front steering support
no. 15.
1. Install handlebar assembly
2. Route throttle cable and wiring harnesses at the same time
Push handlebar assembly until steering stem
no. 9 is well seated into steering supports no. 14
and no. 15.
1. Rear support (steering collar)
2. Front support
3. Steering stem
Position steering stem arm no. 10 and support
no. 11 onto steering stem.
Torque bolts of steering stem arm no. 10 to 6
Nm (53 lbfin).
1. Steering stem
3. Support
5. Integrated flat key must be seated in keyway and steering stem
arm locked in place
NOTE: Once steering stem arm is properly tight-
ened, look between body and front support to
make sure there is no gap between steering stem
arm and its support. If there is a gap, components
are not properly installed.
Connect wiring harnesses.
Route throttle cable alongside bilge. Insert cable
barrel into carburetor throttle lever.
Insert throttle cable alongside choke cable in tie-
blocks.
For throttle cable adjustment, refer to CARBURE-
TOR 06-04.
-
CAUTION
While performing this procedure, take pre-
cautions to avoid damaging throttle cable
and wiring harnesses.
F01K0AA
1
2
F01K1BA
1
3
2
N
WARNING
Make sure integrated flat key of steering
stem arm is properly seated in steering stem
keyway. Steering stem arm must be locked
in place before torquing the bolts.
F01K1NA
1
3
2
5
4
10-02-5
18, Steering Cable
Disconnect steering cable from steering stem
arm no. 10.
1. Disconnect steering cable
Remove retaining block no. 24 of cable support.
1. Remove retaining block
Disconnect ball joint no. 19 of steering cable from
jet pump nozzle.
Remove ball joint no. 19.
Remove battery. For procedure, refer to CHARG-
ING SYSTEM 08-03.
Loosen nut no. 20 of steering cable.
Pull cable from rear of watercraft and remove half
rings no. 21, O-ring no. 22 and retaining ring
no. 23.
Remove steering cable.
the following.
Make sure to secure steering cable in bilge using
tie raps.
Secure steering cable ball joint no. 19 on top of
steering arm.
1. Ball joint on top of arm
2. Torque nut to 7 Nm (62 lbfin)
STEERING ALIGNMENT
For steering alignment procedure, refer to ALIGN-
MENT 10-06.
F01K1WA
1
F01K18C
1
-
CAUTION
Ensure the ball joint is parallel ( 5) to the
nozzle arm.
F06K01A
1 2
Subsection 03 (GTS MODEL)
10-03-1
GTS MODEL 0
F02K0BS
5
Loctite
242
4
8
3.5 Nm
(30 lbfin)
7
6
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
1
29
26 Nm
(19 lbfft)
3
2
3.5 Nm
(30 lbfin)
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
Loctite
242
15
28
16
Anti-seize
lubricant
17
14
Loctite
242
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
18
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
Loctite
242
28
19
20
13
40 Nm
(30 lbfft)
Loctite
271
10
11
7 Nm
(63 lbfin)
12
12
9
20 Nm
(15 lbfft)
22
7 Nm
(63 lbfin)
21
23
24
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
27
26
25
2.5 Nm
(23 lbfin)
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
22
30
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
30
FLAT RATE PARTS
10-03-2
1, Cover
To replace the cover, loosen set screws no. 30 of
handlebar housing.
1. Set screw
Remove and reinstall 4 screws no. 2 and washers
no. 3.
1. Cover
2. Screws
To remove grip, just pull out cap no. 5 from grip
end and remove screw no. 6 and washer no. 7.
Pull out grip.
handlebar.
When installing the grip insert in handlebar
no. 29, ensure that its notch is properly inserted
in the hole beneath the handlebar.
Install cap no. 5.
1. Grip insert
2. Grip
3. Flat washer
5. Cap
17,29, Steering Stem and Handlebar
Disconnect wiring harnesses leading out of dash-
board hole.
Disconnect throttle cable at carburetor.
Remove throttle cable from tie-block and clip.
Unscrew nut no. 11 retaining locking plate no. 9;
then remove locking plate and washers no. 12.
Unscrew screw no. 13 of steering stem arm
no. 10.
Pull out handlebar and steering stem.
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect steering
cable to remove handlebar and steering stem.
Inspect bushings no. 28 for wear, cracks, scoring,
etc. Replace as necessary.
the following.
Insert throttle cable through dashboard hole and
slide grommet no. 14 on cable.
F00K01A
1
F00K02A
2 1
-
CAUTION
F01K1PA
1 2
3
4
5
10-03-3
Insert grommet no. 14 in dashboard hole and pull
it from inside bilge.
NOTE: To ease installation, apply water on grom-
met.
Insert wires of monitoring beeper and start/stop
button.
Insert spring washer no. 15 and the shim no. 16
onto steering stem no. 17.
Insert steering stem into support no. 18.
1. Steering stem
2. Grommet
3. Spring washer
4. Shim
Properly position steering stem arm no. 10 on
steering stem. Make sure to insert stem tenon
into arm mortise.
Apply Loctite 271 (red) on threads of screw
no. 13.
Install large flat washer no. 19, lock washer
no. 20 and screw no. 13. Torque screw to 40
Nm (30 Ibfft).
TYPICAL
1. Steering stem tenon
3. Mortise
4. Large flat washer with X
5. Lock washer
6. Screw, apply Loctite 271 and torque to 40 Nm (30 Ibfft)
Position 8 mm flat washer no. 12 on steering
stopper screw then install locking plate no. 9 over
steering stem head screw.
NOTE: Ensure locking plate slot is inserted in
steering stopper screw.
Install a second 8 mm flat washer no. 12 and se-
cure locking plate using jam nut no. 11. Torque
nut to 7 Nm (62 Ibfin).
STEERING CABLE NOT SHOWN FOR MORE CLARITY
1. Steering stem head screw
2. Locking plate
3. Steering stopper screw
4. 8 mm flat washers
-
CAUTION
Always install large flat washer with the X
stamped side facing the lock washer.
N
WARNING
The recommended torque and Loctite must
be applied on screw. Steering arm mortise
must seat properly on steering stem tenon.
F02K05A
1
2
3
4
F01K0VA
6
5
2
1
3
4
F01K10A
2
3
1
4
5
10-03-4
TYPICAL
21, Steering Cable
To replace steering cable, proceed as follows:
Disconnect front ball joint no. 22 of steering cable
at steering stem arm no. 19.
Loosen nuts no. 30 and open retaining block
no. 23.
TYPICAL
1. Ball joint
2. Steering cable
3. Retaining block
Disconnect rear ball joint no. 22 of steering cable
at jet pump nozzle; then, remove ball joint.
From bilge, unscrew nut no. 24 retaining steering
cable to hull.
Remove half rings no. 25, rubber washer no. 26
and retaining ring no. 27.
NOTE: Move shift lever in reverse position to
lower reverse gate. It will ease parts removal.
Remove steering cable from tie-block and clips.
Pull out steering cable.
to the following.
Inspect and reuse ball joints no. 22 only if they are
in good condition.
Secure rear ball joint to nozzle.
1. One washer each side of arm
STEERING ALIGNMENT
MENT 10-06.
F02K0CA
F02K0DE
1
3
2
-
CAUTION
nozzle arm.
F02K0HA
1
2
Subsection 04 (GS, GSX LIMITED, GTI AND GTX LIMITED)
10-04-1
GS, GSX LIMITED, GTI AND
GTX LIMITED 0
F07K0ES
6
6
5
5
1
3
2
4
4
7
7
12
13
14
8
18
16
15
17
9
10
11
10 Nm
(88 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
Loctite 242
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
14 Nm
(10 lbfft)
Loctite 242
3 Nm
(26 lbfin)
Loctite 242
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
Loctite
242
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
Loctite 242
26 Nm
(19 lbfft)
14 Nm
(10 lbfft)
23
21
22
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
19
20
21
25
24
27
26
FLAT RATE PARTS
10-04-2
DISASSEMBLY
To remove grip, pull out cap no. 2 and remove
screw no. 3.
Pull out grip.
handlebar no. 22.
4, Cover
Remove grips no. 1.
Loosen set screws no. 5 of handlebar housings
no. 6.
1. Set screw
Remove 4 screws no. 7.
TYPICAL
1. Cover
2. Screws
Remove 2 screws no. 20 and flat washers no. 21
each side of cover.
Remove cover.
8, Cable Support
Loosen bolts no. 9 and remove retaining block
no. 10.
1. Retaining block
Loosen bolts no. 11 each side of steering support
no. 12.
1. Steering support
2. Bolt
F00K01A
1
F00K02A
2 1
F01K18C
1
F07K02A
1 2
10-04-3
1. Steering support
2. Bolts
Remove support.
12, Steering Support
GTI and GTX Limited
Cut tie rap securing wiring harness boot.
1. Boot
2. Tie rap
All Models
Disconnect the throttle and choke cables from
carburetor levers.
Disconnect the wiring harnesses leading out of
steering stem and cut tie rap.
GS AND GSX LIMITED
1. Tie rap
2. Connectors
GTI AND GTX LIMITED
1. Tie rap
2. Connectors
Disconnect the steering cable from the steering
stem arm no. 15.
1 2
F07K03A
F07K04A
1 2
F06K03A
1
2
F07K05A
2 1
10-04-4
2. Steering cable
Loosen bolts no. 11 retaining cable support no. 8
to steering support no. 12.
Loosen bolts no. 13 and lock nuts no. 14.
1. Steering support
2. Bolt
3. Lock nut
Remove steering support with handlebar, wiring
harnesses and cables.
15,16, Steering Stem Arm and Support
Loosen bolts no. 17 retaining steering stem arm
to support.
2. Bolt
Remove steering stem arm and support.
24, Steering Cable
Disconnect steering cable from steering stem
arm no. 15.
Remove retaining block no. 10.
Disconnect ball joint no. 19 from jet pump nozzle.
Remove ball joint no. 19 and jam nut from cable.
Loosen nut no. 25, then remove half rings no. 26
and O-ring no. 27.
NOTE: To loosen nut, use steering cable tool (P/N
295 000 145).
Remove steering cable from watercraft.
ASSEMBLY
bly procedures. However, pay particular attention
to the following.
F07K06A
1
2
1
F07K07A
2
3
2
3
-
CAUTION
Apply all specified torques and service prod-
ucts as per main illustration at the beginning
of this sub-section.
F07K08A
2 1
2
10-04-5
When installing the grip insert no. 21 in the han-
dlebar no. 22, ensure that its notch is properly in-
serted in the hole beneath the handlebar.
Install cap no. 2.
1. Grip insert
2. Grip
3. Flat washer
5. Cap
Position steering stem arm and support onto
steering stem.
1. Keyways
2. Integrated flat key
Replace lock nuts no. 18 by new ones.
Torque bolts no. 17 of steering stem arm to
6 Nm (53 lbfin).
19, Ball Joint
Secure the steering cable ball joint no. 19 to the
nozzle as per following illustrations.
TYPICAL
1. Ball joint on top of steering arm
-
CAUTION
N
WARNING
Make sure the integrated flat keys of the
steering stem arm and support are properly
seated in steering stem keyways. Steering
stem arm must be locked in place before
torquing the bolts.
F01K1PA
1 2
3
4
5
-
CAUTION
nozzle arm.
F07K09A
2
1
2
F06K01A
1 2
10-04-6
GS and GTI Models
TYPICAL
1. Bolt
2. Flat washers
3. Lock nut. Torque to 2 Nm (18 lbfin)
STEERING ALIGNMENT
MENT 10-06.
F00J01A
2
1
3
Subsection 05 (XP LIMITED)
10-05-1
XP LIMITED 0
Engine cover
Engine cover
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
8
18
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
Loctite 242
Loctite
242
Loctite 242
19
20
6 Nm (53 lbfin)
6 Nm (53 lbfin)
25
26
27
11
24
23
22
21
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
Synthetic grease
16
7 Nm (62 lbfin)
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
14
7
7
2 Nm
(17 lbfin)
9
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
2
3
4
1
5
28
26 Nm
(19 lbfft)
12
Loctite 242
10
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
13
Loctite 242
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
Synthetic grease
15
Loctite
242
17
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
F08K04S
6
6
FLAT RATE PARTS
10-05-2
DISASSEMBLY
1, Grip
To remove grip, pull out cap no. 2 from grip end
and remove screw no. 3 and washer no. 4.
Pull out grip.
5, Grip Insert
handlebar.
6, Cover
To remove the cover, loosen set screws no. 7 of
handlebar housing.
1. Set screws
Remove 4 screws no. 8 and washers no. 9.
TYPICAL
1. Cover
2. Screws
Remove 2 screws no. 9 and flat washers each
side of cover.
10, Lever
Open engine cover.
Remove the top section of the engine cover by
loosening the 10 Allen screws located inside the
cover.
1. Loosen Allen screws
Lift the top section of the engine cover and dis-
connect wiring harnesses.
Remove the top section of the engine cover.
Disconnect steering cable no. 11.
F00K01A
1
F00K02A
2 1
1
F08L0KB
1 1
1 1
F08K05A 1
10-05-3
Remove link rod no. 12.
1. Remove link rod
Remove bolt no. 13 and washer.
1. Remove bolt and washer
Loosen bolts no. 17 retaining steering stem arm
no. 15 and support no. 16.
1. Loosen bolts
Loosen nuts and bolts of steering support no. 18.
1. Loosen nuts and bolts
F08K06A
1
F08K07A
1
F08K08A 1
F08K09A
1 1
10-05-4
Lift steering support no. 18 and slightly pullback
steering stem no. 14 in order to remove the sup-
port no. 16 and steering stem arm no. 15.
1. Remove support and steering stem arm
14, Steering Stem
Disconnect wiring harnesses, choke and throttle
cables from engine.
Remove steering stem.
11, Steering Cable
Remove glove box.
Disconnect steering cable at lever no. 10.
Loosen cable support no. 19.
1. Loosen cable support
Remove retaining block no. 20.
Disconnect ball joint no. 21 of steering cable from
jet pump nozzle.
Remove ball joint no. 21, jam nut no. 22 and
boots no. 23 and no. 24.
Loosen nut no. 25 and remove half rings no. 26
and O-ring no. 27.
NOTE: To loosen nut, use steering cable tool (P/N
295 000 145).
Remove steering cable from watercraft.
ASSEMBLY
bly procedure. However, pay particular attention
to the following.
10, Lever
Prior installing lever, apply synthetic grease to piv-
ot.
F08k0AA
1
F08K05A 1
F08K0BB
1
10-05-5
14, Steering Stem
Apply synthetic grease to front and rear thrust
bearing surface.
Position steering stem arm and support onto
steering stem no. 14.
When installing the grip insert no. 5 in the handle-
bar no. 28, ensure that its notch is properly insert-
ed in the hole beneath the handlebar.
to the hex form on the grip insert no. 5.
1. Grip insert
2. Grip
3. Flat washer
4. Torque screw to 13 Nm (10 lbfft)
5. Cap
21, Ball Joint
Secure the steering cable ball joint no. 21 to the
nozzle as per following illustration.
TYPICAL
1. Ball joint on top of steering arm
STEERING ALIGNMENT
MENT 10-06.
N
WARNING
Make sure integrated flat keys of steering
stem arm and support are properly seated in
steering stem keyways.
N
WARNING
Correct torque must be strictly followed.
F01K1PA
1 2
3
4
5
-
CAUTION
-
CAUTION
nozzle arm.
F06K01A
1 2
Subsection 06 (ALIGNMENT)
10-06-1
ALIGNMENT 0
Position handlebar in straight ahead position by
measuring each side the distance from handlebar
grip end to floorboard.
TYPICAL
1. Measuring handlebar grip end/floorboard distance
Check jet pump nozzle position by placing a
straight edge on nozzle outer end. Measure the
distance on each side of the straight edge. It must
be equalled.
TYPICAL
1. Measure the distance on each side of the straight edge
If necessary, steering alignment adjustment should
be performed at steering cable support.
Open storage compartment cover and remove
basket.
XP Limited
Remove glove box.
All Models
Loosen retaining block at cable support.
Turn adjustment nut as required.
SPX, GS, GSX LIMITED, GTI AND GTX LIMITED
1. Retaining block
2. Adjustment nut
3. Bolts
F01K07A
1
F01J03A
1
F01K18A
1
3
2
Subsection 06 (ALIGNMENT)
10-06-2
XP LIMITED
1. Support
2. Adjustment nut
3. Bolts
GTS MODEL
1. Retaining block
2. Adjustment nut
3. Bolts
After adjustment, torque retaining block bolts to
6 Nm (53 Ibfin).
F08K0BA
1
2
3
-
CAUTION
Verify when the handlebar is turned com-
pletely to the left or right side, that there is
no interference with venturi.
F03K03A
2
3
1
11-01-1
Section 11 SUSPENSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
DIRECT ACTION SUSPENSION............................................................................................ 11-02-1
REMOVAL .......................................................................................................................... 11-02-2
INSPECTION...................................................................................................................... 11-02-3
ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................................... 11-02-3
Subsection 02 (DIRECT ACTION SUSPENSION)
11-02-1
DIRECT ACTION SUSPENSION 0
XP Limited
10
11
3
13
12
5
8
6
9
4
7
F08Q02S
34 Nm
(25 lbfft)
2
1
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
10 Nm
(89 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Loctite
242
34 Nm
(25 lbfft)
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
11-02-2
REMOVAL
1, Shock Absorber
Loosen 4 screws and remove bottom cover of
seat.
1. Remove cover
Loosen gear clamp no. 2 of outer boot no. 3, then
pull outer boot downward.
Remove rear access panel from body.
Loosen lower gear clamp no. 4, then push inner
boot no. 5 upward.
Remove bolt no. 6 and lock nut no. 7 from shock
absorber lower support no. 8.
1. Bolt
2. Lock nut
Tilt seat upward.
Loosen upper gear clamp no. 9 of inner boot
no. 5.
F08L11A 1
F08L12A 1
F08I03B 1
F08Q03A 2 1
11-02-3
Remove bolt no. 10 and lock nut no. 11 from
shock absorber upper support.
1. Bolt
2. Lock nut
Remove shock absorber/coil spring assembly.
3, Outer Boot
Pull outer boot to remove it from body.
12, Coil Spring
Install spring compressor tool (P/N 529 027 100)
in a vise.
Install shock absorber/coil spring assembly in
spring compressor tool.
Compress spring and remove cup no. 13.
Unload tool and remove spring from shock ab-
sorber.
INSPECTION
3,5, Boot
Inspect condition of boots. If there is any tear, re-
new boot(s).
1, Shock Absorber
Inspect shock absorber for wear. Extend and com-
press the piston several times over its entire
stroke; it should move smoothly and with uniform
resistance.
Pay attention to the following conditions that will
denote a defective shock absorber:
A skip or a hang back when reversing stroke at
mid travel.
Seizing or binding condition except at extreme
end of either stroke.
Oil leakage.
A gurgling noise, after completing one full com-
pression and extension stroke.
Renew if any defects are present.
ASSEMBLY
bly procedure. Refer to the main illustration at the
beginning of this sub-section for torque specifica-
tions and service products to be used.
N
WARNING
Do not attempt to dismantle a spring with-
out using the proper tool.
F08L13A 1
F08Q04A 2 1
F05L0NA
12-01-1
Section 12 HULL/BODY
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR ................................................................................................ 12-02-1
SEAT ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................... 12-02-17
STORAGE COMPARTMENT COVER ADJUSTMENT ...................................................... 12-02-19
ACCESS PANEL ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................... 12-02-20
INLET GRATE REMOVAL................................................................................................... 12-02-20
RIDING PLATE.................................................................................................................... 12-02-20
JET PUMP SUPPORT ........................................................................................................ 12-02-21
DEFLECTOR ....................................................................................................................... 12-02-22
DRAIN PLUG INSTALLATION........................................................................................... 12-02-22
SEAT REMOVAL................................................................................................................. 12-02-23
SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT .......................................................................................... 12-02-24
BUMPER REPLACEMENT................................................................................................. 12-02-24
SPONSON REPLACEMENT .............................................................................................. 12-02-25
BAFFLE SEALING.............................................................................................................. 12-02-25
ENGINE COVER REMOVAL............................................................................................... 12-02-26
DECALS REPLACEMENT .................................................................................................. 12-02-26
HULL AND BODY REPAIR................................................................................................. 12-02-27
TOOLS AND MATERIALS LIST......................................................................................... 12-02-29
HULL INSERT REPAIR ....................................................................................................... 12-02-30
Subsection 02 (ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR)
12-02-1
ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR 0
SPX Model
F01L6HS
3
Loctite
271
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
271
Loctite
242
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
1 2
Loctite
271
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Sealant
732
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
10
Sealant
732
7
8
9
Loctite
242
6
Loctite 271
Sealant 732
Body
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-2
F01L6IS
12
13
Loctite
242
15
6 Nm
(53 lbfin)
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
Loctite
271
Sealant
732
Loctite
271
Sealant
732
1.5 Nm
(13 lbfin)
Sealant 732
5
12
4
14
12
4
5
12
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-3
GTS Model
F02L26S
3
Loctite
271
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Loctite
271
1
2
Loctite 271
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Sealant
732
8 7
9 10
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
6
11
Loctite
271
Sealant
732
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-4
F02L27S
7 Nm
(62 lbfin)
12
Loctite 242
13
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
Loctite
271
Sealant 732
4
5
4
12
14
12
12
5
Sealant
732
15
1.5 Nm
(13 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-5
GS and GSX Limited
F06L01S
Loctite
242
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Loctite
242
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
271
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
3
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
271
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
242
7
8
9
10
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Sealant
732
6
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-6
F06L02S
Loctite
271
13
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
242
12
Sealant
732
15
Sealant
732
2.5 Nm
(22 lbfin)
Loctite
271
Sealant
732
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
4
5
12
12
14
12
5
4
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-7
GTI and GTX Limited
F07L03S
Loctite
271
Loctite
242
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
271
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
271
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
271
Loctite
242
3
10
10
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Sealant
732
Loctite
271
Left
side
only
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
Body
Sealant
732
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
7
8
9
6
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-8
Loctite
271
Loctite
242
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
271
15 Nm (11 lbfft)
Loctite
271
Sealant
732
Sealant
732
1.5 Nm
(13 lbfft)
Sealant
732
F07L04S
12
13
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
12
4
5
4
5
12
14
12
15
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-9
F07L05S
1.4 Nm
(12 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
0.8 Nm
(7 lbfin)
Loctite
242
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite
242
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Loctite 242
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
3 Nm
(26 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-10
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
Loctite 242
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
Loctite 242
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite 242
5 Nm (44 lbfin)
Loctite 242
5 Nm (44 lbfin)
Loctite 242
F07L06S
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-11
XP Limited
F08L14S
Loctite 242
732 sealant
10 9
8
7
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
732 sealant
Loctite
242
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
Body
6
2
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-12
Loctite
271
732 sealant
3
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
Body
12
13
F08L15S
Body
732 sealant
Loctite
271
1.5 Nm
(13 lbfin)
14
Loctite
271
3
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Body
15
4
5
12
12
12
5
4
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-13
F08L16S
Loctite 242
15 Nm
(11 lbfft)
17
5 Nm
(44 lbfin)
Loctite 242
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
Loctite 271
13 Nm
(10 lbfft)
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
23
22
21
20
19
18
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
24
Synthetic
grease
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-14
Loctite 242
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
F08L17S
Loctite
242
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
Loctite
242
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
Loctite
242
8 Nm
(71 lbfin)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
Loctite 242
Loctite 648
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-15
Loctite
271
3 Nm
(27 lbfin)
F08L18S
2 Nm
(18 lbfin)
Engine
cover
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-16
Loctite
242
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
F08L19S
22 Nm
(16 lbfft)
4 Nm
(35 lbfin)
Loctite
242
Loctite 242
FLAT RATE PARTS
12-02-17
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Adjust seat retainer no. 1 as per following specifi-
cations:
SPX, GTI AND GTX LIMITED
1. Seat retainer
2. Adjustment nut (Loctite 271)
3. Nut (Loctite 242). Torque to 8 Nm (71 lbfin)
A. 25 1 mm (63/64 3/64 in)
GS AND GSX LIMITED
1. Seat retainer
2. Adjustment nut (apply Loctite 271)
3. Nut (apply Loctite 242 and torque to 8 Nm (71 lbfin)
A. 21 1 mm (53/64 3/64 in)
GTS MODEL
1. Front hook
3. Nut (Loctite 242). Torque to 8 Nm (71 lbfin)
A. 22.5 (+ 1, - 0) mm (51/64 (+ 1/32, - 0) in)
Adjust lock pin no. 2 as per following specifica-
tions:
SPX MODEL
1. Lock pin
A. 37 1 mm (1-29/64 3/64 in)
F02L24A
3
2
1
A
F02L24A
3
2
1
A
F02L24A
3
2
1
A
F02L25C
A
3
2
1
12-02-18
GS AND GSX LIMITED
1. Lock pin
A. 33.5 1 mm (1-5/16 3/64 in)
GTS MODEL
1. Lock pin
A. 38 1 mm (1-1/2 3/64 in)
GTI AND GTX LIMITED FRONT SEAT
1. Lock pin
A. 39 1 mm (1-35/64 3/64 in)
GTI AND GTX LIMITED REAR SEAT
1. Lock pin
A. 33.5 1 mm (1-5/16 3/64 in)
F06L03A
A
1
2
F02L25C
A
3
2
1
F07L08A
A
2
1
F06L03A
A
1
2
12-02-19
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust lock pin no. 3 as per following specifica-
tions:
SPX AND GTS MODELS
1. Lock pin
A. 37 1 mm (1-29/64 3/64 in)
GS AND GSX LIMITED
1. Lock pin (apply Loctite 271)
2. Adjustment nut
A. 34 1 mm (1-11/32 3/64 in)
GTI AND GTX LIMITED
1. Lock pin (apply Loctite 242)
2. Rubber washer
3. Flat washers
A. 39.2 1 mm (1-35/64 3/64 in)
NOTE: The GTI and GTX Limited have a floating
type lock pin. It is normal to have a front and aft
play of the lock pin. To adjust, tighten lock pin until
any vertical play is eliminated. Make sure a front
and aft play remains when pressing by hands.
XP LIMITED
1. Lock pin
A. 13.4 mm (17/32 in)
F02L25C
A
3
2
1
F06L04A
A
2
1
F07L09A
A
3
1 2
F08L1AA
A
1
12-02-20
ACCESS PANEL ADJUSTMENT
XP Limited
Adjust lock pin no. 3 of access panel as per fol-
lowing specifications:
1. Lock pin
A. 39 1 mm (1-17/32 3/64 in)
Adjust bolts no. 16 of access panel arms as per
following specifications:
1. Lock nut. Torque to 22 Nm (16 lbfft)
A. 33 1 mm (1-19/64 3/64 in)
INLET GRATE REMOVAL
Loosen screws and remove inlet grate.
NOTE: An impact screwdriver should be used to
loosen tight screws.
RIDING PLATE
Removal
Remove inlet grate.
Remove jet pump. Refer to JET PUMP 09-02.
Remove the speed sensor from the riding plate (if
applicable).
Loosen riding plate screws.
NOTE: An impact screwdriver should be used to
loosen tight screws.
Using a low height hydraulic bottle jack and 2 steel
plates, pry out riding plate.
TYPICAL
1. Hydraulic bottle jack
2. Steel plates
Installation
Apply Loctite The Right Stuff Gasket as indicat-
ed by the shaded areas in the next illustrations.
Follow also the torquing sequence (if applicable) as
shown in the same illustrations.
SPX AND GTS MODELS
1. Apply Loctite The Right Stuff Gasket as indicated by the shaded
area
F08L1BA
1
2
3
A
F05L0VA
A
1
F05J03A
2 1
F01J1VA
1
12-02-21
GS, GSX LIMITED, GTI AND GTX LIMITED
XP LIMITED
JET PUMP SUPPORT
Removal
Remove jet pump. Refer to JET PUMP 09-02.
Remove inlet grate and riding plate.
Remove ball joint, boot, nut, half rings and O-rings
from steering cable.
TYPICAL
1. Unscrew nut
Remove ball joint, boot, nut, half rings and O-rings
from reverse cable (GTI and GTX Limited).
Remove boot and nut from VTS sliding shaft (GSX
Limited and XP Limited).
Disconnect water supply hose, water return hose
and bailer hoses.
Remove nuts, lock washers and flat washers re-
taining jet pump support.
TYPICAL
1. Remove nuts
Using a heat gun, heat jet pump support until it is
possible to pull it.
F07L0DA
3 7 1 8 2 4
5 6
F08L1CA
6
8 2
4
7 1
3 5
F05K02A
1
F07L0AA
1
12-02-22
NOTE: Shims may have been installed between
support and body. Do not remove these shims,
otherwise jet pump alignment will be altered.
Installation
Apply Loctite The Right Stuff Gasket as indicated
by the shaded areas in the next illustrations. Fol-
low also the torquing sequence as shown in the
same illustrations.
GS, GSX LIMITED, GTI AND GTX LIMITED
XP LIMITED
DEFLECTOR
GS, GSX Limited, GTI and GTX Limited
Removal
Using a heat gun, heat deflector and pry it using a
piece of wood.
Installation
Apply Loctite 598 Ultra Black as indicated by the
shaded area in the following illustration.
DRAIN PLUG INSTALLATION
Refer to the following illustration to install drain
plug no. 15.
1. Drain plug
2. Gasket and 732 sealant
3. Torque screws to 1.5 Nm (13 lbfin)
4. From inside bilge, apply 732 sealant on screws
F07L0CA
3
2 1
4
F08L1DA
3 4
1 2
F07L0BA
F05L13A
1
2
3
4
4
12-02-23
SEAT REMOVAL
XP Limited
Loosen 4 screws and remove bottom cover
no. 17 of seat.
1. Remove cover
Loosen gear clamp of outer boot; then, pull outer
boot downward.
Loosen gear clamp of inner boot; then, pull boot
downward.
1. Gear clamp
Remove bolt and lock nut from shock absorber
upper support.
1. Bolt
2. Lock nut
F08L11A 1
F08L12A 1
F08L13A 1
F08Q04A 2 1
12-02-24
Remove protective caps no. 18 and loosen screws
no. 19 to remove eyelet no. 20 on each side of
seat.
1. Loosen screws of eyelet
Remove cup no. 21 on each side of seat.
Loosen nut no. 23 on each side of seat.
1. Loosen nut
Tilt seat.
Loosen screws no. 24 on each side of seat retain-
ing the side covers.
Lower seat.
Remove side covers.
Pull seat frame out of pivots.
Remove seat.
Seat installation is essentially the reverse of re-
moval procedure. Refer to the main illustration of
seat at the beginning of this subsection for proper
torque specifications and service products to be
used.
SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT
Install staples with an electric tacker such as Ar-
row tacker no. ETN-50 or with a manual tacker
such as Arrow tacker no. T-50.
NOTE: For an easier installation, its highly recom-
mended to use an electric tacker.
Ensure that the seat rest firmly against a hard sur-
face such as a piece of wood. This is done to get
the staples completely pushed in place.
TYPICAL
1. Piece of wood
2. ETN-50 (electric) or T-50 (manual)
After cover installation cut all around the excess
of material.
BUMPER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove trim no. 5 from side bumper rail no. 4.
2. Drill pop rivets no. 12 to remove side bumper
rail no. 4.
3. Mark hole positions on body straight and bow
sections.
F08L1EA
1
1
F08L1FA
F01L3YA 2
1
12-02-25
TYPICAL
1. Front bumper
2. Corner bumper
3. Straight section
4. Bow section
4. Slide bumper rail no. 4 under front bumper
no. 13.
5. Using a 4.80 mm (3/16 in) drill bit, drill first
hole through bumper rail no. 4 at front of bow
section. Use locating mark as a guide. Then
install a rivet no. 12.
6. Position bumper rail no. 4 properly onto body
and cut excess length if necessary.
7. Slide bumper rail no. 4 in corner bumper
no. 14.
8. Using hole positions previously marked on
body, drill holes in bumper rail no. 4 and install
rivets no. 12.
9. Install trim no. 5 using soapy water.
10. Repeat procedure for the other side.
SPONSON REPLACEMENT
Remove seat (access cover for the XP Limited).
Remove air vent tube support (SPX, GS and GSX
Limited).
Remove seat support (GTI and GTX Limited).
Remove muffler.
Remove battery.
From bilge, unscrew sponsons no. 6 using a 10 mm
deep socket with an extension.
Remove sponsons no. 6. Clean any residues of
sealant adhesive on hull.
Install gaskets no. 7 on new sponsons no. 6.
Apply 732 sealant (P/N 293 800 006) or sealant ad-
hesive (P/N 293 800 033) around sponson studs.
Apply Loctite 242 (blue) on sponson studs.
Install sponsons no. 6 on hull.
From bilge, first insert flat washers no. 8 over
sponson studs, then lock washers no. 9. Secure
with lock nuts no. 10. Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lbfin).
NOTE: To ease flat washer and lock washer instal-
lation, use a flexible 4-claw Snap-on pick-up tool.
Reinstall removed parts.
Clean hull and sponsons of any sealant adhesive
surplus.
BAFFLE SEALING
GTS Model
Apply Sikaflex primer 449 (P/N 293 530 012) on
rear baffle no. 11 and body sections to be sealed.
Apply Sikaflex sealant 221 (P/N 293 530 011) on
rear baffle section to be sealed.
Before using the watercraft wait 3 days for Sikaf-
lex curing time.
-
CAUTION
When drilling, be careful not to damage
bumper rail and/or hull.
RES
1
2
4 3
F01L4GA
;
WARNING
Recommended torques and use of Loctite
must be strictly followed.
-
CAUTION
Allow at least 30 minutes for primer to cure.
F01P09A
12-02-26
ENGINE COVER REMOVAL
XP Limited
Disconnect throttle and choke cables at carbure-
tor linkage.
Disconnect wiring harnesses of start/stop button,
monitoring beeper, safety lanyard switch and
gauges.
Loosen bolts and nuts of hinge from watercraft
body.
Disconnect the gas assist cylinder.
Remove engine cover.
Engine cover installation is essentially the reverse
of removal procedure. Refer to the main illustra-
tion of engine cover at the beginning of this sub-
section for proper torque specifications and ser-
vice products to be used.
DECALS REPLACEMENT
Removal
Using a heat gun warm up one end of decal for a
few seconds until decal can roll off when rubbing
with your finger.
Pull decal slowly and when necessary apply more
heat to ease removal on the area that has to be
peeled off.
If decal tears while pulling off, it has to be heated
for a few seconds longer. If decal tends to stretch
while pulling off, stop heating and wait a few sec-
onds to let it cool, then peel it off.
Installation
There are 2 types of decals used on watercraft.
One has a protective film on back side and the
other has a protective film on both sides. They are
used on 3 types of materials; plastic, gelcoat and
metal.
DECALS HAVING A PROTECTIVE FILM ON
BACK SIDE ONLY
These decals usually contain written information
(ex.: warning) and are used on gelcoat or metal.
Clean surface with a good solvent such as
ACRYLICLEAN DX 330 from PPG or equivalent
(refer to manufacturer instructions).
Using a pencil and the decal as a template, mark
the area where decal will be located.
Remove half of the decal back protective film and
align decal with marks. Start sticking it from cen-
ter and remove the other half of the film to stick it
completely. Carefully squeegee decal beginning
at center and working outward using, firm, short,
overlapping strokes.
DECALS HAVING A PROTECTIVE FILM ON
BOTH SIDES
These decals usually contain graphics and are used
on gelcoat or plastic.
INSTALLATION ON GELCOAT
Clean surface with a good solvent such as ACRY-
LI-CLEAN DX 330 from PPG or equivalent (refer to
manufacturer instructions).
For best result apply an activator (P/N 293 530
036) to prepare the surface using a clean cloth.
After a few seconds, when the activator evapo-
rates, the surface is ready.
Using a pencil and the decal as a template mark
For better adhesion a dry application is recom-
mended, however, to ease decal installation a mild
solution of soapy water can be sprayed over sur-
face where decal will be installed.
Remove back protective film from decal and align
decal with marks. When well aligned squeegee
decal beginning at center and working outward
using firm, short, overlapping strokes.
Remove front protective film once decal has ad-
hered to hull.
INSTALLATION ON PLASTIC (STORAGE COVER)
Clean surface with isopropyl alcohol.
Using a pencil and the decal as a template, mark
Apply an activator (P/N 293 530 036) to prepare the
surface using a clean cloth. After a few seconds,
when the activator evaporates, the surface is ready.
Remove back protective film from decal and care-
fully align decal with marks. When well aligned
squeegee decal beginning at center and working
outward using firm, short, overlapping strokes.
Remove front protective film once decal has ad-
hered.
-
CAUTION
Do not use soapy water to locate decal on
plastic parts.
12-02-27
HULL AND BODY REPAIR
General
Gelcoat is the smooth and durable cosmetic finish
which coats the fiberglass hull and body of a Sea-
Doo watercraft. It also provides a protective barri-
er against water and sun. It consists of a mixture
of resin, pigment (coloring), fillers, monomers and
catalyst which is sprayed into the mold.
The body and hull of the Sea-Doo are constructed
of chopped fiberglass, saturated with resin. It is
sprayed on the layer of gelcoat along with pieces
of fiberglass mat, cloth and woven rowing which
are added at required areas. This type of construc-
tion is very accommodating for high quality re-
pairs. With patience, the proper techniques and
materials, a damaged area can be restored to an
original finish.
NOTE: Fiberglass repair kit is available through
automotive or marine suppliers. Gelcoat repair kits
are available through regular channel.
Air Bubbles
Possible cause:
Air pocket trapped between layers of laminate
and gelcoat.
PREPARATION OF SURFACE
Remove all of the damaged gelcoat surrounding
the air bubble with a putty knife or preferably a
carbide grinding tip. Make sure all loose and weak
areas are completely removed. Sand a small area
of the gelcoat surface with 220-grit sandpaper. If
needed, sand the cavity itself. These areas must
have a rough surface to allow the gelcoat putty to
bond properly.
FILLING THE CAVITY
The prepared surface must be cleaned with ace-
tone on a cloth. Use the Bombardier gelcoat repair
kit (P/N 295 500 100). Follow the mixing instruc-
tions in the kit when preparing the gelcoat putty.
Carefully mix the required amount while making
sure there are no air bubbles in the mixture. With
a putty knife, fill the repair area and cover with
plastic film. Curing time may depend on tempera-
ture, amount of putty and percentage of catalyst.
After 2 hours, press lightly on the surface with fin-
gers to test the hardness. When the area be-
comes hard, remove the plastic film.
SANDING
Begin block sanding the patch with 320-grit sand-
paper until you come close to the original surface.
Remove dust with a water soaked cloth and con-
tinue sanding with a 400-grit wet paper. Finish
wet sanding with a 600-grit to remove deeper
scratches. If needed you can wet sand with finer
grit paper such as 1000-grit.
BUFFING AND WAXING
Buff the surface using a heavy duty polisher with
a buffing pad. Make sure the pad is free of dirt or
you may damage the gelcoat. Carefully begin
buffing with a white medium compound. Finish
off using a fine compound. While buffing, pay
close attention to avoid overheating the surface.
Blisters
Possible causes:
Insert catalyst.
Improper catalyst/gelcoat ratio.
A blister is a visible bump on the watercraft sur-
face that may not necessarily come right through
the gelcoat layer. In the case of only a few blisters,
follow the same repair procedure as for air bub-
bles. If they are numerous and in close concentra-
tion, spray liquid gelcoat to achieve proper repair.
This procedure is covered in Minor Gelcoat Frac-
tures.
Minor Gelcoat Fractures
Possible Causes:
Flexing of fiberglass laminate.
Gelcoat thickness.
Direct result of impact.
;
WARNING
Protect skin, wear gloves when in contact
with resin, hardeners and gelcoat. A barrier
skin cream may also be used. Do not expose
area to open flame or lit cigarette. Some of
the materials are flammable. Protect eyes,
wear safety glasses when grinding, sanding
or spraying. Use a dust mask when sanding
or grinding. When spraying wear a respira-
tor or paint mask. Always read warning la-
bels on products.
12-02-28
In case of fractures which have not penetrated
past the gelcoat layer, the repair concerns the
gelcoat only. If flex cracking or impact are evident,
then additional reinforcement may be necessary.
This subject will be covered in Compound Frac-
tures.
PREPARING THE SURFACES
Small Fractures
Open the cracks up with a sharp triangular can
opener or preferably a carbide tipped die grinder.
The V groove will provide a good bonding area for
the gelcoat. With 220-grit sandpaper, sand the
sides of the notched out areas.
Numerous Fractures
Using a grinder with a 24-grit disk, remove the
gelcoat. Sand the area edge with 220-grit sandpa-
per.
FILLING THE REPAIR AREA
Small Fractures
Refer to the same procedure as in the Air Bub-
bles.
Numerous Fractures Over Large Surface:
Prepare the area for spray application of liquid
gelcoat. Wipe down the surface with acetone.
Mask the area off to protect the watercraft from
overspray.
Mix the needed quantity of gelcoat and catalyst
according to suppliers recommendations. The
gelcoat can be thinned with acetone up to 10%. If
it needs more consistency you can add cabosil.
Make sure that the air supply is free of oil, dirt and
water.
Test spray the gelcoat mixture on paper to verify
its consistency and pattern. You may have to ap-
ply 5 or 6 coats to cover the area properly. Overlap
each coat further than the last, leaving at least 30
seconds between passes. Avoid trying to coat the
surface with only a few heavy coats, this will not
allow the gelcoat to dry properly.
Apply a coat of polyvinyl alcohol to seal off the air
and protect the gelcoat surface from dust. PVA
speeds up the curing process because gelcoat
will not cure properly when exposed to air.
SANDING
Wash the polyvinyl alcohol off with water. De-
pending on the size of the area repaired, you can
either block sand as per previous procedure or
you may use an air sander. Sand the surface down
with progressively finer grits of sandpaper until
the desired finish is achieved.
BUFFING AND WAXING
Buff the surface using a heavy duty polisher with
a buffing pad. Make sure the pad is free of dirt or
you may damage the gelcoat. Carefully begin
buffing with a white medium compound. Finish
off using a fine compound. While buffing, pay
close attention to avoid overheating the surface.
Compound Fractures
Possible causes:
Thickness of fiberglass laminate.
Direct result of impact.
Compound fractures are those that have gone
past the gelcoated surface and in through the lay-
ers of fiberglass laminate. Two types of repairs
have to be performed. The first is to restore the
structural integrity of the damaged area. Fracture
types can vary from a simple crack to a large hole.
Usually, fiberglass reinforcement becomes nec-
essary, especially if the fracture can be attributed
to weakness. The final part of the repair is the
gelcoating, which cannot be done until the interior
and exterior laminate surfaces have been re-
paired.
Outside
Remove the damaged gelcoat and fiberglass with
a 24-grit disk using a power sander. Grind outward
at least 2 inches from the fracture to allow the
patch to bond to strong material. Cut enough piec-
es of fiberglass mat necessary to build up the ar-
ea. The pieces should be cut so they overlap each
other by at least a half inch. For a smoother finish,
the last layer should be fiberglass cloth. If the frac-
ture is small enough all you may have to do is fill
the area with an epoxy filler.
Inside
For the interior repair, you can grind more. This
will allow for more fiberglass material which will
strengthen the area. If the fracture opening is too
large after surface preparation, you may need a
backing support to cover the opening. Cut alter-
nating pieces of fiberglass mat and cloth in over-
lapping sizes.
12-02-29
PATCHING THE REPAIR AREA
Outside
The outside should be done first. Wipe clean the
area with acetone on a cloth, then mask off area.
For a small crack use an epoxy filler in the same
way you would use Bombardiers gelcoat repair
putty. When laying up a larger area you will use
mat, cloth and fiberglass resin and hardener. Use
a clean container to mix the resin, mix only what
you will need. Follow the recommended catalyst
ratio.
Using a clean paintbrush, brush the mixed resin
on the surface. Place the smallest piece of mat
over the fracture and then wet out the mat. Fol-
low with the remaining pieces of mat and final lay-
er of cloth. While wetting the pieces make sure
you work the air bubbles out and saturate all the
pieces evenly. Try to work quickly, you may only
have 15 or 20 minutes. You may clean the brush
with acetone.
Wait until the repair has hardened before moving
on to the interior repair. If the size of the opening
is too large for the pieces to maintain the proper
shape, you will have to use a backing support. It is
a shaped piece of cardboard that fits flush to the
interior surface and has a plastic layer on the re-
pair side. It is held in place by tape or a support.
Inside
Wipe down the area with acetone on a cloth. Ap-
ply the same procedure as for outside repair when
laminating the alternating pieces of fiberglass ma-
terial. If a backing support was used, remove it
before starting the repair. After the area has hard-
ened, remove sharp edges of material from sur-
face. If required paint the surface.
SANDING
Outside
This surface will have to be prepared for applica-
tion of gelcoat. The size of the area will determine
the gelcoating procedure to be used. Refer to the
repair procedure for minor gelcoat fractures.
BUFFING AND WAXING
Refer to the buffing and waxing for Minor Gelcoat
Fractures.
TOOLS AND MATERIALS LIST
Tools
safety glasses
air mask
white cloths
sanding block
putty knife
plastic film
stirring stick
cover sheets (for Sea-Doo)
scissors
buffing pad
heavy-duty polisher
power sander
paint brush
plastic container (mixing)
spray gun
plastic squeegee
Materials
fiberglass mat
fiberglass cloth
polyester resin
cardboard
masking tape
sandpaper (100-grit, 220-grit, 320-grit, 400-grit,
600-grit, 1000-grit)
24-grit sanding disks
Bombardier gelcoat putty
Bombardier liquid gelcoat
acetone
cabosil
epoxy filler
medium compound (white)
fine compound (white)
wax
12-02-30
HULL INSERT REPAIR
For hull insert repair proceed as follows:
Cut plastic hull insert flush with hull using a saw.
1. Hull
2. Plastic hull insert
Mix epoxy glue (3M-05900), follow manufacturer
instructions.
Apply epoxy glue on aluminum insert (P/N 292
000 075) knurled surface and on plastic insert in-
ner bore.
1. Knurled surface
2. Inner bore
Install aluminum insert into plastic hull insert.
NOTE: Align aluminum insert as much as possi-
ble with PTO flywheel.
1. Aluminum insert
NOTE: The epoxy glue curing time is 30 minutes.
-
CAUTION
If you notice any clearance between plastic
insert and aluminum insert, fill gap with ep-
oxy glue to obtain good adhesion of alumi-
num insert.
F01L2UA
1
2
F01L2VA
1
2
F01L2WA
1
Section 13 TECHNICAL DATA
13-01-1
SPX MODEL 0
ENGINE SPX (5838/5839)
Engine type BOMBARDIER-ROTAX 787
Induction type Rotary valve
Exhaust system
Type Water cooled, water injected with regulator
Water injection fitting (head) 3.5 mm (.139 in)
Water injection fitting (cone) Not applicable
Water injection fitting
(muffler)
3.5 mm (.139 in)
Exhaust valve Rotax Adjustable Variable Exhaust (RAVE)
Starting system Electric start
Lubrication
Fuel/oil mixture VROI (Variable Rate Oil Injection)
Oil injection pump Direct driven
Oil injection type BOMBARDIER-ROTAX
Number of cylinders 2
Bore
Standard 82 mm (3.228 in)
First oversize 82.25 mm (3.238 in)
Second oversize Not applicable
Stroke 74 mm (2.91 in)
Displacement 781.6 cm (47.7 in)
Corrected compression ratio 6.0:1
Combustion chamber volume 36.3 1.6 cc
Cylinder head warpage (maximum) 0.05 mm (.002 in)
Piston ring type and quantity 1 Semi-trapez 1 Rectangular
Ring end gap
New 0.40 - 0.55 mm (.016 - .022 in)
Wear limit 1.00 mm (.039 in)
Ring piston groove
New 0.025 - 0.070 mm (.001 - .003 in)
Piston/cylinder wall
clearance
New (minimum) 0.11 mm (.0043 in)
Cylinder taper (maximum) 0.10 mm (.004 in)
Cylinder out of round (maximum) 0.08 mm (.003 in)
Connecting rod big end axial
play
New 0.230 - 0.617 mm (.009 - .024 in)
Crankshaft deflection MAG side: 0.050 mm (.002 in); PTO side: 0.030 mm (.001 in)
Rotary valve timing
Opening 147 5 BTDC
Closing 63.5 5 ATDC
Rotary valve duration 159
Rotary valve/cover clearance 0.25 - 0.35 mm (.010 - .014 in)
Connecting rod/crankshaft
pin radial clearance
New 0.023 - 0.034 mm (.0009 - .0013 in)
Connecting rod/piston pin
radial clearance
New 0.003 - 0.012 mm (.00012 - .00047 in)
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:
13-01-2
ELECTRICAL SPX (5838/5839)
Magneto generator output
180 W @ 6000 RPM
or 5.0 A @ 6000 RPM
Ignition system type Digital DC-CDI
Spark plug
Make and type NGK BR8ES
Gap 0.5 - 0.6 mm (.020 - .024 in)
Ignition timing
(BTDC)
mm (in) 3.38 (.133)
Degrees 22 1 @ 3500 RPM
Battery charging coil 0.1 - 1
Trigger coil 190 - 300
Ignition coil
Primary 0.33 - 0.62
Secondary 8.4 - 15.6 k
Engine rev limiter setting 7200 ( 50) RPM
Battery 12 V, 19 Ah (Yuasa/Exide)
Fuse
Starting system 5 A
Charging system 2 x 15 A
VTS system 7.5 A
CARBURETION SPX (5838/5839)
Carburetor
Type
Mikuni BN-40I (diaphragm)
Fuel accelerator pump
Quantity 2
Main jet
140 (MAG)
142.5 (PTO)
Pilot jet 67.5
Spring 95 g
Valve seat 1.5 mm
Adjustment
Low-speed screw 1.5 turn 1/4
High-speed screw 0
Idle speed (in water) 1500 RPM
Idle speed (out of water) 3000 RPM
Fuel
Type Regular unleaded gasoline
Minimum octane no. 87
Fuel return line orifice MAG and PTO: 0.8 mm (.031 in)
COOLING SPX (5838/5839)
Type Open circuit Direct flow from jet propulsion unit
Thermostat None
Monitoring beeper setting 86-94C (187-201F)
13-01-3
PROPULSION SPX (5838/5839)
Propulsion system Bombardier Formula Pump
Jet pump type Axial flow single stage
Impeller rotation (seen from rear) Counterclockwise
Transmission Direct drive
Coupling type Crown splines
Oil type
SEA-DOO JET PUMP SYNTHETIC
POLYOL ESTER OIL 75W90 GL5
Steering nozzle pivoting angle 26
Minimum required water level 90 cm (35 in)
Drive shaft deflection (maximum) 0.5 mm (.020 in)
Impeller outside diameter 139.5 mm (5.490 in)
Impeller/wear ring
clearance
New 0.0 - 0.4 mm (.000 - .016 in)
Impeller shaft end play (new) 0.12 - 0.54 mm (.005 - .021 in)
Impeller shaft radial play 0.05 mm (.002 in)
Impeller pitch/material Progressive pitch 16 - 23/stainless steel
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Do not mix different brands or oil types.
DIMENSIONS SPX (5838/5839)
Number of passenger (driver incl.) 2
Overall length 254 cm (100 in)
Overall width 105 cm (41.3 in)
Overall height 92 cm (36.2 in)
Dry weight 194 kg (428 lb)
Load limit (passenger and 10 kg (22 lb) luggage) 159 kg (351 lb)
CAPACITIES SPX (5838/5839)
Fuel tank (including reserve) 34 L (9 U.S. gal)
Fuel tank reserve 5 L (1.3 U.S. gal)
Oil injection reservoir 4.5 L (1.2 U.S. gal)
Jet pump impeller shaft
reservoir
Capacity 80 mL (2.7 U.S. oz)
Oil level height Up to plug
13-01-4
MATERIALS SPX (5838/5839)
Hull Composite
Inlet grate Plastic
Impeller housing/stator/venturi/nozzle Plastic/brass/plastic/aluminum
Air intake silencer Thermoplastic
Flame arrester Multi-layer wire screen
Exhaust muffler Aluminum
Steering padding Thermoplastic with polyethylene foam
Fuel tank Polyethylene
Oil injection reservoir Polyethylene
Seat Polyurethane foam
STANDARD EQUIPMENT SPX (5838/5839)
Safety lanyard Standard
Digitally Encoded Security System Standard
Fuel tank reserve Standard
Monitoring beeper Standard
Speedometer Optional
Fuel/oil gauge (analog) Standard
Tachometer Optional
Variable trim system (VTS) Standard
Reverse Not applicable
Storage compartment Standard
Rear grab handle Standard
Extinguisher holder Standard
Tool kit Standard
PERFORMANCE SPX (5838/5839)
Estimated pump output 34 kW (46 hp)
Maximum fuel consumption at wide open throttle
44.5 L/h
(11.7 U.S. gal/h)
Cruising time at full throttle
Fuel tank without reserve 39 minutes
Fuel tank reserve 7 minutes
13-01-5
TIGHTENING TORQUES SPX (5838/5839)
E
N
G
I
N
E
Exhaust manifold screw 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (3) (4)
Magneto flywheel nut 105 Nm (77 lbfft) (1)
Flywheel (PTO side) 110 Nm (81 lbfft) (5)
Crankcase screws
M8 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (3) (4)
M10 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (3) (4)
Crankcase/engine support nuts 35 Nm (26 lbfft) (1)
Engine mount/hull 25 Nm (18 lbfft) (1)
Cylinder head screws 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (1) (4)
Crankcase/cylinder screws 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (3) (4)
Tuned pipe flange screws/nut 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (1)
Tuned pipe fixation screws 25 Nm (18 lbfft) (1)
Flame arrester screws 10 Nm (89 lbfin) (1)
Magneto housing cover screws 9 Nm (80 lbfin) (5)
Starter mounting screws 22 Nm (16 lbfft) (1)
Spark plugs 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (5)
J
E
T

P
U
M
P
Impeller 70 Nm (52 lbfft) (2)
Pump/hull nuts 33 Nm (24 lbfft) (1)
Venturi/pump housing screws 21 Nm (16 lbfft) (1)
VTS ring screws 13 Nm (10 lbfft) (1)
Pump housing cover screws 4 Nm (35 lbfin) (1)
Inlet grate screws 8 Nm (71 lbfin) (1)
Riding plate screws 10 Nm (89 lbfin) (1)
S
T
E
E
R
I
N
G
Cable retaining block bolts 6 Nm (53 lbfin)
Steering cable/stem arm bolt 3 Nm (26 lbfin)
Steering stem arm bolts 6 Nm (53 lbfin)
Handlebar clamp bolts 26 Nm (19 lbfft)
Steering cable ball joint bolt (nozzle) 7 Nm (62 lbfin)
Front support bolts 15 Nm (11 lbfft)
Rear support/cable bracket bolts 15 Nm (11 lbfft)
Handlebar grip screw 13 Nm (10 lbfft)
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: apply where indicated; (1) Loctite 242 (blue)
(2) Loctite 271 (red)
(3) Loctite 518
(4) Synthetic grease
(5) Anti-seize lubricant
;
WARNING
Correct torques and use of Loctite must be strictly followed.
Subsection 02 (GS AND GSX LIMITED)
13-02-1
GS AND GSX LIMITED 0
ENGINE GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Engine type BOMBARDIER-ROTAX 717 BOMBARDIER-ROTAX 947
Induction type Rotary valve Reed valve
Exhaust system
Type Water cooled, water injected
Water cooled, water injected
with regulator
Water injection fitting (cone) 3.5 mm (.139 in) Not applicable
Water injection fitting (muffler) Not applicable 3.5 mm (.139 in)
Exhaust valve Not applicable RAVE
Lubrication
Oil injection pump Gear driven Direct driven
Oil injection type BOMBARDIER-ROTAX FORMULA XP-S (synthetic)
Bore
Standard 82 mm (3.228 in) 88 mm (3.465 in)
First oversize 82.25 mm (3.238 in) 88.25 mm (3.474 in)
Second oversize 82.50 mm (3.248 in) Not applicable
Stroke 68 mm (2.677 in) 78.20 mm (3.079 in)
Displacement 718.2 cm (43.81 in) 951.2 cm (58 in)
Corrected compression ratio 6.2:1 6.0:1
Combustion chamber volume 32.6 1.4 cc 45.3 2.0 cc
Cylinder head warpage (maximum) 0.05 mm (.002 in) Not applicable
Piston ring type and quantity
1 Semi-trapez
1 Rectangular
2 Semi-trapez
Ring end gap
New 0.40 - 0.55 mm (.016 - .022 in)
Ring/piston groove
clearance
New 0.025 - 0.070 mm (.001 - .003 in)
clearance
New (minimum) 0.10 mm (.0039 in) 0.09 mm (.0035 in)
Connecting rod big end
axial play
New
0.311 - 0.678 mm
(.012 - .027 in)
0.390 - 0.737
(.015 - .029 in)
Rotary valve timing
Opening 147 5 BTDC Not applicable
Closing 65.5 5 ATDC Not applicable
Rotary valve duration 159 Not applicable
Rotary valve/cover clearance 0.25 - 0.35 mm (.010 - .014 in) Not applicable
Connecting rod/
crankshaft pin radial
clearance
New
0.020 - 0.033 mm
(.0008 - .0013 in)
0.023 - 0.034 mm
(.0009 - .0013 in)
radial clearance
New 0.003 - 0.012 mm (.00012 - .00047 in)
13-02-2
ELECTRICAL GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
160 W @ 6000 RPM
or 4.0 A @ 2000 RPM
180 W @ 6000 RPM
or 5.0 A @ 6000 RPM
Ignition system type Digital CDI Digital DC-CDI
Spark plug
Gap 0.5 - 0.6 mm (.020 - .024 in)
Ignition timing
(BTDC)
mm (in) 2.59 (.102) 3.60 (.142)
Degrees 20 1 22 1 @ 3500 RPM
Generating coil 40 - 76 Not applicable
Battery charging coil 0.05 - 0.6 0.1 - 1
Trigger coil Not applicable 190 - 300
Ignition coil
Primary 0.33 - 0.62
Engine rev limiter setting 7000 ( 50) RPM 7200 ( 50) RPM
Fuse
Starting system 5 A
VTS system Not applicable 7.5 A
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Engine cold @ 6000 RPM.
CARBURETION GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Carburetor
Type
Mikuni BN-40I diaphragm
Quantity 1 2
Main jet 167.5 165
Pilot jet 70 82.5
Spring 95 g
Valve seat 1.5 mm 2.0 mm
Adjustment
Low-speed screw 1-1/4 turn 1/4 2 turn 1/4
High-speed screw 0
Fuel
Fuel return line orifice 0.8 mm (.031 in)
MAG and PTO:
0.8 mm (.031 in)
COOLING GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Thermostat None
13-02-3
PROPULSION GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Oil type
Impeller outside diameter 139.5 mm (5.490 in) 155.6 mm (6.126 in)
Impeller/wear ring clearance
New 0.0 - 0.4 mm (.000 - .016 in)
Impeller pitch/material
Progressive pitch
11 - 22/stainless steel
Progressive pitch
DIMENSIONS GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Overall height 94 cm (37 in)
Dry weight 215 kg (474 lb) 237 kg (523 lb)
CAPACITIES GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Fuel tank (including reserve) 56.5 L (15 U.S. gal)
Fuel tank reserve 11.4 L (3 U.S. gal)
Oil injection reservoir 6 L (1.6 U.S. gal)
reservoir
Capacity 80 mL (2.7 U.S. oz) 120 mL (4.0 U.S. oz)
13-02-4
MATERIALS GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Hull Composite
Inlet grate Aluminum
Impeller housing/stator/venturi/nozzle
Plastic/plastic/
plastic/plastic
Plastic/brass/aluminum/
aluminum
Flame arrester Multi-layer wire screen Tubular wire screen
Resonator Not applicable Plastic
STANDARD EQUIPMENT GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Speedometer Optional Standard
Fuel/oil gauge (analog) Standard Not applicable
Info Center Not applicable Standard
Variable trim system (VTS) Optional Standard
Tool kit Standard
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Info Center standard functions:
Fuel level/low fuel level/low oil level/low voltage/high temperature/tachometer/speedometer/average speed/
peak speed/trip meter/hour meter/clock/lake temperature/chronometer/VTS indicator/maintenance information.
PERFORMANCE GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
Estimated pump power 26.3 kW (35.3 hp) 55.8 kW (74.9 hp)
33.5 L/h
(8.8 U.S. gal/h)
55 L/h
(14.5 U.S. gal/h)
Cruising time at full
throttle
Fuel tank without reserve 1 hour 21 minutes 49 minutes
Fuel tank reserve 21 minutes 13 minutes
13-02-5
TIGHTENING TORQUES GS (5626/5844) GSX Limited (5629/5845)
E
N
G
I
N
E
Exhaust manifold screw 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (4) 40 Nm (30lbfft) (4)
Magneto flywheel nut 145 Nm (107 lbfft) (1) 115 Nm (85 lbfft) (1)
Flywheel (PTO side) 110 Nm (81 lbfft) (5) 115 Nm (85 lbfft) (1)
Crankcase screws
M8 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (3) (4) 27 Nm (20 lbfft) (3) (4)
M10 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (3) (4)
Crankcase/engine support nuts 35 Nm (26 lbfft) (1) 25 Nm (18 lbfft) (1)
Cylinder head screws 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (1) (4) 34 Nm (25 lbfft) (1) (4)
Cylinder head nuts Not applicable 34 Nm (25 lbfft) (1)
Crankcase/cylinder screws 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (1) (4) Not applicable
Tuned pipe flange screws/nut 25 Nm (18 lbfft) (1) 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (1)
Flame arrester screws 10 Nm (89 lbfin) (1) Not applicable
Starter mounting screws 22 Nm (16 lbfft) (1) 10 Nm (89 lbfin) (1)
J
E
T

P
U
M
P
VTS ring screws Not applicable 13 Nm (10 lbfft) (1)
Riding plate screws 22 Nm (16 lbfft) (1)
S
T
E
E
R
I
N
G
Steering cable ball joint (nozzle) 2 Nm (18 lbfin) 7 Nm (62 lbfin)
Steering support bolts 15 Nm (11 lbfft) (1)
(3) Loctite 518
;
WARNING
13-03-1
XP LIMITED 0
ENGINE XP Limited (5665/5667)
Induction type Reed valve
Exhaust system
Type Water cooled, water injected with regulator
Water injection fitting (cone) Not applicable
(muffler)
3.5 mm (.139 in)
Exhaust valve Rotax Adjustable Variable Exhaust (RAVE)
Lubrication
Oil injection pump Direct driven
Oil injection type FORMULA XP-S (synthetic)
Bore
Second oversize Not applicable
Stroke 78.20 mm (3.079 in)
Displacement 951.2 cm (58 in)
Cylinder head warpage (maximum) Not applicable
Piston ring type and quantity 2 Semi-trapez
Ring end gap
New 0.40 - 0.55 mm (.016 - .022 in)
Ring piston groove
New 0.025 - 0.070 mm (.001 - .003 in)
clearance
Connecting rod big end axial
play
New 0.390 - 0.737 mm (.015 - .029 in)
Rotary valve timing
Opening Not applicable
Closing Not applicable
Rotary valve duration Not applicable
Rotary valve/cover clearance Not applicable
New 0.023 - 0.034 mm (.0009 - .0013 in)
radial clearance
New 0.003 - 0.012 mm (.00012 - .00047 in)
13-03-2
ELECTRICAL XP Limited (5665/5667)
180 W @ 6000 RPM
or 5.0 A @ 6000 RPM
Ignition system type Digital DC-CDI
Spark plug
Gap 0.5 - 0.6 mm (.020 - .024 in)
Ignition timing
(BTDC)
mm (in) 3.60 (.142)
Degrees 22 1 @ 3500 RPM
Battery charging coil 0.1 - 1
Trigger coil 190 - 300
Ignition coil
Primary 0.33 - 0.62
Engine rev limiter setting 7200 ( 50) RPM
Fuse
Starting system 5 A
VTS system 7.5 A
CARBURETION XP Limited (5665/5667)
Carburetor
Type
Mikuni BN-46I (diaphragm)
Quantity 2
Main jet 165
Pilot jet 82.5
Spring 95 g
Valve seat 2.0 mm
Adjustment
Low-speed screw 2.0 turn 1/4
High-speed screw 0
Fuel
Fuel return line orifice MAG and PTO: 0.8 mm (.031 in)
COOLING XP Limited (5665/5667)
Thermostat None
13-03-3
PROPULSION XP Limited (5665/5667)
Coupling type Split FR and RR
Oil type
Impeller/wear ring
clearance
New 0.0 - 0.4 mm (.000 - .016 in)
Impeller pitch/material Progressive pitch 16 - 25/stainless steel
DIMENSIONS XP Limited (5665/5667)
CAPACITIES XP Limited (5665/5667)
Fuel tank reserve 10 L (2.6 U.S. gal)
reservoir
13-03-4
MATERIALS XP Limited (5665/5667)
Hull Composite
Impeller housing/stator/venturi/nozzle Plastic/brass/aluminum/aluminum
Flame arrester Tubular wire screen
Resonator Plastic
STANDARD EQUIPMENT XP Limited (5665/5667)
Speedometer Standard
Fuel/oil gauge (analog) Standard
Tachometer Standard
Variable trim system (VTS) Standard
Tool kit Standard
PERFORMANCE XP Limited (5665/5667)
Estimated pump output 52.5 kW (70.4 hp)
55 L/h
(14.5 U.S. gal/h)
Fuel tank without reserve 48 minutes
13-03-5
TIGHTENING TORQUES XP Limited (5665/5667)
E
N
G
I
N
E
Exhaust manifold screw 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (4)
Crankcase screws
M8 27 Nm (20 lbfft) (3) (4)
M10 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (3) (4)
Cylinder head nuts 34 Nm (25 lbfft) (1)
Magneto cover screws 9 Nm (80 lbfin) (5)
Starter mounting screws 10 Nm (89 lbfin) (1)
J
E
T

P
U
M
P
VTS ring screws 13 Nm (10 lbfft) (1)
S
T
E
E
R
I
N
G
Steering cable/lever 3 Nm (26 lbfin)
Steering cable ball joint bolt (nozzle) 7 Nm (62 lbfin)
Steering support bolts 15 Nm (11 lbfft)
Lever pivot bolt 6 Nm (53 lbfin)
(3) Loctite 518
;
WARNING
13-04-1
GTS MODEL 0
ENGINE GTS (5819)
Induction type Rotary valve
Exhaust system
(head)
3.5 mm (.139 in)
(cone)
3.5 mm (.139 in)
Lubrication
Oil injection pump Gear driven
Oil injection type BOMBARDIER-ROTAX
Bore
Second oversize 82.50 mm (3.248 in)
Stroke 68 mm (2.677 in)
Displacement 718.2 cm (43.81 in)
Cylinder head warpage (maximum) 0.05 mm (.002 in)
Piston ring type and quantity 1 Semi-Trapez 1 Rectangular
Ring end gap
New 0.40 - 0.55 mm (.016 - .022 in)
Ring/piston groove
clearance
New 0.025 - 0.070 mm (.001 - .003 in)
clearance
axial play
New 0.311 - 0.678 mm (.012 - .027 in)
Crankshaft deflection
MAG side: 0.050 mm (.002 in)
PTO side: 0.030 mm (.001 in)
Rotary valve timing
Opening 147 5 BTDC
Closing 65.5 5 ATDC
Rotary valve duration 159
Rotary valve/cover clearance 0.25 - 0.35 mm (.010 - .014 in)
New 0.020 - 0.033 mm (.0008 - .0013 in)
radial clearance
New 0.003 - 0.012 mm (.00012 - .00047 in)
13-04-2
ELECTRICAL GTS (5819)
Magneto generator output 160 W @ 6000 RPM or 4.0 A @ 2000 RPM
Ignition system type Digital CDI
Spark plug
Gap 0.5 - 0.6 mm (.020 - .024 in)
Ignition timing
(BTDC)
mm (in) 2.59 (.102)
Degrees 20 1
Generating coil 40 - 76
Battery charging coil 0.05 - 0.6
Ignition coil
Primary Not applicable
Secondary 9 - 15 k
Engine rev limiter setting 7000 50 RPM
Fuse
Starting system 5 A
Charging system 15 A
CARBURETION GTS (5819)
Carburetor
Type
Quantity 1
Main jet 167.5
Pilot jet 70
Spring 95 g
Valve seat 1.5 mm
Adjustment
Low-speed screw 1-1/4 turn 1/4
High-speed screw 0
Fuel
COOLING GTS (5819)
Thermostat None
13-04-3
PROPULSION GTS (5819)
Oil type
Impeller/wear ring
clearance
New 0.0 - 0.4 mm (.000 - .016 in)
Wear limit 1.00 mm(.040 in)
Impeller pitch/material Progressive pitch, 11 - 22/stainless steel
DIMENSIONS GTS (5819)
Overall length 302 cm (119.0 in)
CAPACITIES GTS (5819)
Fuel tank reserve 11.4 L (3 U.S. gal)
Oil injection reservoir 4.5 L (1.2 U.S. gal)
reservoir
13-04-4
MATERIALS GTS (5819)
Hull Composite
Inlet grate Plastic
Impeller housing/stator/venturi/nozzle Plastic/plastic/plastic/plastic
Flame arrester Multi-layer wire screen
Steering padding Thermoplastic elastomer with polystyrene foam
STANDARD EQUIPMENT GTS (5819)
Fuel gauge/low oil warning light Standard
Tachometer Optional
Speedometer Optional
Variable trim system (VTS) Not applicable
Reverse Standard
Tool kit Standard
PERFORMANCE GTS (5819)
Estimated pump power 35.9 kW (48 hp)
33.5 L/h
(8.8 U.S. gal/h)
Cruising time at full
throttle
Fuel tank without reserve 1 hour
13-04-5
TIGHTENING TORQUES GTS (5819)
E
N
G
I
N
E
Exhaust manifold screws 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (4)
Crankcase screws
M8 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (3) (4)
M10 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (3) (4)
Crankcase/cylinder screws 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (1) (4)
Flame arrester screws 10 Nm (89 lbfin) (1)
Starter mounting screws 22 Nm (16 lbfft) (1)
J
E
T

P
U
M
P
Nozzle/venturi screws 20 Nm (15 lbfft) (1)
S
T
E
E
R
I
N
G
Steering cable jam nuts 10 Nm (89 lbfin)
Steering support/collar screws 15 Nm (11 lbfft) (1)
Steering stem screw 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (2)
Handlebar nuts 26 Nm (19 lbfft)
Reverse gate screws 20 Nm (15 lbfft) (1)
Steering cable ball joint (nozzle) 2 Nm (18 lbfin)
Reverse cable ball joint nut 7 Nm (62 lbfin)
Handlebar grip screw 13 Nm (10 lbf ft)
(3) Loctite 518
;
WARNING
Subsection 05 (GTI AND GTX LIMITED)
13-05-1
GTI AND GTX LIMITED 0
ENGINE GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Engine type BOMBARDIER-ROTAX 717 BOMBARDIER-ROTAX 947
Induction type Rotary valve Reed valve
Exhaust system
Water cooled, water injected
with regulator
Water injection fitting (cone) 3.5 mm (.139 in) Not applicable
Water injection fitting (muffler) Not applicable 3.5 mm (.139 in)
Exhaust valve Not applicable RAVE
Lubrication
Oil injection pump Gear driven Direct driven
Oil injection type BOMBARDIER-ROTAX FORMULA XP-S (synthetic)
Bore
Standard 82 mm (3.228 in) 88 mm (3.465 in)
First oversize 82.25 mm (3.238 in) 88.25 mm (3.474 in)
Second oversize 82.50 mm (3.248 in) Not applicable
Stroke 68 mm (2.677 in) 78.20 mm (3.079 in)
Displacement 718.2 cm (43.81 in) 951.2 cm (58 in)
Corrected compression ratio 6.2:1 6.0:1
Combustion chamber volume 32.6 1.4 cc 45.3 2.0 cc
Cylinder head warpage (maximum) 0.05 mm (.002 in) Not applicable
Piston ring type and quantity
1 Semi-trapez
1 Rectangular
2 Semi-trapez
Ring end gap
New 0.40 - 0.55 mm (.016 - .022 in)
Ring/piston groove
clearance
New 0.025 - 0.070 mm (.001 - .003 in)
clearance
New (minimum) 0.10 mm (.0039 in) 0.09 mm (.0035 in)
axial play
New
0.311 - 0.678 mm
(.012 - .027 in)
0.390 - 0.737 mm
(.015 - .029 in)
Rotary valve timing
Opening 147 5 BTDC Not applicable
Closing 65.5 5 ATDC Not applicable
Rotary valve duration 159 Not applicable
Rotary valve/cover clearance 0.25 - 0.35 mm (.010 - .014 in) Not applicable
Connecting
rod/crankshaft pin radial
clearance
New
0.020 - 0.033 mm
(.0008 - .0013 in)
0.023 - 0.034 mm
(.0009 - .0013 in)
Connecting rod/piston
New 0.003 - 0.012 mm (.00012 - .00047 in)
13-05-2
ELECTRICAL GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
160 W @ 6000 RPM
or 4.0 A @ 2000 RPM
180 W @ 6000 RPM
or 5.0 A @ 6000 RPM
Ignition system type Digital CDI Digital DC-CDI
Spark plug
Gap 0.5 - 0.6 mm (.020 - .024 in)
Ignition timing
(BTDC)
mm (in) 2.59 (.102) 3.60 (.142)
Degrees 20 1 22 1 @ 3500 RPM
Generating coil 40 - 76 Not applicable
Battery charging coil 0.05 - 0.6 0.1 - 1
Trigger coil Not applicable 190 - 300
Ignition coil
Primary 0.33 - 0.62
Engine rev limiter setting 7000 ( 50) RPM 7200 ( 50) RPM
Fuse
Starting system 5 A
VTS system Not applicable
CARBURETION GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Carburetor
Type
Quantity 1 2
Main jet 167.5 165
Pilot jet 70 82.5
Spring 95 g
Valve seat 1.5 mm 2.0 mm
Adjustment
Low-speed screw 1-1/4 turn 1/4 2 turn 1/4
High-speed screw 0
Fuel
MAG and PTO:
0.8 mm (.031 in)
COOLING GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Thermostat None
13-05-3
PROPULSION GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Oil type
Impeller outside diameter 139.5 mm (5.490 in) 155.6 mm (6.126 in)
Impeller/wear ring clearance
New 0.0 - 0.4 mm (.000 - .016 in)
Impeller shaft side play 0.05 mm (.002 in)
Impeller pitch/material
Progressive pitch
Progressive pitch
DIMENSIONS GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Overall length 312 cm (122.8 in)
Overall width 119 cm (47 in)
Overall height 94 cm (37 in)
Dry weight 269 kg (593 lb) 288 kg (635 lb)
CAPACITIES GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Fuel tank (including reserve) 56.5 L (15 U.S. gal)
Fuel tank reserve 11.4 L (3.0 U.S. gal)
reservoir
Capacity 80 mL (2.7 U.S. oz) 120 mL (4.0 U.S. oz)
13-05-4
MATERIALS GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Hull Composite
Impeller housing/stator/venturi/nozzle
Plastic/brass/plastic/
plastic
Plastic/brass/aluminum/
aluminum
Flame arrester Multi-layer wire screen Tubular wire screen
Resonator Not applicable Plastic
STANDARD EQUIPMENT GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Speedometer Standard
Fuel/oil gauge (analog) Standard Not applicable
Tachometer Not applicable Standard
Info Center Not applicable Standard
Reverse Standard
Glove box Standard
Tool kit Standard
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Info Center standard functions:
Fuel level/low fuel level/low oil level/low voltage/high temperature/tachometer/speedometer/average speed/peak speed/
trip meter/hour meter/clock/compass/exterior temperature/lake temperature/chronometer/maintenance information.
PERFORMANCE GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
Estimated pump power 26 kW (34.9 hp) 51 kW (68.4 hp)
33.5 L/h
(8.8 U.S. gal/h)
55 L/h
(14.5 U.S. gal/h)
Fuel tank without reserve 1 hour 21 minutes 49 minute
Fuel tank reserve 21 minutes 13 minutes
13-05-5
TIGHTENING TORQUES GTI (5836/5841) GTX Limited (5837/5842)
E
N
G
I
N
E
Exhaust manifold screw 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (4) 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (4)
Magneto flywheel nut 145 Nm (107 lbfft) (1) 115 Nm (85 lbfft) (1)
Flywheel (PTO side) 110 Nm (81 lbfft) (5) 115 Nm (85 lbfft) (1)
Crankcase screws
M8 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (3) (4) 27 Nm (20 lbfft) (3) (4)
M10 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (3) (4)
Crankcase/engine support nuts 35 Nm (26 lbfft) (1) 25 Nm (18 lbfft) (1)
Cylinder head screws 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (1) (4) 34 Nm (25 lbfft) (1) (4)
Cylinder head nuts Not applicable 34 Nm (25 lbfft) (1)
Crankcase/cylinder screws 24 Nm (17 lbfft) (1) (4) Not applicable
Tuned pipe flange screws/nut 25 Nm (18 lbfft) (1) 40 Nm (30 lbfft) (1)
Flame arrester screws 10 Nm (89 lbfin) (1) Not applicable
Starter mounting screws 22 Nm (16 lbfft) (1) 10 Nm (89 lbfin) (1)
J
E
T

P
U
M
P
Riding plate screws 22 Nm (16 lbfft) (1)
S
T
E
E
R
I
N
G
Steering cable ball joint (nozzle) 2 Nm (18 lbfin) 7 Nm (62 lbfin)
Steering support bolts 15 Nm (11 lbfft) (1)
(3) Loctite 518
;
WARNING
Section 14 WIRING DIAGRAMS
Subsection 01 (WIRING DIAGRAMS)
14-01-1
WIRING DIAGRAMS 0
WIRE COLOR CODES
First color of a wire is the main color. Second color
is the tracer.
Example: YELLOW/BLACK is a YELLOW wire
with a BLACK tracer.
WIRE DIGIT CODES
First number indicates in which connector the
wire is plugged in.
Second number indicates the position of the wire
in the connector.
The letter at the end of the number (if applicable)
indicates a common circuit in the MPEM printed
circuit with another wire bearing the same letter.
Example: 2-18 (g)
The first number indicates that the wire is posi-
tioned in the connector no. 2 of the MPEM.
The second number indicates that the wire is po-
sitioned in the terminal no. 18.
The letter (g) indicates a common circuit with an-
other wire(s) bearing the same letter (g) in the cir-
cuit.
PACKARD CONNECTOR
To remove terminal from connector housing, use
Snap-on TT600-4 tool.
AMP PLUG CONNECTOR
These connectors are found on the MPEM.
When servicing electrical system, special care
must be taken when working with AMP Plug Con-
nectors in order to prevent any malfunction of the
system.
Description
AMP PLUG CONNECTOR
1. Plug assembly
2. Cover assembly
3. Mating seal
4. Wedge lock
5. Header assembly
6. Seal plug
7. Power wire
8. Signal wire
9. Locking tab
N
WARNING
Ensure all terminals are properly crimped on
wires and connector housings are properly
fastened.
F01B1JA
F00H0WB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
14-01-2
Removal
To remove the plug connector from the header as-
sembly, press both tabs and pull plug.
Step : Press tabs (both sides)
Step : Pull plug
Installation
Apply a thin coat of DEOXIT contact lubricant (P/N
293 550 015) to the pins of the header on the
MPEM only.
1. Apply a thin coat of DEOXIT contact lubricant
Each plug assembly is mechanically keyed to
mate only with identical mechanical keyed header
on the MPEM.
1. Mechanically keyed
Contact Removal
SIGNAL WIRE
Insert a screwdriver blade between the connector
and the wedge lock tab.
Release the locking tab and at the same time, pry
open the wedge lock to open position.
-
CAUTION
Do not apply lubricant excessively. Care
must be taken so that the lubricant will not
come in contact with the mating seal; the
seal may loose its sealing capacities. Do not
apply lubricant on contacts inside plug con-
nector.
F00H0NA
1
2
1
2
F00H11A
1 -
CAUTION
The wedge lock should never be removed
from the connector for insertion or removal
of the signal wire contacts
F00H12A 1
14-01-3
1. Screwdriver between wedge lock and connector
2. Locking tab
Repeat the same steps for the other locking tab
retaining the wedge lock.
The wedge lock is now in the open position.
1. Wedge lock opened
While rotating the wire back and forth over a half
turn (1/4 turn in each direction), gently pull the
wire until the contact is removed.
1. Rotate wire back and forth
2. Pull wire
POWER WIRE CONTACT
NOTE: The wedge lock must be removed to ex-
tract power contact.
Open the wedge lock.
Pull both locking tabs and remove wedge lock
from plug assembly.
1. Pull locking tab (both sides)
Before extraction, push wire forward to relieve
pressure on retaining tab.
Insert a 4.8 mm (.189 in) wide screwdriver blade
inside the front of the contact cavity.
F00H0OA
1 2
F00H0PA
1
F00H0QA
1
2
F00H0RA
1
14-01-4
Pry back the retaining tab while gently pulling wire
back until contact is removed.
Contact Crimping
The size of the wires must be 20 to 16 AWG with
a wire insulation diameter having a minimum di-
mension of 1.7 mm (.067 in) and a maximum di-
mension of 2.78 mm (.106 in).
The wire strip length shall be 5.1 mm (13/64 in).
NOTE: When stripping wires, ensure conductor is
not nicked, scrapped or cut. Wire stripping tool
jaws may leave marks on the surface of the wire
insulation. If these marks occur at the location of
the wire seal, leakage may result. Insulation sur-
face within 25 mm (1 in) from the tip of the con-
tact must be smooth.
All contacts in AMP plug connectors must be
crimped using the crimping tool (P/N 295 100
164).
CRIMPING TOOL (P/N 295 100 164)
All circuits are sealed by a diaphragm in the rubber
wire seal. When installing wire contacts in plug
connector, the diaphragm is pierced as the con-
tact passes through it.
If the diaphragm is pierced and the cavity is not
used, install a seal plug, large end first, into cir-
cuit cavity as far as it will go.
NOTE: It is suggested that all unused circuit cavi-
ties be sealed with a seal plug, even if they are not
pierced.
1. Seal plug
2. Wire seal
-
CAUTION
If contacts are not crimped using the proper
crimping tool, the wire seal may be damaged.
F00H0ZA
F00B0EA
1
F00H10A
2
14-01-5
Contact Installation
For insertion of signal contact, make sure the
wedge lock is in the open position.
NOTE: For insertion of power contact, the wedge
lock may or may not be on the open position.
Insert contact into appropriate circuit cavity and
push as far as it will go.
Pull back on the contact wire to be sure the reten-
tion fingers in the housing are holding the contact
properly.
After all required contacts have been inserted, the
wedge lock must be closed to its locked position.
-
CAUTION
Do not pierce the diaphragm with a sharp
point for electrical troubleshooting. The re-
sulting pinholes in the insulation will allow
moisture to penetrate the system and possi-
bly result in system failure.

1998 Seadoo Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1998 Seadoo Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1998 Seadoo Shop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the manual?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

www.SeaDooManuals.

Bombardier Inc. 1998

*Registered trademarks of Bombardier Inc.

is a trademark of Loctite Corporation

is a trademark of Snap-on Tools Corporation

is a trademark of Gelcote International Limited

watercraft models SPX 5838/5839,

is a trademark of Loctite Corporation.

is a trademark of Loctite Corporation.

is a trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.

JET PUMP SYNTHETIC OIL

repair kit are available. Replace

You might also like